diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/ABSOLUTE.ASM b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/ABSOLUTE.ASM
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..abddaa3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/ABSOLUTE.ASM	
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+	TITLE	ABSOLUTE - helper for assembly routines
+
+;***
+; ABSOLUTE - Helper for calling BASIC interpreter assembly routines
+;
+; Just used to clear information from the stack to various registers and
+; memory locations.
+;***
+
+CODE	SEGMENT BYTE PUBLIC 'CODE'
+
+	ASSUME	CS:CODE
+
+	PUBLIC	ABSOLUTE
+
+ABSOLUTE PROC	FAR
+
+	POP	DI			;return offset
+	POP	SI			;return segment
+	POP	BX			;address of routine offset
+	PUSH	SI			;restack return segment
+	PUSH	DI			;restack return offset
+	PUSH	DS:[0]			;stack DEF SEG segment
+	PUSH	[BX]			;stack routine offset
+	RET				;far return to start of called routine
+
+ABSOLUTE ENDP
+
+CODE	ENDS
+	END
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/ABSOLUTE.OBJ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/ABSOLUTE.OBJ
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..18e8bbb
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/ABSOLUTE.OBJ differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BCOM30.LIB b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BCOM30.LIB
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..63aed82
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BCOM30.LIB differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BCOM3087.LIB b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BCOM3087.LIB
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..edc0a54
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BCOM3087.LIB differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BRUN30.EXE b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BRUN30.EXE
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cee0505
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BRUN30.EXE differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BRUN30.LIB b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BRUN30.LIB
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2f831cb
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BRUN30.LIB differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BRUN3087.EXE b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BRUN3087.EXE
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c7d6aa1
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BRUN3087.EXE differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BRUN3087.LIB b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BRUN3087.LIB
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0c0d1d7
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BRUN3087.LIB differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BUG.BAS b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BUG.BAS
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..47d9f36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BUG.BAS	
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+tron
+defint a-z
+
+for startrow = 1 to 12 step 12
+    for startcol = 16 to 64 step 24
+        call triangle (startrow,startcol)
+    next startcol
+next startrow
+
+sub triangle (vertical,horizontal) static
+for row = 0 to 10
+    locate vertical+row,horizontal-row
+    for x = horizontal-row to horizontal+row
+        locate vertical+row,x
+        print "*"
+    next x
+next row
+end sub
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BUILDLIB.EXE b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BUILDLIB.EXE
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..59ae911
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/BUILDLIB.EXE differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/CALLSHAP.BAS b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/CALLSHAP.BAS
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5dd08cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/CALLSHAP.BAS	
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+defint a-z
+
+starta = 15 : startb=5 :startc=10 : startd = 40
+call ex (startb,startc)
+call tri (startd)
+call square(starta)
+end
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/DEMO.BAS b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/DEMO.BAS
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff7fd69
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/DEMO.BAS	
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+defint a-z
+
+startrow=1:startcol=16
+for row = 0 to 10
+    locate startrow+row,startcol-row
+    for x = startcol-row to startcol+row
+        locate startrow+row,x
+        print "*"
+    next x
+next row
+
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/E.BAS b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/E.BAS
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e62b9ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/E.BAS	
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+100 DIGITS% = 200
+110 DIM A%( 200 )
+120 HIGH% = DIGITS%
+130 X% = 0
+140 N% = HIGH% - 1
+150 IF N% <= 0 GOTO 200
+160 A%[ N% ] = 1
+170 N% = N% - 1
+180 GOTO 150
+200 A%[ 1 ] = 2
+210 A%[ 0 ] = 0
+220 IF HIGH% <= 9 GOTO 400
+230 HIGH% = HIGH% - 1
+235 N% = HIGH%
+240 IF N% = 0 GOTO 300
+250 A%[ N% ] = X% MOD N%
+255 rem PRINT "a[n-1]"; A%[ N% - 1 ]
+260 X% = ( 10 * A%[ N% - 1 ] ) + ( X% \ N% )
+265 rem PRINT "x: "; X%, "n: "; N%
+270 N% = N% - 1
+280 GOTO 240
+300 IF X% >= 10 GOTO 330
+310 PRINT USING "#"; X%;
+320 GOTO 220
+330 PRINT USING "##"; X%;
+340 GOTO 220
+400 PRINT ""
+410 PRINT "done"
+420 SYSTEM
+
+
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/EMULATOR.OBJ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/EMULATOR.OBJ
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..19b0d60
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/EMULATOR.OBJ differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/EX.BAS b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/EX.BAS
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..07a77fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/EX.BAS	
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+defint a-z
+
+sub ex (startb,startc) static
+size = 5
+for x=0 to size
+   locate startb+x, startc+x
+   print "*"
+   locate startb+x, startc+size-x
+   print "*"
+next x
+end sub
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/GWCOM.OBJ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/GWCOM.OBJ
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eff5bb0
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/GWCOM.OBJ differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/GWCOM87.OBJ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/GWCOM87.OBJ
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e945b45
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/GWCOM87.OBJ differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/INT86.ASM b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/INT86.ASM
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5189757
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/INT86.ASM	
@@ -0,0 +1,510 @@
+	TITLE	INT86 - BASCOM software interrupt calling routine
+
+;-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+;	R E V I S I O N   H I S T O R Y
+; 11-Mar-87	[1] RDK	Since VARPTR returns negative values for DGROUP
+;			offsets 32K to 64K, add 64K to these values.
+;-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+;
+; Microsoft Math Version
+;
+;
+;	Frame structure definition
+
+;	The following is used in INT86, INT86X, and PTR86.
+
+ARG1		=  0AH		;pointer to first of three arguments
+ARG2		=  08H		;pointer to second of three arguments
+ARG3		=  06H		;pointer to third of three arguments
+UCODE_SEG	=  04H		;user code return pointer - segment
+UCODE_OFF	=  02H		;user code return pointer - offset
+
+UCODE_BP	=  00H		;user code BP register value (FRAME base)
+
+;	The following frame temp variables are used in INT86 and INT86X.
+
+UCODE_FLGS	= -02H		;user code flag register value
+OUTARY_SEG	= -04H		;output array pointer - segment
+OUTARY_OFF	= -06H		;output array pointer - offset
+REG_NUM		= -08H		;number of regs used (INT86=8, INT86X=10)
+INT_ES		= -0AH		;INT ES register value
+INT_DS		= -0CH		;INT DS register value
+INT_FLGS	= -0EH		;INT flags register value
+INT_DI		= -10H		;INT DI register value
+INT_SI		= -12H		;INT SI register value
+INT_BP		= -14H		;INT BP register value
+INT_DX		= -16H		;INT DX register value
+INT_CX		= -18H		;INT CX register value
+INT_BX		= -1AH		;INT BX register value
+INT_AX		= -1CH		;INT AX register value
+
+FRM_SIZ		= -1CH		;negative size of frame temporaries
+
+;	Locations past frame allocation used to recover post-INT BP value.
+
+FRM_BP		= -1EH		;frame BP saved for post-INT recovery
+INT_BP_TMP	= -20H		;temp location for INT BP register value
+
+;***
+; INT86, INT86X - BASCOM software interrupt calling interface
+; Purpose:
+;	To allow a BASIC Compiler program to perform any software
+;	interrupt.  The interrupt is executed with the registers
+;	set to values specified in an integer array.  The post-
+;	interrupt values of the registers are then stored in
+;	another integer array.
+;
+;	CALL INT86[X] (int_no%,VARPTR(in_ary%(x)),VARPTR(out_ary%(y)))
+;
+; Inputs:
+;	int_no% = interrupt number (range 0 to 255) to execute
+;	in_ary%(x) to in_ary%(x+7) = input array. (INT86)
+;	in_ary%(x) to in_ary%(x+9) = input array. (INT86X)
+;		This array specifies the register values at the INT as
+;		follows (INT86 uses DGROUP to set DS and ES, not array
+;		elements 8 and 9.):
+;	in_ary%(x)   = AX
+;	in_ary%(x+1) = BX
+;	in_ary%(x+2) = CX
+;	in_ary%(x+3) = DX
+;	in_ary%(x+4) = BP
+;	in_ary%(x+5) = SI
+;	in_ary%(x+6) = DI
+;	in_ary%(x+7) = flags
+;	in_ary%(x+8) = DS  (if -1, then use DGROUP value) (INT86X only)
+;	in_ary%(x+9) = ES  (if -1, then use DGROUP value) (INT86X only)
+; Outputs:
+;	If no error:
+;		int_no% = unchanged (range 0 to 255)
+;		out_ary%(y) to out_ary%(y+9) = output array.
+;			This array will be set to the post-interrupt
+;			register values.  It has the same structure
+;			as in_ary%.
+;	If error:
+;		int_no% = -1
+;		out_ary% unchanged.  INT call is not performed.
+;		error occurs:
+;			first argument not 0 to 255 (2^8-1)
+;[1]			second or third arguments not in VARPTR range
+;[1]				-32767 (-2^15+1) to 1048575 (2^20-1)
+; Modifies:
+;	All, except BP, DS, and flags.
+;	Also, possible side effects of INT call.
+; Exceptions:
+;	INT 24H call may result from some INT 21H MS-DOS calls.
+;***
+
+DATA	SEGMENT WORD PUBLIC 'DATA'
+DATA	ENDS
+
+DGROUP	GROUP	DATA
+
+CODE	SEGMENT BYTE PUBLIC 'CODE'
+
+	ASSUME	CS:CODE,DS:DGROUP,ES:DGROUP,SS:DGROUP
+
+	PUBLIC	INT86
+
+INT86	PROC	FAR
+
+	PUSH	BP		;save BASCOM frame pointer on stack
+	MOV	BP,SP		;establish program frame reference
+	ADD	SP,FRM_SIZ	;allocate working space for frame
+	MOV	WORD PTR [BP].REG_NUM,08H ;eight regs used (not DS or ES)
+	JMP	SHORT INT86_COMMON ;jump to common code
+
+	PUBLIC	INT86X
+
+INT86X	PROC	FAR
+
+	PUSH	BP		;save BASCOM frame pointer on stack
+	MOV	BP,SP		;establish program frame reference
+	ADD	SP,FRM_SIZ	;allocate working space for frame
+	MOV	WORD PTR [BP].REG_NUM,0AH ;ten regs used (including DS and ES)
+
+;	Save a copy of the processor flags in the stack frame.
+
+INT86_COMMON:
+	PUSHF			;push the flags on the stack
+	POP	[BP].UCODE_FLGS	;put value in the stack frame
+
+;	From the third CALL argument on the stack, get the pointer to the
+;	VARPTR value of the output array and compute a far pointer to
+;	it.  Then save the far pointer segment and offset in the frame.
+
+	MOV	SI,[BP].ARG3	;get pointer to s.p. VARPTR value
+	CALL	SP_TO_PTR	;convert to far pointer in DX:AX
+	JC	INT_ERROR_JUMP	;if error, then jump
+	MOV	[BP].OUTARY_SEG,DX ;save far pointer segment in frame
+	MOV	[BP].OUTARY_OFF,AX ;save far pointer offset in frame
+
+;	From the second CALL argument on the stack, obtain the far
+;	pointer to the input array in the same manner as above.
+
+	MOV	SI,[BP].ARG2	;get pointer to s.p. VARPTR value
+	CALL	SP_TO_PTR	;convert to far pointer in DX:AX
+	JNC	NO_INT_ERROR	;if no error, then jump
+INT_ERROR_JUMP:
+	JMP	INT_ERROR	;long jump to error routine
+NO_INT_ERROR:
+
+;	Move eight or ten words (depending if executing INT86 or INT86X)
+;	of the integer input array from the far pointer computed to the frame.
+
+	MOV	DS,DX		;move array pointer segment
+	MOV	SI,AX		;and array offset - far pointer in DS:SI
+	LEA	DI,[BP].FRM_SIZ	;get frame offset - ES = SS = DGROUP
+	MOV	CX,[BP].REG_NUM	;eight or ten words to move
+	CLD			;movement is to higher memory
+	REP	MOVSW		;move the array into the stack frame
+
+	PUSH	ES		;get compiler data segment value on stack
+	POP	DS		;restore so DS = ES = SS = compiler data seg
+
+;	Save stack frame pointer to recover its value after the INT call.
+
+	PUSH	BP		;saved to first word past the stack frame
+
+;	Create a two-instruction program on the stack to execute the
+;	INT call requested and return with stack cleanup.
+;
+;	INT	XX	(hex: CD XX)	<--- fourth word past stack frame
+;	RETF	06	(hex: CA 06 00) <--- third and second word
+
+	XOR	AX,AX		;value of second word past frame
+	PUSH	AX		;put on stack - 00 byte of RETF and filler
+	MOV	AX,06CAH	;value of third word past frame
+	PUSH	AX		;put on stack - CA 06 bytes of RETF
+	MOV	SI,[BP].ARG1	;ptr to first CALL arg - interrupt number
+	MOV	AX,[SI]		;from pointer, get integer value of INT type
+	OR	AH,AH		;test if in range, 00 to FFH is legal
+	JNZ	INT_ERROR_JUMP	;if not, then error - jump
+	MOV	AH,AL		;move interrupt number to upper byte of AX
+	MOV	AL,0CDH		;value of fourth word past frame
+	PUSH	AX		;put on stack - CD XX bytes of INT XX
+	
+;	Push far pointer of return address after the stack program
+;	executes, which is INT_RET in this code segment.
+
+	PUSH	CS		;push current code segment for return segment
+	MOV	AX,OFFSET CODE:INT_RET ;offset just after stack program call
+	PUSH	AX		;push value for return offset
+
+;	Push far pointer pointer to the start of the stack program.
+;	The stack program will be entered by executing a RETF after the
+;	registers are set up.
+
+	PUSH	SS		;push current stack segment for starting ptr
+	MOV	AX,SP		;get current stack offset
+	ADD	AX,6		;move past the last three stack entries
+	PUSH	AX		;push offset for starting ptr of stack program
+
+;	Move the input array values from the stack to their actual registers.	
+
+	MOV	AX,[BP].INT_FLGS ;get input flag register value
+	AND	AX,0000111111010101B ;mask out undefined 8086 flags
+	PUSH	AX		;push masked flag register value
+
+	MOV	AX,[BP].INT_AX	;set up input AX value
+	MOV	BX,[BP].INT_BX	;set up input BX value
+	MOV	CX,[BP].INT_CX	;set up input CX value
+	MOV	DX,[BP].INT_DX	;set up input DX value
+
+	MOV	SI,[BP].INT_SI	;set up input SI value
+	MOV	DI,[BP].INT_DI	;set up input DI value
+
+;	For DS and ES, leave in the compiler data segment values if:
+;	executing INT86; or executing INT86X with array values of -1.
+
+	CMP	WORD PTR [BP].REG_NUM,08H ;test if executing INT86
+	JE	INT_ES_DEF	;if so, then use both default values
+
+	CMP	[BP].INT_DS,0FFFFH ;test if default DS to be used
+	JE	INT_DS_DEF	;if so, then leave it unchanged
+	MOV	DS,[BP].INT_DS	;set up input DS value
+INT_DS_DEF:
+	CMP	[BP].INT_ES,0FFFFH ;test if default ES to be used
+	JE	INT_ES_DEF	;if so, then leave it unchanged
+	MOV	ES,[BP].INT_ES	;set up input ES value
+INT_ES_DEF:
+
+	MOV	BP,[BP].INT_BP	;set up input BP value
+				;must be last move using BP
+
+	POPF			;set up input flag register value
+
+;	With all registers set according to the input array, execute the
+;	stack program.
+;
+;	The following RETF pops the last two stack entries, which are
+;	interpreted as a far pointer to the stack program.
+;
+;	The stack program executes the INT XX call which changes the
+;	registers (flags included) to the values to be put into the
+;	output array.
+;
+;	The stack program then executes the RETF 06 instruction which
+;	does two operations.  First, the next two entries on stack are
+;	popped and interpreted as a far ptr return address, which points
+;	the code at INT_RET in this code segment.  Second, the stack
+;	pointer is then adjusted by six bytes to remove the six-byte
+;	program from the stack.
+
+	RET			;far return to execute stack program, etc.
+INT_RET:
+
+;	The stack should now contain only the first entry past the
+;	frame, the value of the stack frame pointer itself.  First
+;	save the BP value from the INT call, then get the old value
+;	to reference the frame.
+
+	PUSH	BP		;save post-INT value of BP
+	MOV	BP,SP		;temporary frame is second word past frame
+	MOV	BP,[BP+02H]	;get real frame reference value
+
+;	Put post-INT value of all registers into the frame variables
+;	to be subsequently written into the output array.
+
+	PUSHF			;put flags on the stack
+	POP	[BP].INT_FLGS	;put in post-INT flag register value
+
+	PUSH	[BP].UCODE_FLGS	;get old copy of flags from frame
+	POPF			;and restore the old flag values
+
+	MOV	[BP].INT_AX,AX	;put in post-INT AX value
+	MOV	[BP].INT_BX,BX	;put in post-INT BX value
+	MOV	[BP].INT_CX,CX	;put in post-INT CX value
+	MOV	[BP].INT_DX,DX	;put in post-INT DX value
+
+	MOV	AX,[BP].INT_BP_TMP ;get post-INT BP value (one entry past frame)
+	MOV	[BP].INT_BP,AX	;put in post-INT BP value
+
+	MOV	[BP].INT_SI,SI	;put in post-INT SI value
+	MOV	[BP].INT_DI,DI	;put in post-INT DI value
+
+	MOV	[BP].INT_DS,DS	;put in post-INT DS value
+	MOV	[BP].INT_ES,ES	;put in post-INT ES value
+
+;	Restore DS to SS.  Move frame register values to the output
+;	array whose far pointer is in the frame.
+
+	PUSH	SS		;put compiler data segment on stack
+	POP	DS		;and restore DS register to it
+	LEA	SI,[BP].FRM_SIZ	;get start of register area in frame
+
+	MOV	ES,[BP].OUTARY_SEG ;get output array segment
+	MOV	DI,[BP].OUTARY_OFF ;get output array offset
+	MOV	CX,[BP].REG_NUM	;eight or ten words to move
+	CLD			;movement is toward upper memory
+	REP	MOVSW		;perform the transfer
+
+;	Clean up stack to remove frame.  Remove CALL arguments with RETF.
+
+	MOV	SP,BP		;deallocate temporary frame variables
+	POP	BP		;return compiler frame pointer
+	RET	06		;remove three CALL arguments and far return
+
+;	If error, then restore DS, set int_no% to -1 to report error,
+;	clean up, and exit.
+
+INT_ERROR:
+	PUSH	SS		;put compiler data segment value on stack
+	POP	DS		;and restore DS to its original value
+	MOV	SI,[BP].ARG1	;ptr to first CALL arg - interrupt number
+	MOV	[SI],0FFFFH	;set interrupt number to -1 for error
+	MOV	SP,BP		;deallocate temporary frame variables
+	POP	BP		;return compiler frame pointer
+	RET	06		;remove three CALL arguments and far return
+
+INT86X	ENDP
+INT86	ENDP
+
+;***
+; PTR86 - Compute segment/offset from variable VARPTR value.
+; Purpose:
+;	From a s.p. VARPTR of a compiler data variable, compute an
+;	equivalent segment and offset integer values.  These variables
+;	are used to set INT86X register input array values.
+;
+;	CALL PTR86 (varseg%,varoff%,VARPTR(var))
+;
+; Inputs:
+;	var = data variable (any type)
+; Outputs:
+;	if no error, varseg% = segment part of far pointer to var
+;		     varoff% = offset part of far pointer to var
+;	if error, varseg% = -1
+; Modifies:
+;	AX, DX, and SI.
+; Exceptions:
+;	None.
+;***
+
+	PUBLIC	PTR86
+
+PTR86 	PROC	FAR
+
+	PUSH	BP		;save BASCOM frame pointer on stack
+	MOV	BP,SP		;establish program frame reference
+	MOV	SI,[BP].ARG3	;ptr to third CALL arg - VARPTR of variable
+	CALL	SP_TO_PTR	;compute segment:offset in DX:AX
+	MOV	SI,[BP].ARG1	;ptr to first CALL arg - segment result
+	JC	PTR86_ERROR	;if error, then jump
+	MOV	[SI],DX		;put segment value into argument
+	MOV	SI,[BP].ARG2	;ptr to second CALL arg - offset result
+	MOV	[SI],AX		;put offset value into argument
+	POP	BP		;restore old frame pointer
+	RET	06H		;far return to caller - remove three stack args
+PTR86_ERROR:
+	MOV	[SI],0FFFFH	;put -1 in first arg for error report
+	POP	BP		;restore old frame pointer
+	RET	06H		;far return to caller - remove three stack args
+	
+PTR86	ENDP
+
+;***
+; SP_TO_PTR - converts s.p. VARPTR value to segment/offset values
+; Purpose:
+;	From the s.p. value pointed by DS:SI, convert to an integer
+;[1]	value.  Report an error if not in the range -2^15 to 2^20-1.
+;[1]	Negative values are adjusted by 2^16 (65535) since VARPTR
+;[1]	maps the values 32768...65535 to -32768...-1 for interpreter
+;[1]	compatibility.  Convert 20-bit address to segment and offset
+;	integer values using the standard 8086/8088 address computation:
+;
+;	(16-bit segment)*16 + (16-bit offset) = 20-bit address
+;
+; Inputs:
+;	SI = pointer to s.p. address value
+;
+;	The value is represented in Microsoft binary format, consisting
+;	of four bytes starting at the pointer given.  The first three
+;	bytes are the low, middle, and high bytes of the number's
+;	mantissa while the fourth is the exponent.  Sign-magnitude
+;	representation is used with the sign being the MSB of the high
+;	mantissa byte.  All values are stored normalized with the
+;	mantissa MSB hidden with the sign bit.  The binary point of the
+;	mantissa is before its MSB.  The exponent is biased by 80H.
+;	A zero exponent implies a zero value independent of the mantissa's
+;	contents.
+; Outputs:
+;	If no error:
+;		CF = 0 (carry cleared)
+;		DX = pointer segment integer result
+;		AX = pointer offset integer result
+;	If error:
+;		CF = 1 (carry set)
+;		DX,AX = undefined
+; Modifies:
+;	None.
+; Exceptions:
+;	None.
+;***
+
+SP_TO_PTR PROC	NEAR
+
+;	Load s.p. number into DX:AX.
+
+	MOV	AX,[SI]		;AH=middle mantissa - AL=low mantissa
+	MOV	DX,[SI+2]	;DH=exponent - DL=sign/high mantissa
+
+;	If exponent is zero, then number value is zero.
+
+	OR	DH,DH		;test if exponent is zero
+	JZ	SP_ZERO		;if so, then jump
+
+;	Put in hidden MSB of mantissa.
+
+	OR	DL,80H		;set hidden high-order mantissa bit
+
+;	Move data so DX:AX has 24-bit mantissa right-justified in 32 bits;
+;	and CX has 8-bit exponent right-justified in 16 bits.
+
+	PUSH	CX		;save register...
+	XOR	CX,CX		;clear both CH and CL
+	XCHG	CL,DH		;DX:AX=24-bit mantissa - CX=exponent
+
+;	Remove 80H bias from exponent.  Also subtract 12 (0CH) to move
+;	the binary from left of the 24th bit to left of the 12th bit of
+;	DX:AX.  The resulting value is the number of left shifts of DX:AX
+;	resulting in a binary value with 20 bits left of the binary point
+;	and 12 bits right of it.
+
+	SUB	CX,8CH		;remove 80H bias and 0CH to move b.pt. 12 bits
+	JE	SP_NO_SHIFT	;if no shifting needed, then jump
+	JB	SP_RIGHT_SHIFT	;if negative, then right shifting needed
+SP_LEFT_SHIFT_LOOP:
+	SHL	AX,1		;shift low-order word left once
+	RCL	DX,1		;shift carry into high-order word
+	LOOP	SP_LEFT_SHIFT_LOOP ;shift until done
+	JMP	SHORT SP_NO_SHIFT ;shifting left done - jump
+
+;	A negative shift count is the inverse of the number of right
+;	shifts needed.
+
+SP_RIGHT_SHIFT:
+	NEG	CX		;compute shift count of DX:AX to the right
+SP_RIGHT_SHIFT_LOOP:
+	SHR	DX,1		;shift high-order word right once
+	RCR	AX,1		;shift carry into low-order word
+	LOOP	SP_RIGHT_SHIFT_LOOP ;loop until done...
+
+;[1]	If input value was negative, test magnitude for legal range
+;[1]	of 1 to 32768 (1 to 8000H).  First decrement the value, so the
+;[1]	range is now 0 to 7FFFH.  Test for the range and, if legal,
+;[1]	invert the significant bits.
+
+SP_NO_SHIFT:
+	TEST	BYTE PTR [SI+2],80H ;[1]test if value was negative
+	JZ	SP_NOT_NEG	;[1]if not, then jump
+	SUB	AH,10H		;[1]decrement value in high nybble of AH
+	SBB	DX,0		;[1]propagate if borrow was needed
+	TEST	DX,NOT 7FFH	;[1]test if in legal range
+	JNZ	SP_ERROR	;[1]jump to return error
+	XOR	AH,0F0H		;[1]invert high nybble of AH
+	XOR	DX,0FFFH	;[1]invert rest of value in DX
+
+;	The lower 4 bits of the 20-bit integer value are in the upper
+;	nybble of AX.  Rotate and mask to move to lower nybble which
+;	will be the offset returned.
+
+SP_NOT_NEG:			;[1]
+	ROL	AX,1		;rotate leftmost nybble in AX to rightmost...
+	ROL	AX,1		;second bit...
+	ROL	AX,1		;third bit...
+	ROL	AX,1		;fourth bit - done
+	AND	AX,000FH	;leave only rightmost nybble left
+
+;	The upper 16 bits of the 20-bit integer value are in DX.
+;	This value is the integer divided by 16 and is therefore the
+;	paragraph value of the pointer.  Since VARPTR values are
+;	relative to the compiler data segment, add the data segment
+;	value to compute the pointer segment.
+
+	MOV	CX,DS		;get compiler data segment value
+	ADD	DX,CX		;add to get pointer (permit wraparound)
+	POP	CX		;restore register
+	CLC			;clear carry for success
+	RET			;near return to caller
+
+;	If zero, report 0 as the offset and the compiler data segment.
+
+SP_ZERO:
+	XOR	AX,AX		;clear offset result
+	MOV	DX,DS		;set segment result to compiler DS
+	CLC			;clear carry for success
+	RET			;near return to caller
+
+;	If error, then set carry to report it.
+
+SP_ERROR:			;[1]
+	POP	CX		;[1]
+	STC			;set carry for failure
+	RET			;near return to caller
+	
+SP_TO_PTR ENDP
+
+CODE	ENDS
+
+	END
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/INT86.OBJ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/INT86.OBJ
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5cf0bc2
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/INT86.OBJ differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/INT8687.ASM b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/INT8687.ASM
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6da4303
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/INT8687.ASM	
@@ -0,0 +1,462 @@
+	TITLE	INT8687 - BASCOM software interrupt calling routine
+
+;-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+;	R E V I S I O N   H I S T O R Y
+; 12-Mar-87	[2] RDK In SP_TO_PTR, value popped in wrong order.
+; 11-Mar-87	[1] RDK	Since VARPTR returns negative values for DGROUP
+;			offsets 32K to 64K, add 64K to these values.
+;			Also add DGROUP to compute far pointer.
+;-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+;
+; IEEE Math Coprocessor version
+;
+;
+;	Frame structure definition
+
+;	The following is used in INT86, INT86X, and PTR86.
+
+ARG1		=  0AH		;pointer to first of three arguments
+ARG2		=  08H		;pointer to second of three arguments
+ARG3		=  06H		;pointer to third of three arguments
+UCODE_SEG	=  04H		;user code return pointer - segment
+UCODE_OFF	=  02H		;user code return pointer - offset
+
+UCODE_BP	=  00H		;user code BP register value (FRAME base)
+
+;	The following frame temp variables are used in INT86 and INT86X.
+
+UCODE_FLGS	= -02H		;user code flag register value
+OUTARY_SEG	= -04H		;output array pointer - segment
+OUTARY_OFF	= -06H		;output array pointer - offset
+REG_NUM		= -08H		;number of regs used (INT86=8, INT86X=10)
+INT_ES		= -0AH		;INT ES register value
+INT_DS		= -0CH		;INT DS register value
+INT_FLGS	= -0EH		;INT flags register value
+INT_DI		= -10H		;INT DI register value
+INT_SI		= -12H		;INT SI register value
+INT_BP		= -14H		;INT BP register value
+INT_DX		= -16H		;INT DX register value
+INT_CX		= -18H		;INT CX register value
+INT_BX		= -1AH		;INT BX register value
+INT_AX		= -1CH		;INT AX register value
+
+FRM_SIZ		= -1CH		;negative size of frame temporaries
+
+;	Locations past frame allocation used to recover post-INT BP value.
+
+FRM_BP		= -1EH		;frame BP saved for post-INT recovery
+INT_BP_TMP	= -20H		;temp location for INT BP register value
+
+;***
+; INT86, INT86X - BASCOM software interrupt calling interface
+; Purpose:
+;	To allow a BASIC Compiler program to perform any software
+;	interrupt.  The interrupt is executed with the registers
+;	set to values specified in an integer array.  The post-
+;	interrupt values of the registers are then stored in
+;	another integer array.
+;
+;	CALL INT86[X] (int_no%,VARPTR(in_ary%(x)),VARPTR(out_ary%(y)))
+;
+; Inputs:
+;	int_no% = interrupt number (range 0 to 255) to execute
+;	in_ary%(x) to in_ary%(x+7) = input array. (INT86)
+;	in_ary%(x) to in_ary%(x+9) = input array. (INT86X)
+;		This array specifies the register values at the INT as
+;		follows (INT86 uses DGROUP to set DS and ES, not array
+;		elements 8 and 9.):
+;	in_ary%(x)   = AX
+;	in_ary%(x+1) = BX
+;	in_ary%(x+2) = CX
+;	in_ary%(x+3) = DX
+;	in_ary%(x+4) = BP
+;	in_ary%(x+5) = SI
+;	in_ary%(x+6) = DI
+;	in_ary%(x+7) = flags
+;	in_ary%(x+8) = DS  (if -1, then use DGROUP value) (INT86X only)
+;	in_ary%(x+9) = ES  (if -1, then use DGROUP value) (INT86X only)
+; Outputs:
+;	If no error:
+;		int_no% = unchanged (range 0 to 255)
+;		out_ary%(y) to out_ary%(y+9) = output array.
+;			This array will be set to the post-interrupt
+;			register values.  It has the same structure
+;			as in_ary%.
+;	If error:
+;		int_no% = -1
+;		out_ary% unchanged.  INT call is not performed.
+;		error occurs:
+;			first argument not 0 to 255 (2^8-1)
+;			second or third arguments not  0 to 1048575 (2^20-1)
+;				(VARPTR will always be in this range)
+; Modifies:
+;	All, except BP, DS, and flags.
+;	Also, possible side effects of INT call.
+; Exceptions:
+;	INT 24H call may result from some INT 21H MS-DOS calls.
+;***
+
+DATA	SEGMENT WORD PUBLIC 'DATA'
+DATA	ENDS
+
+DGROUP	GROUP	DATA
+
+CODE	SEGMENT BYTE PUBLIC 'CODE'
+
+	ASSUME	CS:CODE,DS:DGROUP,ES:DGROUP,SS:DGROUP
+
+	PUBLIC	INT86
+
+INT86	PROC	FAR
+
+	PUSH	BP		;save BASCOM frame pointer on stack
+	MOV	BP,SP		;establish program frame reference
+	ADD	SP,FRM_SIZ	;allocate working space for frame
+	MOV	WORD PTR [BP].REG_NUM,08H ;eight regs used (not DS or ES)
+	JMP	SHORT INT86_COMMON ;jump to common code
+
+	PUBLIC	INT86X
+
+INT86X	PROC	FAR
+
+	PUSH	BP		;save BASCOM frame pointer on stack
+	MOV	BP,SP		;establish program frame reference
+	ADD	SP,FRM_SIZ	;allocate working space for frame
+	MOV	WORD PTR [BP].REG_NUM,0AH ;ten regs used (including DS and ES)
+
+;	Save a copy of the processor flags in the stack frame.
+
+INT86_COMMON:
+	PUSHF			;push the flags on the stack
+	POP	[BP].UCODE_FLGS	;put value in the stack frame
+
+;	From the third CALL argument on the stack, get the pointer to the
+;	VARPTR value of the output array and compute a far pointer to
+;	it.  Then save the far pointer segment and offset in the frame.
+
+	MOV	SI,[BP].ARG3	;get pointer to s.p. VARPTR value
+	CALL	SP_TO_PTR	;convert to far pointer in DX:AX
+	JC	INT_ERROR_JUMP	;if error, then jump
+	MOV	[BP].OUTARY_SEG,DX ;save far pointer segment in frame
+	MOV	[BP].OUTARY_OFF,AX ;save far pointer offset in frame
+
+;	From the second CALL argument on the stack, obtain the far
+;	pointer to the input array in the same manner as above.
+
+	MOV	SI,[BP].ARG2	;get pointer to s.p. VARPTR value
+	CALL	SP_TO_PTR	;convert to far pointer in DX:AX
+	JNC	NO_INT_ERROR	;if no error, then jump
+INT_ERROR_JUMP:
+	JMP	INT_ERROR	;long jump to error routine
+NO_INT_ERROR:
+
+;	Move eight or ten words (depending if executing INT86 or INT86X)
+;	of the integer input array from the far pointer computed to the frame.
+
+	MOV	DS,DX		;move array pointer segment
+	MOV	SI,AX		;and array offset - far pointer in DS:SI
+	LEA	DI,[BP].FRM_SIZ	;get frame offset - ES = SS = DGROUP
+	MOV	CX,[BP].REG_NUM	;eight or ten words to move
+	CLD			;movement is to higher memory
+	REP	MOVSW		;move the array into the stack frame
+
+	PUSH	ES		;get compiler data segment value on stack
+	POP	DS		;restore so DS = ES = SS = compiler data seg
+
+;	Save stack frame pointer to recover its value after the INT call.
+
+	PUSH	BP		;saved to first word past the stack frame
+
+;	Create a two-instruction program on the stack to execute the
+;	INT call requested and return with stack cleanup.
+;
+;	INT	XX	(hex: CD XX)	<--- fourth word past stack frame
+;	RETF	06	(hex: CA 06 00) <--- third and second word
+
+	XOR	AX,AX		;value of second word past frame
+	PUSH	AX		;put on stack - 00 byte of RETF and filler
+	MOV	AX,06CAH	;value of third word past frame
+	PUSH	AX		;put on stack - CA 06 bytes of RETF
+	MOV	SI,[BP].ARG1	;ptr to first CALL arg - interrupt number
+	MOV	AX,[SI]		;from pointer, get integer value of INT type
+	OR	AH,AH		;test if in range, 00 to FFH is legal
+	JNZ	INT_ERROR_JUMP	;if not, then error - jump
+	MOV	AH,AL		;move interrupt number to upper byte of AX
+	MOV	AL,0CDH		;value of fourth word past frame
+	PUSH	AX		;put on stack - CD XX bytes of INT XX
+	
+;	Push far pointer of return address after the stack program
+;	executes, which is INT_RET in this code segment.
+
+	PUSH	CS		;push current code segment for return segment
+	MOV	AX,OFFSET CODE:INT_RET ;offset just after stack program call
+	PUSH	AX		;push value for return offset
+
+;	Push far pointer pointer to the start of the stack program.
+;	The stack program will be entered by executing a RETF after the
+;	registers are set up.
+
+	PUSH	SS		;push current stack segment for starting ptr
+	MOV	AX,SP		;get current stack offset
+	ADD	AX,6		;move past the last three stack entries
+	PUSH	AX		;push offset for starting ptr of stack program
+
+;	Move the input array values from the stack to their actual registers.	
+
+	MOV	AX,[BP].INT_FLGS ;get input flag register value
+	AND	AX,0000111111010101B ;mask out undefined 8086 flags
+	PUSH	AX		;push masked flag register value
+
+	MOV	AX,[BP].INT_AX	;set up input AX value
+	MOV	BX,[BP].INT_BX	;set up input BX value
+	MOV	CX,[BP].INT_CX	;set up input CX value
+	MOV	DX,[BP].INT_DX	;set up input DX value
+
+	MOV	SI,[BP].INT_SI	;set up input SI value
+	MOV	DI,[BP].INT_DI	;set up input DI value
+
+;	For DS and ES, leave in the compiler data segment values if:
+;	executing INT86; or executing INT86X with array values of -1.
+
+	CMP	WORD PTR [BP].REG_NUM,08H ;test if executing INT86
+	JE	INT_ES_DEF	;if so, then use both default values
+
+	CMP	[BP].INT_DS,0FFFFH ;test if default DS to be used
+	JE	INT_DS_DEF	;if so, then leave it unchanged
+	MOV	DS,[BP].INT_DS	;set up input DS value
+INT_DS_DEF:
+	CMP	[BP].INT_ES,0FFFFH ;test if default ES to be used
+	JE	INT_ES_DEF	;if so, then leave it unchanged
+	MOV	ES,[BP].INT_ES	;set up input ES value
+INT_ES_DEF:
+
+	MOV	BP,[BP].INT_BP	;set up input BP value
+				;must be last move using BP
+
+	POPF			;set up input flag register value
+
+;	With all registers set according to the input array, execute the
+;	stack program.
+;
+;	The following RETF pops the last two stack entries, which are
+;	interpreted as a far pointer to the stack program.
+;
+;	The stack program executes the INT XX call which changes the
+;	registers (flags included) to the values to be put into the
+;	output array.
+;
+;	The stack program then executes the RETF 06 instruction which
+;	does two operations.  First, the next two entries on stack are
+;	popped and interpreted as a far ptr return address, which points
+;	the code at INT_RET in this code segment.  Second, the stack
+;	pointer is then adjusted by six bytes to remove the six-byte
+;	program from the stack.
+
+	RET			;far return to execute stack program, etc.
+INT_RET:
+
+;	The stack should now contain only the first entry past the
+;	frame, the value of the stack frame pointer itself.  First
+;	save the BP value from the INT call, then get the old value
+;	to reference the frame.
+
+	PUSH	BP		;save post-INT value of BP
+	MOV	BP,SP		;temporary frame is second word past frame
+	MOV	BP,[BP+02H]	;get real frame reference value
+
+;	Put post-INT value of all registers into the frame variables
+;	to be subsequently written into the output array.
+
+	PUSHF			;put flags on the stack
+	POP	[BP].INT_FLGS	;put in post-INT flag register value
+
+	PUSH	[BP].UCODE_FLGS	;get old copy of flags from frame
+	POPF			;and restore the old flag values
+
+	MOV	[BP].INT_AX,AX	;put in post-INT AX value
+	MOV	[BP].INT_BX,BX	;put in post-INT BX value
+	MOV	[BP].INT_CX,CX	;put in post-INT CX value
+	MOV	[BP].INT_DX,DX	;put in post-INT DX value
+
+	MOV	AX,[BP].INT_BP_TMP ;get post-INT BP value (one entry past frame)
+	MOV	[BP].INT_BP,AX	;put in post-INT BP value
+
+	MOV	[BP].INT_SI,SI	;put in post-INT SI value
+	MOV	[BP].INT_DI,DI	;put in post-INT DI value
+
+	MOV	[BP].INT_DS,DS	;put in post-INT DS value
+	MOV	[BP].INT_ES,ES	;put in post-INT ES value
+
+;	Restore DS to SS.  Move frame register values to the output
+;	array whose far pointer is in the frame.
+
+	PUSH	SS		;put compiler data segment on stack
+	POP	DS		;and restore DS register to it
+	LEA	SI,[BP].FRM_SIZ	;get start of register area in frame
+
+	MOV	ES,[BP].OUTARY_SEG ;get output array segment
+	MOV	DI,[BP].OUTARY_OFF ;get output array offset
+	MOV	CX,[BP].REG_NUM	;eight or ten words to move
+	CLD			;movement is toward upper memory
+	REP	MOVSW		;perform the transfer
+
+;	Clean up stack to remove frame.  Remove CALL arguments with RETF.
+
+	MOV	SP,BP		;deallocate temporary frame variables
+	POP	BP		;return compiler frame pointer
+	RET	06		;remove three CALL arguments and far return
+
+;	If error, then restore DS, set int_no% to -1 to report error,
+;	clean up, and exit.
+
+INT_ERROR:
+	PUSH	SS		;put compiler data segment value on stack
+	POP	DS		;and restore DS to its original value
+	MOV	SI,[BP].ARG1	;ptr to first CALL arg - interrupt number
+	MOV	[SI],0FFFFH	;set interrupt number to -1 for error
+	MOV	SP,BP		;deallocate temporary frame variables
+	POP	BP		;return compiler frame pointer
+	RET	06		;remove three CALL arguments and far return
+
+INT86X	ENDP
+INT86	ENDP
+
+;***
+; PTR86 - Compute segment/offset from variable VARPTR value.
+; Purpose:
+;	From a s.p. VARPTR of a compiler data variable, compute an
+;	equivalent segment and offset integer values.  These variables
+;	are used to set INT86X register input array values.
+;
+;	CALL PTR86 (varseg%,varoff%,VARPTR(var))
+;
+; Inputs:
+;	var = data variable (any type)
+; Outputs:
+;	if no error, varseg% = segment part of far pointer to var
+;		     varoff% = offset part of far pointer to var
+;	if error, varseg% = -1
+; Modifies:
+;	AX, DX, and SI.
+; Exceptions:
+;	None.
+;***
+
+	PUBLIC	PTR86
+
+PTR86 	PROC	FAR
+
+	PUSH	BP		;save BASCOM frame pointer on stack
+	MOV	BP,SP		;establish program frame reference
+	MOV	SI,[BP].ARG3	;ptr to third CALL arg - VARPTR of variable
+	CALL	SP_TO_PTR	;compute segment:offset in DX:AX
+	MOV	SI,[BP].ARG1	;ptr to first CALL arg - segment result
+	JC	PTR86_ERROR	;if error, then jump
+	MOV	[SI],DX		;put segment value into argument
+	MOV	SI,[BP].ARG2	;ptr to second CALL arg - offset result
+	MOV	[SI],AX		;put offset value into argument
+	POP	BP		;restore old frame pointer
+	RET	06H		;far return to caller - remove three stack args
+PTR86_ERROR:
+	MOV	[SI],0FFFFH	;put -1 in first arg for error report
+	POP	BP		;restore old frame pointer
+	RET	06H		;far return to caller - remove three stack args
+	
+PTR86	ENDP
+
+;***
+; SP_TO_PTR - converts s.p. VARPTR value to segment/offset values
+; Purpose:
+;	From the s.p. value pointed by DS:SI, convert to an integer
+;	value.  Report an error if not in the range 0 to 2^20-1.
+;	Convert 20-bit address to segment and offset integer values
+;	using the standard 8086/8088 address computation:
+;
+;	(16-bit segment)*16 + (16-bit offset) = 20-bit address
+;
+; Inputs:
+;	SI = pointer to s.p. address value
+;
+;	If IEEE, the value is represented in IEEE floating point binary format,
+;	consisting of four bytes starting at the pointer given.
+;
+;	If MS-Math, the value is represented in Microsoft binary format,
+;	consisting of four bytes starting at the pointer given. The first three
+;	bytes are the low, middle, and high bytes of the number's mantissa
+;	while the fourth is the exponent. Sign-magnitude representation is used
+;	with the sign being the MSB of the high mantissa byte. All values are
+;	stored normalized with the mantissa MSB hidden with the sign bit. The
+;	binary point of the mantissa is before its MSB. The exponent is biased
+;	by 80H. A zero exponent implies a zero value independent of the
+;	mantissa's contents.
+;
+; Outputs:
+;	If no error:
+;		CF = 0 (carry cleared)
+;		DX = pointer segment integer result
+;		AX = pointer offset integer result
+;	If error:
+;		CF = 1 (carry set)
+; Modifies:
+;	None.
+; Exceptions:
+;	None.
+;***
+
+SP_TO_PTR PROC	NEAR
+
+;
+; Use coprocessor to perform float to int conversion
+;
+	FLD	DWORD PTR [SI]	;Coprocessor ST(0) = s.p. number
+	PUSH	BX		;Preserve
+	PUSH	AX		;Create 4 byte temp on stack
+	PUSH	AX
+	MOV	BX,SP		;[BX] = pointer to 4 byte temp
+	FISTP	DWORD PTR [BX]	;[BX] = pointer to converted int
+	FWAIT
+	POP	AX		;[2]
+	POP	DX		;[2][DX:AX] = 20 bit physical address
+	POP	BX		;Restore
+;
+; Check for an invalid value
+;
+	TEST	DX,0FFF0H
+	JZ	SP_CONVERT	;[1]if between 0 and 2^20, then jump
+	CMP	DX,0FFFFH	;[1]negative - test high-order word
+	JNZ	SP_ERROR	;[1]if not all ones (less than -64K), then err
+	TEST	AH,80H		;[1]test if less than -32K
+	JZ	SP_ERROR	;[1]if so, then also an error
+	NOT	DX		;[1]invert high-order word to zero
+
+;[1]	Value now in DX:AX - 0 to 2^20-1 - 000x:xxxx.
+;[1]	Normalize pointer to xxxx:000x and add DGROUP value.
+
+SP_CONVERT:
+	PUSH	CX		;[1]save register...
+	MOV	CX,12D		;[1]will double-shift 12 times...
+SP_LOOP:			;[1]
+	SHL	AX,1		;[1]shift the low-order word...
+	RCL	DX,1		;[1]...and the high-order word with carry
+	LOOP	SP_LOOP		;[1]loop until done
+	MOV	CL,4		;[1]value now xxxx:x000 - need xxxx:000x, so...
+	ROL	AX,CL		;[1]rotate low-order word - now xxxx:000x
+	MOV	CX,DS		;[1]get the DGROUP value
+	ADD	DX,CX		;[1]and add it to get far pointer in DX:AX
+
+	POP	CX		;[1]restore register
+	CLC			;clear carry for success
+	RET			;near return to caller
+
+;	If error, then set carry to report it.
+
+SP_ERROR:
+	STC			;set carry for failure
+	RET			;near return to caller
+	
+SP_TO_PTR ENDP
+
+CODE	ENDS
+
+	END
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/INT8687.OBJ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/INT8687.OBJ
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c605b5d
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/INT8687.OBJ differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/LINK.EXE b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/LINK.EXE
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff5e247
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/LINK.EXE differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/MODE43.COM b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/MODE43.COM
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c4e2523
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/MODE43.COM differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/PPRINT.BAS b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/PPRINT.BAS
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2cb2af0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/PPRINT.BAS	
@@ -0,0 +1,751 @@
+REM $Title:'Microsoft PPRINT- Formatted Print Utility'
+REM $Subtitle:'Introduction'
+'
+' Microsoft PPRINT- Formatted Print Utility
+' Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation - 1986
+'
+' This program is designed to format QuickBASIC source files that include
+' the formatting metacommands found in QuickBASIC V1.00 and earlier
+' Microsoft BASIC Compilers.
+'
+' The Metacommands processed by PPRINT are:
+'
+'    TITLE: 'title'          Prints 'title' at the top of each page
+'    SUBTITLE: 'subtitle'    Prints 'subtitle' below the title area
+'    LINESIZE:n              Sets output line width to n
+'    PAGESIZE:n              Sets the output page size to n
+'    PAGE                    Skips to next page
+'    PAGEIF:n                Skips to next page if there are fewer than n
+'                             lines left on current page
+'    SKIP[:n]                Skips n lines or to top of next page
+'    LIST-                   Turns OFF output of lines
+'    LIST+                   Turns ON output of lines
+'
+'
+' USAGE:  The PPRINT Utility has the following usage:
+'
+'         PPRINT InputFile, [OutputFile]
+'
+'         If the OutputFile is ommitted, LPT1: is the default
+'
+' COMPILATION:
+'
+'    Since the PPRINT utility is distributed in source form (PPRINT.BAS)
+'    You must compile it before using.  Suggested compilation procedures are
+'    as follows:
+'
+'    1) Load PPRINT.BAS into the QuickBASIC editor
+'    2) Select "Compile..." from the RUN Menu
+'    3) Select ".EXE" from the output options section
+'    4) press the "Compile" button or press return
+'
+'    These 4 steps should create a file PPRINT.EXE on your default
+'    drive.
+'
+' REVISION HISTORY:
+'
+'    12/1/86- GEL - Fixed TARs # 57720 & 56937
+'
+
+rem $subtitle:'Global Declarations'
+rem $page
+	DEFINT a - z
+	DIM KeyWordCount, LineCount, Seps$
+	DIM KeyBoard, Console
+	DIM InputFile$, OutputFile$
+	DIM Temp$,x     ' temp variables
+	'
+	' global variables for handling metacommands
+	DIM Out.Title$, Out.Subtitle$, MetaCommand.On
+	DIM Out.LineSize, Out.Pagesize, Out.List, Out.LineCount, Out.BlankBottom
+	DIM Out.PageNum
+
+REM $subtitle:'FnToUpper- Converts To Uppercase'
+rem $page
+'
+' FNToUpper$ - Convert string to uppercase
+' Description:
+'  This routine converts a string to uppercase. If already uppercase
+'  nothing is done. Returns a null string if input is null
+' Input:
+'  InString$ - string to convert
+' Output:
+'  FNToUpper$ - uppercase string
+Def FNToUpper$(InString$)
+static LenInString, AscChar, Index, IndexInString
+
+	LenInString = len(InString$)
+	' Exit if input string is empty (null)
+	if (LenInString = 0) then
+		FNToUpper$ = ""
+		Exit Def
+	end if
+	for IndexInstring = 1 to LenInString
+		AscChar = asc(mid$(InString$, IndexInstring, 1))
+		' &hdf is special bit pattern that converts from lower to upper
+		if ((AscChar >= asc("a")) and (AscChar <= asc("z"))) then
+			AscChar = AscChar and &hdf
+			mid$(InString$, IndexInstring, 1) = chr$(AscChar)
+		end if
+	next IndexInString
+	FNToUpper$ = InString$
+
+End Def
+
+rem $subtitle:'FnTabsToBlanks- Converts TABs to Blanks'
+rem $page
+'
+' FnTabsToBlanks- turns TABs into blanks in the given string
+'
+' Input: Source$
+' Output Source$ with ALL TABs as 3 Blanks
+' Note: If TABs are set at a value different from 3, change the following
+'       procedure in the 'Then' part of the IF statement
+'
+DEF FNTabsToBlanks$(source$)
+STATIC Temp$,i
+
+    Temp$ = ""
+    If Instr(Source$, Chr$(9)) = 0 Then FnTabsToBlanks$ = Source$: Exit Def
+
+    For i = 1 to Len(source$)
+	If ASC(Mid$(Source$,i,1)) = 9  Then
+		Temp$ = Temp$ + Space$(3) ' replace with 3 spaces
+	    Else
+		Temp$ = Temp$ + Mid$(source$,i,1)
+	End If
+    Next i
+
+    FnTabsToBlanks$ = Temp$
+End Def
+
+
+rem $subtitle:'FnStrSpn- String Spanner'
+rem $page
+'
+' FNStrSpn - Get the index of the first character within InString$ that is
+'				 NOT one of the characters from Separater$ 
+' Description:
+' This routine will search the parameter string InString$ until it finds 
+' a character that is not part of the Separater string. This can be used 
+' with FNStrBrk to isolate strings within strings that are separated by
+' blanks, comma etc. whatever is specified in Separater$.  This is especially
+' helpful in extracting parameters from the command line. See FNGetToken$
+' for example of use.
+'
+' Input:
+'   InString$ = string to search 
+'   Separater$ = string of Separater
+'
+' Output:
+'   FNStrSpn = index into InString$ if 0 then all character in Separater$ 
+'              are in InString$
+Def FNStrSpn(InString$, Separater$)
+static LenInString, LenSeparater, StartFound, IndexSeparater, IndexInString
+static ChTemp$
+
+	LenInString = Len(InString$)
+	LenSeparater = Len(Separater$)
+	' Examine each character from InString$ to see if it is in Separater$
+	for IndexInString = 1 to LenInString
+		ChTemp$ = Mid$(InString$, IndexInString, 1)
+		StartFound = false
+		' search all of the Separaters to see of any equal this character
+		for IndexSeparater = 1 to LenSeparater
+			if (ChTemp$ = Mid$(Separater$, IndexSeparater, 1)) then
+				goto NextChar
+			end if
+		next IndexSeparater
+		' found a character not equal to one of the Separaters$
+		' exit from loops
+		StartFound = true
+		goto EndStrSpn
+NextChar:
+	Next IndexInString
+EndStrSpn:
+	if (StartFound) then
+		FNStrSpn = IndexInString
+	else
+		FNStrSpn = 0
+	end if
+End Def
+
+rem $subtitle:'FnStrBrk- String Breaker'
+rem $page
+'
+' FNStrBrk - finds the first occurance of any character in string2$ in
+'            string1$
+' Description:
+' This routine is the opposite to FNStrSpn. It finds the first occurance
+' of one of the characters from String2$ within String$. It is used
+' generally for search from specific strings within strings. See FNSeparater
+' on use. See FNGetToken$ to see the routines in use.
+'
+' Input:
+'   string1$ = string to search for first occurance
+'   string2$ = string of characters to search for
+' Output:
+'   FNStrBrk = index to character in string1$ of first occurance
+'
+' Uses:
+'  LenString1 = length parameter string
+'  ChTemp$ = temp used for current character from String1$
+'  IndexString1 = current indices into parameter string
+'
+Def FNStrBrk(String1$, String2$)
+static LenString1, IndexString1, StartFound
+static ChTemp$
+
+	LenString1 = Len(String1$)
+	' Search String1$ until one of the characters from String2$ is found
+	' or run out of characters from String$2
+	for IndexString1 = 1 to LenString1
+		ChTemp$ = Mid$(String1$, IndexString1, 1)
+		if (instr(String2$, ChTemp$)) then
+			StartFound = true
+			FNStrBrk = IndexString1
+			Exit Def
+		end if
+	Next IndexString1
+	FnStrBrk = 0
+
+End Def
+
+rem $subtitle:'FnGetToken- Gets a Token'
+rem $page
+'
+' FNGetToken$ - Extract a token for a string.
+' Description:
+' This routine extracts tokens from strings. A token is a word that is 
+' surrounded by separaters, such as spaces or commas. It is usually the
+' word of interest and examining sentences or commands. If the string
+' to search for tokens "Search$" is null (.i.e "") then the last
+' non-null string passed will be used. The allows for multiple calls
+' to FNGetToken$ to move through the string. EG: The sequences of calls
+'  would be:
+'    token$ = FNGetToken$("token string, a short one", " ,")
+'    while (token$ <> "")
+'       print token$
+'       token$ = FNGetToken$("", " ,")
+'    wend
+' This will return "token", "string", "a", "short", "one" 
+'
+' Note that the token is returned as an Uppercase character string.
+'
+' Input:
+'  Search$ = string to search
+'  InSeps$  = String of Seps$
+' Output:
+'  FNGetToken$ = next token
+' Uses:
+'  TokenString$ = last non-null string passed as parameter (do not modify)
+'  TokenIndex2 = index to last separater (do not modify)
+'
+def FNGetToken$(Search$, InSeps$)
+static TokenIndex1
+
+	' Null strings indicate use of last string used
+	' TokenString$ is set to last string if Search$ is not null
+	if (Search$ = "") then
+		Search$ = TokenString$
+	else
+		TokenIndex2 = 1
+		TokenString$ = Search$
+	end if
+	' If last separater position is past end of search string then no more
+	' tokens can be in string, since searching is started from this position
+	' Exit with null return in this case
+	if (TokenIndex2 >= len(Search$)) then
+		FNGetToken$ = ""
+		 Exit Def
+	end if
+	' Section out a token from the search string. This is done by finding the
+	' start of a token then locating it's end by the start of separaters
+	TokenIndex1 = FNStrSpn(mid$(Search$, TokenIndex2, len(Search$)), InSeps$) 
+	' If no more token bump to end of line so we move past current point
+	if (TokenIndex1 = 0) then
+		TokenIndex1 = len(Search$)
+	else
+		TokenIndex1 = TokenIndex1 + TokenIndex2 - 1
+	end if
+	TokenIndex2 = FNStrBrk(mid$(Search$, TokenIndex1, len(Search$)), InSeps$) 
+	' If separater position (end of token) came back zero the token must be
+	' up against end of string. Set the separater position one past string
+	' length so that size of token computation is correct and next call
+	' with same string will return null for no more tokens
+	if (TokenIndex2 = 0) then
+		TokenIndex2 = len(Search$) + 1
+	else
+		TokenIndex2 = TokenIndex1 + TokenIndex2 - 1
+	end if
+	' Cut out token from search string and convert to uppercase. 
+	' It is converted to uppercase since string compares are case sensitive
+	FNGetToken$ = mid$(Search$,TokenIndex1,TokenIndex2 - TokenIndex1)
+end def
+
+rem $subtitle:'FnIsNumber- Is a Number?'
+rem $page
+'
+' FNIsNumber - Checks to see if character a number or alpha
+' Description:
+'  This routine returns true if character passed is in the range 0 - 9
+'  It returns false if not. It is used to tell wither a token is
+'  a number or alpha.
+' Input:
+'  Char - character to check
+' Output:
+'  FNIsNumber - true if within 0 - 9
+'
+def FNIsNumber(Char$)
+static CharAsc
+
+	if (Char$ = "") then
+		FNIsNumber = false
+	else
+		CharAsc = asc(Char$)
+		FNIsNumber = ((CharAsc >= asc("0")) and (CharAsc <= asc("9")))
+	end if
+
+end def
+
+rem $subtitle:'FnIsChar- Is a character?'
+rem $page
+def FNIsChar(Char$)
+static CharAsc
+
+	CharAsc = asc(Char$)
+	FNIsChar = ((CharAsc >= asc("A")) and (CharAsc <= asc("z")))
+
+end def
+
+
+rem $subtitle:'FnIsKeyword- Is a Keyword?'
+rem $page
+' FNIsKeyWord - returns true if specified string is a BASIC key word
+' Description:
+'  Checks keyword list agains String$, non-zero return if keyword
+'
+def FNIsKeyWord(Key$)
+static KeyWord$, AscCh, t
+
+	if (len(Key$) > 0) then
+		t = asc(key$)
+
+		while t < 33 AND Key$ <> ""    ' strip off all spaces and below
+		    key$= mid$(key$,2)
+		    If key$ <> "" then t = asc(key$) Else FNIsKeyword=0: Exit Def
+		wend
+		Key$ = FNToUpper$(Key$)
+		AscCh = (asc(Key$) - asc("A") + 1)
+		if ((AscCh >= 0 ) and (AscCh <= 24)) then
+			on (AscCh) gosub AKey, BKey, CKey, DKey, EKey, FKey, GKey, HKey, _
+								  IKey, JKey, KKey, LKey, MKey, NKey, OKey, PKey, _
+								  QKey, RKey, SKey, TKey, UKey, VKey, WKey, XKey, _
+								  YKey, ZKey
+			read KeyWord$
+
+			while (KeyWord$ <> "")
+				if (KeyWord$ = Key$) then
+					FNIsKeyWord = TRUE
+					exit def
+				end if
+				read KeyWord$
+			wend
+		end if
+	end if
+	FNIsKeyWord = FALSE
+	exit def
+AKey:
+	DATA ABS, AND, APPEND, AS, ASC, ATN, AUTO, ""
+	restore AKey: return
+BKey:
+	DATA BEEP, BLOAD, BSAVE, ""
+	restore BKey: return
+CKey:
+	DATA CALL, CALLS, CDBL, CHAIN, CHDIR, CHR$, CINT, CIRCLE, CLEAR
+	DATA CLOSE, CLS, COLOR, COM, COMMAND$, COMMON, CONT, COS, CSNG
+	DATA CSRLIN, CVD, CVI, CVS, "", ""
+	restore CKey: return
+DKey:
+	DATA DATA, DATE$, DEF, DEFDBL, DEFINT, DEFSNG, DEFSTR, DEF FN, DEF USR, DELETE
+	DATA DIM, DRAW, ""
+	restore DKey: return
+EKey:
+	DATA EDIT, ELSE, END, ENVIRON, ENVIRON$, EOF, EQV, ERASE
+	DATA ERL, ERR, ERROR, EXIT, EXP, ""
+	restore EKey: return
+FKey:
+	DATA FIELD, FILES, FIX, FOR, FRE, ""
+	restore FKey: return
+GKey:
+	DATA GET, GO, GOSUB, GOTO, ""
+	restore GKey: return
+HKey:
+	DATA HEX$, ""
+	restore HKey: return
+IKey:
+	DATA IF, IMP, INKEY$, INP, INPUT, INPUT$, INPUT$, INSTR, INT, ""
+	restore IKey: return
+JKey:
+	DATA ""
+	restore JKey: return
+KKey:
+	DATA KEY, KILL, ""
+	restore KKey: return
+LKey:
+	DATA LCOPY, LEFT$, LEN, LET, LINE, LIST, LBOUND, LLIST, LOAD
+	DATA LOC, LOCAL, LOCATE, LOCK, LOF, LOG, LPOS, LPRINT, LSET, ""
+	restore LKey: return
+MKey:
+	DATA MERGE, MID$, MKD$, MKI$, MKS$, MKDIR, MOD, MOTOR, ""
+	restore MKey: return
+NKey:
+	DATA NAME, NEW, NEXT, NOT NULL, ""
+	restore NKey: return
+OKey:
+	DATA OCT$, ON, OPEN, OPTION, OR, OUT, OUTPUT, ""
+	restore OKey: return
+PKey:
+	DATA PAINT, PALETTE, PEEK, PEN, PLAY, PMAP
+	DATA POINT, POKE, POS, PRESET, PRINT, PSET, PUT, ""
+	restore PKey: return
+QKey:
+	DATA ""
+	restore QKey: return
+RKey:
+	DATA RANDOMIZE, READ, REDIM, REM, RENUM, REM, RENUM
+	DATA RESTORE, RESUME, RETURN, RIGHT$, RMDIR, RND, RSET, RUN, ""
+	restore RKey: return
+SKey:
+	DATA SAVE, SCREEN, SEG, SGN, SHARED, SHELL, SIN, SOUND, SPACE
+	DATA SPC, SQR, STATIC, STEP, STICK, STOP, STR, STRIG, STRING
+	DATA SUB, SWAP, SYSTEM, ""
+	restore SKey: return
+TKey:
+	DATA TAB, TAN, THEN, TIME, TIMER, TO, TROFF, TRON, ""
+	restore TKey: return
+UKey:
+	DATA UBOUND, UNLOCK, USING, ""
+	restore UKey: return
+VKey:
+	DATA VAL, VARPTR, VIEW, ""
+	restore VKey: return
+WKey:
+	DATA WAIT, WEND, WHILE, WIDTH, WINDOW, WRITE, ""
+	restore WKey: return
+XKey:
+	DATA XOR, ""
+	restore XKey: return
+YKey:
+	DATA ""
+	restore YKey: return
+ZKey:
+	DATA ""
+	restore ZKey: return
+
+end def
+
+rem $subtitle:'FnIsMetacommand- Is a Metacommand?'
+rem $page
+'FNIsMetaCommand- returns non-zero if source$ is a meta command of
+' the form "'$metacommand" or "$metacommand"
+'
+' Input:
+'   Source$ - source string to determine if metacommand
+'
+def FnIsMetacommand(source$)
+
+' The following is a list of the metacommands processed by this program
+Meta$ = "TITLE SUBTITLE LINESIZE PAGESIZE PAGE PAGEIF SKIP LIST- LIST+ LIST"
+
+  if (mid$(source$,1,1)) = "'" then source$=mid$(source$,2)
+  if ((mid$(source$,1,1)) <> "$") OR (len(source$) < 4 ) then
+		       FnIsMetacommand = 0
+		       exit def
+		   else
+		       source$=Mid$(source$,2)  ' get rid of the $
+		       source$ = FnToUpper$(source$) 'convert to uppercase
+		       x = instr(meta$,source$)
+		       if x <> 0 then FnIsMetacommand = -1 else FnIsMetacommand = 0
+  end if
+end def
+
+
+rem $subtitle:'InQuote'
+rem $page
+' InQuote- determines whether or not we are in the middle of a
+'            quoted literal
+'
+'   Input: Target$- string to see if it contains a double quote character
+'   Output: either 1 or 0, toggles state of Quoted.Literal
+'
+SUB InQuote(Target$, Quoted.Literal) STATIC
+STATIC x,xi
+    x= INSTR(1,target$,chr$(34))    ' is there a quote in the string??
+    IF x = 0 then
+	Exit SUB               ' no quote chracters, exit...
+
+    ELSE
+	x1 = Instr(x+1, target$,chr$(34))   ' look for a 2nd quote
+	if x1 = 0 then quoted.Literal = NOT Quoted.Literal
+    END IF
+END SUB
+
+
+rem $subtitle:'Write.Outputfile- writes 1 line'
+rem $page
+' Write.Outputfile- Writes one line to the output file, handling all the
+'                   all the parameters set up by metacommands.
+' Assumptions:- This routine assumes that channel #2 has been opened for output
+'
+' Input:
+'    OutputLine$ - The line to output
+' Output:
+'    None
+' Uses:
+'     Out.Title$, Out.SubTitle$, Out.LineSize, Out.PageSize, Out.List,
+'     Out.LineCount, Out.BlankBottom, MetaCommand.On, True, False
+SUB Write.Outputfile(outputLine$) STATIC
+
+SHARED Out.Title$, Out.SubTitle$, Out.LineSize, Out.PageSize, Out.List
+SHARED Out.LineCount, Out.BlankBottom, MetaCommand.On, True, False
+    If Out.List = False THEN Exit Sub   'Listing is OFF
+    If MetaCommand.On Then MetaCommand.On = False: Exit Sub   ' Don't Print the metacommand line
+    IF Out.LineCount = 0 Then CALL Out.Header    'must be first time into this routine
+
+    ' Convert all TABs in the line to Blanks
+    OutputLine$ = FnTabsToBlanks$(outputline$)
+
+    'Output the line, given the page width
+    OutLine.Length = Len(outputLine$)
+    While OutLine.Length > Out.LineSize-1
+	IF (Out.LineCount > (Out.PageSize-Out.BlankBottom)) AND (Out.PageSize <> 255) THEN CALL Out.Header
+	PRINT #2, Mid$(OutputLine$,1,Out.LineSize-1)
+	OutputLine$ = Mid$(OutputLine$,Out.LineSize) 'start at next char
+	OutLine.Length  = Len(outputLine$)
+	Out.LineCount = Out.LineCount + 1
+    Wend
+    IF (Out.LineCount > (Out.PageSize-Out.BlankBottom)) AND (Out.PageSize <> 255) THEN CALL Out.Header
+    PRINT #2, Mid$(OutputLine$,1,Out.LineSize-1)
+    Out.LineCount = Out.LineCount + 1
+
+End Sub
+
+
+rem $subtitle:'Out.Header- Writes the Header Info'
+rem $page
+' Out.Header - Output the header to the output file
+'
+' Assumptions- Assumes Channel #2 is open for output
+' Input:
+'    None
+' Output:
+'    None
+' Uses:
+'     Out.Title$, Out.SubTitle$, Out.LineSize, Out.PageSize, Out.List,
+'     Out.LineCount
+SUB Out.Header STATIC
+
+SHARED Out.Title$, Out.SubTitle$, Out.LineSize
+SHARED Out.LineCount, Out.PageNum, Out.List
+
+    If Out.List = 0 Then exit sub
+
+    ' first update the screen
+    Locate 2,5:print "Microsoft PPRINT: Formatted Print Utility"
+    locate 4,5:print space$(60)
+    locate 4,5:print "Currently printing Page: ";Out.Pagenum
+	 if out.pagenum > 1 then Print #2, Chr$(12)    ' The FF character
+
+    Print #2, Mid$(Out.Title$,1,Out.LineSize);
+	 page$ = "Page"+string$(4-len(str$(out.pagenum))," ")+str$(out.PageNum)
+    print #2,Tab(Out.LineSize-len(page$));Page$
+	 print #2, Mid$(Out.Subtitle$,1,Out.LineSize);
+	 print.date$ = left$(date$,6)+right$(date$,2)
+	 print #2, Tab(Out.LineSize-8);print.date$
+    print #2, Tab(Out.LineSize-8);Time$
+	 Print #2,Tab(Out.LineSize-35);"Microsoft QuickBASIC Compiler V2.01"
+
+    Print #2, ""  ' add a blank line
+    Out.LineCount = 7
+    Out.PageNum = Out.PageNum + 1
+
+END SUB
+
+
+rem $subtitle:'ProcessMetacommand- Process 1 Metacommand'
+rem $page
+' ProcessMetaCommand- Determines which meta command it is and takes
+'                     the appropriate action(s)
+'
+' Input
+'    Token$- Last token found
+' Output
+'    None, except the action associated with the metacommand
+'
+
+SUB ProcessMetaCommand( Token$) STATIC
+SHARED Out.Title$, Out.SubTitle$, Out.LineSize, Out.PageSize, Out.List
+SHARED Out.LineCount, Out.BlankBottom, MetaCommand.On, True, False
+SHARED OutputFile$
+STATIC X, Meta1$
+' Each item in the following list is an a 10 character boundary so that
+' I can find the index, divide by 10, and use the ON...GOTO contruct
+
+meta1$ = "         TITLE     SUBTITLE  LINESIZE  PAGE      PAGESIZE  PAGEIF    SKIP      LIST-     LIST+"
+
+
+  if (mid$(token$,1,1)) = "'" then token$=mid$(token$,2)
+  token$=Mid$(token$,2)  ' get rid of the $
+  token$ = FnToUpper$(token$) 'convert to uppercase
+  MetaCommand.On = -1
+  x = instr(Meta1$,token$)/10
+
+  ON x GOTO Title, Subtitle, LineSize,  Page, PageSize, Pageif, Skip, ListOff, ListOn
+
+Title:
+    arg$=FnGetToken$("","'"): Arg$=FnGetToken$("","'")
+    Out.Title$ = Arg$
+    Exit Sub
+Subtitle:
+    arg$=FnGetToken$("","'"): Arg$=FnGetToken$("","'")
+    Out.SubTitle$ = Arg$
+    Exit Sub
+LineSize:
+    arg$=FnGetToken$("","':  ")
+    Out.LineSize=Val(arg$)
+    IF OutputFile$ = "LPT1:" THEN WIDTH #2,Out.LineSize  'FIX #57720
+    Exit Sub
+Page:
+    CALL Out.Header
+    Exit Sub
+PageSize:
+    arg$=FnGetToken$("","':  ")
+    Out.PageSize=Val(arg$)
+    Out.LineCount = Out.LineCount MOD Out.PageSize
+    Exit Sub
+Pageif:
+    arg$=FnGetToken$("","':  ")
+    x =Val(arg$)
+    If (Out.PageSize-Out.BlankBottom-x) <= Out.LineCount Then CALL Out.Header
+    Exit Sub
+Skip:
+    arg$=FnGetToken$("","':  ")
+    x =Val(arg$)
+    IF (Out.LineCount+x) > (Out.PageSize-Out.BlankBottom) Then
+			       Call Out.Header
+			   Else
+			       For i=1 to x
+				  Call Write.OutputFile(" ")
+			       Next i
+    END IF
+    MetaCommand.On = -1   ' Fix #56937
+    Exit Sub
+ListOff:
+    Out.List = False
+    Exit Sub
+ListOn:
+    Out.List= True
+    Exit Sub
+END SUB
+
+rem $subtitle:'GetFilenames- Gets the I/O filenames'
+rem $page
+'
+' GetFileNames - Parses the input and output file names from command$
+' Description:
+'	This routine retrieves the input and output file names. These should
+'  be separated by a comma with the input file name coming first.
+' Input:
+'  Command$ - Command line
+'  true, false - logical flags
+' Output:
+'  InputFile$, OutputFile$ - Input/Output file name
+' 
+sub GetFileNames static
+shared InputFile$, OutputFile$, Seps$, true, false
+
+	if (Command$ = "") then
+		print " Microsoft PPrint: Formatted Print Utility"
+		print " "
+		Input "    Input Filename (return to terminate)";InputFile$
+		If inputfile$ = "" Then Exit Sub
+		Input "    Output Filename (default is LPT1:)";OutputFile$
+		CLS
+	else
+		InputFile$ = FNGetToken$(Command$, Seps$)
+		OutputFile$ = FNGetToken$("", "  ")      'next token is outputfilename
+	end if
+ExitGet:
+		'Add .bas if filename has no extension
+		if Instr(InputFile$,".") = 0 then InputFile$ = InputFile$ + ".bas"
+		if (OutputFile$ = "") then OutputFile$ = "LPT1:"
+end sub
+
+rem $subtitle:'InitSys- Initialize the System'
+rem $page
+'
+'  initialize the system
+'
+SUB initsys STATIC
+SHARED true, false, KeyWordCount, Seps$
+SHARED Out.Title$, Out.SubTitle$, Out.LineSize, Out.PageSize, Out.List, Out.LineCount, Out.BlankBottom, Out.PageNum
+
+	Seps$ = " ,:   ": true = -1: false = 0
+	Out.Title$ = ""
+	Out.SubTitle$ = ""
+	Out.LineSize = 80
+	Out.PageSize = 66
+	Out.List = true
+	Out.LineCount = 0
+	Out.BlankBottom = 6 '6 lines are left blank at the bottom of each
+			    ' page unless pagesize=255 meaning an infinate
+			    ' page.
+	Out.PageNum = 1
+	MetaCommand.On = 0
+END SUB
+
+rem $subtitle:'MAIN PROGRAM'
+rem $page
+main:
+	Call InitSys
+	Call GetFileNames
+	If Inputfile$ = "" Then goto Exitmain
+	open InputFile$ for input as #1
+	open outputfile$ for output as #2
+	while not eof(1)
+		line input #1, LineCur$
+		outputLine$ = LineCur$
+		OutputIndex = 1
+		TokenCur$ = FNGetToken$(LineCur$, Seps$)
+		while (TokenCur$ <> "")
+		      CALL InQuote(TokenCur$,Quoted.Literal)
+		      IF FNIsKeyWord(TokenCur$) then
+			  ' Make uppercase
+			  ' stuff into line at appropriate position
+			  '
+			  Temp$=FNToUpper$(TokenCur$)
+			  x = Instr(OutputIndex,OutputLine$,TokenCur$)
+			  IF NOT Quoted.Literal THEN MID$(OutPutLine$,x) = Temp$ 'replace with uppercase
+			  OutputIndex = x + len(temp$)
+
+		      ELSEIF  FnIsMetacommand(tokencur$) Then
+			      OutputIndex = OutputIndex + Len(TokenCur$)
+			      ' process the metacommand
+			      Call ProcessMetaCommand(TokenCur$)
+		      ELSE
+			      'move index across line
+			      OutputIndex = OutputIndex + Len(TokenCur$)
+		      END IF
+
+		      TokenCur$ = FNGetToken$("", Seps$)
+		wend
+		Call Write.Outputfile(OutputLine$)
+	wend
+
+	Print #2,chr$(12) 'send one last FF character
+	CLOSE   ' Close all files
+
+Exitmain:
+end
+
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/PREFIX.ASM b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/PREFIX.ASM
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ea7154d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/PREFIX.ASM	
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+	title	prefix
+_CODE		segment para public 'BC_CODE'
+_CODE		ends
+CSEG		segment para public 'CODESG'
+CSEG 		ends
+CODE		segment para public 'CODE'
+CODE		ends
+SHELL		segment para public 'CODESG'
+SHELL		ends
+CLEAR		segment para public 'CODESG'
+CLEAR		ends
+BC_ICN_CODE	segment para public 'INIT_CODE'
+BC_ICN_CODE	ends
+BC_IDS_CODE	segment para public 'INIT_CODE'
+BC_IDS_CODE	ends
+INIT_CODE	segment para public 'INIT_CODE'
+INIT_CODE	ends
+
+; DSEG must come first and not be CONST or _DATA so that other language
+; obj's do not mess with the location of DSEG
+DSEG 		segment	common 'DATASG'
+DSEG		ends
+CONST		segment para public 'CONST'
+CONST		ends
+_BSS		segment word public 'BSS'
+_BSS		ends
+c_common	segment word public 'BSS'
+c_common	ends
+DATA		segment para public 'DATA'
+DATA		ends
+BC_DATA		segment word public 'BC_VARS'
+BC_DATA		ends
+named_common 	segment word common 'BC_VARS'
+named_common	ends
+BC_FT		segment word public 'BC_SEGS'
+BC_FT		ends
+BC_CN		segment para public 'BC_SEGS'
+BC_CN		ends
+BC_DS		segment para public 'BC_SEGS'
+BC_DS		ends
+COMMON		segment para common 'BLANK'
+COMMON		ends
+LAST_SEGMENT	segment para public 'LAST_SEGMENT'
+LAST_SEGMENT	ends
+DGROUP		group DSEG,CONST,_BSS,DATA,BC_DATA,BC_FT,BC_CN,BC_DS,COMMON
+
+	public	__acrtused
+__acrtused equ	1
+
+	end
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/PREFIX.OBJ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/PREFIX.OBJ
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..554513d
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/PREFIX.OBJ differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/PREFIX87.ASM b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/PREFIX87.ASM
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2690151
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/PREFIX87.ASM	
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+	TITLE	PREFIX87 - segment ordering module for assembly programs
+
+_CODE		segment para public 'BC_CODE'
+_CODE		ends
+CSEG		segment para public 'CODESG'
+CSEG 		ends
+CODE		segment para public 'CODE'
+CODE		ends
+SHELL		segment para public 'CODESG'
+SHELL		ends
+CLEAR		segment para public 'CODESG'
+CLEAR		ends
+BC_ICN_CODE	segment para public 'INIT_CODE'
+BC_ICN_CODE	ends
+BC_IDS_CODE	segment para public 'INIT_CODE'
+BC_IDS_CODE	ends
+INIT_CODE	segment para public 'INIT_CODE'
+INIT_CODE	ends
+
+; DSEG must come first and not be CONST or _DATA so that other language
+; obj's do not mess with the location of DSEG
+
+DSEG 		segment	common 'DATASG'
+DSEG		ends
+CONST		segment para public 'CONST'
+CONST		ends
+_BSS		segment word public 'BSS'
+_BSS		ends
+c_common	segment word public 'BSS'
+c_common	ends
+DATA		segment para public 'DATA'
+DATA		ends
+BC_DATA		segment word public 'BC_VARS'
+BC_DATA		ends
+named_common 	segment word common 'BC_VARS'
+named_common	ends
+BC_FT		segment word public 'BC_SEGS'
+BC_FT		ends
+BC_CN		segment para public 'BC_SEGS'
+BC_CN		ends
+BC_DS		segment para public 'BC_SEGS'
+BC_DS		ends
+COMMON		segment para common 'BLANK'
+COMMON		ends
+LAST_SEGMENT	segment para public 'LAST_SEGMENT'
+LAST_SEGMENT	ends
+DGROUP		group DSEG,CONST,_BSS,DATA,BC_DATA,BC_FT,BC_CN,BC_DS,COMMON
+
+	public	__acrtused
+__acrtused equ	1
+
+fINT	EQU	0CDH
+fFWAIT	EQU	09BH
+fESCAPE EQU	0D8H
+fNOP	EQU	090H
+fES	EQU	026H
+fCS	EQU	02Eh
+fSS	EQU	036h
+fDS	EQU	03Eh
+
+BEGINT	equ	084h			; QB 3 beginning interrupt
+
+
+PUBLIC	FIWRQQ,FIERQQ,FIDRQQ
+PUBLIC	FISRQQ,FJSRQQ,FIARQQ,FJARQQ,FICRQQ,FJCRQQ	; new fixups
+
+FIDRQQ	EQU	(fINT + 256*(BEGINT + 0)) - (fFWAIT + 256*fESCAPE)
+
+FIERQQ	EQU	(fINT + 256*(BEGINT + 8)) - (fFWAIT + 256*fES)
+
+FIWRQQ	EQU	(fINT + 256*(BEGINT + 9)) - (fNOP + 256*fFWAIT)
+
+FIARQQ	EQU	(fINT + 256*(BEGINT + 8)) - (fFWAIT + 256*fDS)
+FJARQQ	EQU	256*(((0 shl 6) or (fESCAPE and 03Fh)) - fESCAPE)
+
+FISRQQ	EQU	(fINT + 256*(BEGINT + 8)) - (fFWAIT + 256*fSS)
+FJSRQQ	EQU	256*(((1 shl 6) or (fESCAPE and 03Fh)) - fESCAPE)
+
+FICRQQ	EQU	(fINT + 256*(BEGINT + 8)) - (fFWAIT + 256*fCS)
+FJCRQQ	EQU	256*(((2 shl 6) or (fESCAPE and 03Fh)) - fESCAPE)
+
+	END
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/PREFIX87.OBJ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/PREFIX87.OBJ
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..814c393
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/PREFIX87.OBJ differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/QB.EXE b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/QB.EXE
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..79d6626
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/QB.EXE differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/QB87.EXE b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/QB87.EXE
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0ac7b55
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/QB87.EXE differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/README.DOC b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/README.DOC
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52439f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/README.DOC	
@@ -0,0 +1,771 @@
+			 "README.DOC" File
+	  Release Notes for the MICROSOFT(R) QuickBASIC Compiler
+	     	Version 3.0 for IBM(R) Personal Computers
+			  and Compatibles
+
+	      (C) Copyright Microsoft Corporation, 1987
+
+THIS FILE CONTAINS IMPORTANT INFORMATION CONCERNING VERSION 3.0 OF
+THE MICROSOFT(R) QUICKBASIC COMPILER.  PLEASE READ THE ENTIRE FILE
+VERY CAREFULLY BEFORE USING YOUR QUICKBASIC PRODUCT.
+
+This file is divided into three parts, as follows:
+
+     PART	CONTENTS
+
+	1 	Information about additions and changes to QuickBASIC
+		made after the manual was printed.
+
+	2 	Additions and corrections to the QuickBASIC Compiler
+		Version 3.0 update document.
+
+	3 	Additions and corrections to the QuickBASIC Compiler
+		Version 2.0 manual.
+
+For information on corrections to the software from Version 2.0 to 3.0,
+please refer to the UPDATE.DOC file on this disk.
+
+===<Part 1: Additional Information>=========================================
+
+1. Executing Command Buttons
+
+   In QuickBASIC 2, pressing ENTER always executed the command button
+   with the double outline (the default command), regardless of which
+   button was highlighted. To execute the command in the highlighted
+   button, you had to press SPACEBAR.
+
+   In QuickBASIC 2.01 and 3, this is no longer the case: pressing either
+   ENTER or SPACEBAR executes the highlighted button.
+
+2. The QB.INI Initialization File
+
+   QB.INI is an initialization file that QuickBASIC uses to set both the
+   Options settings in the View menu and the Autosave command settings
+   in the File menu. Upon exiting QuickBASIC, if you have modified
+   any of the Options settings or the state of the File menu's Autosave
+   command, these changes are written to QB.INI. Note that QB.INI is
+   not supplied on any of the product disks. It is created only when
+   you change the Options or Autosave settings.	If you use only the
+   default settings, QB.INI is never created.
+
+   When QB.INI is created, it is placed in the current directory. When
+   QuickBASIC starts, it looks for QB.INI in the current directory, then
+   in the locations specified by the PATH environment variable.
+
+3. Source-File Line Termination
+
+   QuickBASIC requires a CR-LF (carriage return-line feed) sequence at the
+   end of each line. If only carriage returns are present, QuickBASIC reads
+   the first 255 characters only, and continues without producing an error
+   message. If only line feeds are present, QuickBASIC appears to read the
+   file correctly, but will in fact overlook the last character of each line.
+   If you use an editor that places only a CR or an LF at the end of a line,
+   you need to modify your source files so they have the correct sequence at
+   the end of each line. The following program examines the end of each line
+   in a BASIC source file and inserts a carriage return, line feed, or both, if
+   needed (the original contents are saved in a file with the extension ".BAK").
+
+   ' Be sure to compile this program with the "On Error" (/e) and
+   ' "Resume Next" (/x) options to turn on error trapping
+
+   DEFINT A-Z
+   CONST FALSE = 0, TRUE = NOT FALSE
+
+   CarReturn$ = CHR$(13)
+   LineFeed$  = CHR$(10)
+
+   DO
+      CLS
+      INPUT "File (.BAS): ", InpFile$
+      Extension = INSTR(InpFile$,".")
+      IF Extension > 0 THEN
+	 InpFile$ = LEFT$(InpFile$,Extension-1)
+      END IF
+      ON ERROR GOTO Handler
+      NAME InpFile$ + ".BAS" AS InpFile$ + ".BAK"
+      OPEN InpFile$ + ".BAK" FOR INPUT AS #1
+      ON ERROR GOTO 0
+      OPEN InpFile$ + ".BAS" FOR OUTPUT AS #2
+      PrevCarReturn = False
+      DO UNTIL EOF(1)
+	 FileChar$ = INPUT$(1, #1)
+	 IF FileChar$ = CarReturn$ THEN
+	    IF PrevCarReturn THEN FileChar$ = LineFeed$ + FileChar$
+	    PrevCarReturn = True
+	 ELSEIF FileChar$ = LineFeed$ THEN
+	    IF NOT PrevCarReturn THEN FileChar$ = CarReturn$ + FileChar$
+	    PrevCarReturn = False
+	 ELSEIF PrevCarReturn THEN
+	    PrevCarReturn = False
+	    FileChar$ = LineFeed$ + FileChar$
+	 END IF
+	 PRINT #2, FileChar$;
+      LOOP
+      CLOSE
+      PRINT "Another file (Y/N)?"
+      More$ = INPUT$(1)
+   LOOP WHILE More$ = "y" OR More$ = "Y"
+
+   SYSTEM
+
+   Handler:
+      ErrNumber = ERR
+      IF ErrNumber = 53 THEN
+	 CLS
+	 PRINT "No such file.	Enter new name."
+	 INPUT "File (.BAS): ", InpFile$
+	 RESUME
+      ELSEIF ErrNumber = 58 THEN
+	 KILL InpFile$ + ".BAK"
+	 RESUME
+      ELSE
+	 ON ERROR GOTO 0
+	 ERROR ErrNumber
+      END IF
+
+4. Using CALL ABSOLUTE with In-Memory Compilation
+
+   ABSOLUTE is considered an external subroutine by the QuickBASIC compiler.
+   The assembly-language source for this subroutine is in the file
+   ABSOLUTE.ASM, which can be found on either of the disks labeled Disk 1 in
+   the QuickBASIC distribution package.	ABSOLUTE.OBJ, an assembled version of
+   this subroutine suitable for inclusion in a user library with the BUILDLIB
+   utility, can be found on either of the disks labeled Disk 2 in the QuickBASIC
+   distribution package.
+
+5. Compilation Errors
+
+   When an error is detected during compilation, code generation stops. This
+   allows for faster compilation, but has the side effect that some errors may
+   be reported that are not errors. When the original error is corrected,
+   these side-effect errors go away. For example, the statements
+
+   FOR I = 1
+     .
+     .
+     .
+   NEXT I
+
+   generate two errors, "Missing TO" and "NEXT without FOR". When
+   the FOR statement is changed to read "FOR I = 1 to 10", both errors
+   are corrected.
+
+6. COMMAND.COM, the SHELL Statement and the Free Menu's Shell Command
+
+   QuickBASIC requires COMMAND.COM before it can execute either a SHELL
+   statement or the Shell command from the File menu. QuickBASIC looks
+   for COMMAND.COM first in the directory specified in the COMSPEC
+   environment variable, then in the current directory.
+
+7. Using the SHELL Statement in a Subroutine
+
+   The SHELL statement does not compress memory. If not enough contiguous
+   memory is available, (for example, if many CHAIN statements have been
+   executed, or several dynamic arrays were allocated then erased), a SHELL
+   statement may fail with an "Out of memory" error message.
+
+8. Using the SHELL Statement with DOS 2.X
+
+   If you are using a 2.X version of DOS, programs that contain SHELL
+   statements may not exit correctly. This is due to a known problem in DOS
+   2.X. The problem occurs when DOS reloads the transient portion of the
+   command processor into high memory.
+
+   To exit QuickBASIC after executing an in-memory program that contains
+   SHELL statements, when the program finishes running, choose Shell from the
+   File menu, then type "exit" at the DOS prompt.
+
+   When standalone executable programs exit, the message "Invalid COMMAND.COM"
+   may appear. If so, you must restart your system. If you compile using
+   BRUN30.EXE, in most cases the program exits properly.
+
+   Another solution is to upgrade your DOS version to 3.X.
+
+9. Running Terminate-and-Stay-Resident Programs from the File Menu's
+   Shell Command
+
+   Do not run terminate-and-stay-resident programs while executing the Shell
+   command from the File menu. When a Shell command is executed, QuickBASIC
+   is compressed into the smallest memory possible. The terminate-and-stay-
+   resident program occupies memory required by QuickBASIC, making it
+   impossible to compile or run a program, or do anything that allocates
+   memory.
+
+10. Changing Directories from the File Menu's Shell Command
+
+   If you change directories after executing the Shell command from the File
+   menu, this directory is the current directory when you return to QuickBASIC.
+   Subsequent Load commands use this as the default directory, and when you
+   quit QuickBASIC, you will be in this directory.
+
+11. Using BRUN30.EXE with User Libraries
+
+   The run-time module BRUN30.EXE obtains the user library using the name
+   the program module was compiled with. All independently compiled program
+   modules to be linked together must be compiled with the same user library
+   using the same name; othewise, an error occurs at run time.
+
+   You cannot use BCOM30.LIB, the alternate run-time library, with user
+   libraries.
+
+12. Using /l with Nonreferenced Libraries
+
+   User libraries specified with the /l option are pulled into the
+   executable file regardless of whether the program requires them.
+
+13. The User-Library Search Path
+
+   If path information is provided with the qb command's /l option, as in
+
+   qb progname /l \src\lib\mylib.exe
+
+   no path search is performed. If the library is not in the specified location
+   an error occurs. If no path information is provided, the current directory
+   is searched, then the directory specified in the LIB environment variable.
+
+14. Graphics-Mode Statements
+
+   A color-graphics adapter is required if you are using any of the following
+   statements:
+
+   CIRCLE				PMAP
+   COLOR (screen modes 1-10)		POINT
+   DRAW					PRESET
+   GET (graphics)			PSET
+   LINE					PUT (graphics)
+   PAINT				SCREEN (screen modes 1-10)
+   PALETTE				VIEW
+   PCOPY				WINDOW
+
+15. EGA-Card Restrictions
+
+   The EGA card does not support the COLOR statement's border parameter. Using
+   the border parameter causes unpredictable results.
+
+16. Program Capacity
+
+   Because the Debug option generates extra code, extremely large programs
+   that are compiled with the Debug option may exceed the memory limits of
+   your computer.
+
+17. Object-File Size
+
+   Programs compiled with the Debug option (the default) create larger
+   object files than programs compiled without the Debug option.
+
+18. Using the PEN Function When a Mouse Driver Is Present
+
+   The mouse driver intercepts the PEN function's BIOS calls and redirects
+   them to the mouse. If you don't want to use the mouse as a lightpen, call
+   mouse function 14 to disable the mouse's lightpen-emulation flag, which is
+   on by default. Mouse function 13 turns lightpen emulation back on. For
+   example, the following code turns mouse lightpen emulation off:
+
+   CALL MOUSE(14,0,0,0)
+
+   See your mouse manual for more information.
+
+19. Editing Responses to the INPUT Statement
+
+   The input editor supplied with QuickBASIC is a line editor only. This
+   means you can move and edit only horizontally. Attempts to use the
+   UP, DOWN, PGUP and PGDN cursor keys produce a beep.
+
+20. Disk-Error Messages
+
+   Whenever you get a disk-error message, such as "Write protect violation",
+   DO NOT change to a different disk before selecting "RETRY". If you want
+   to retry with a different disk, select the "Cancel" button, replace the
+   disk, and compile again.
+
+===<Part 2: Corrections to the QuickBASIC Compiler Version 3.0 Update>=======
+
+Page		Correction
+----		----------
+
+Update-25	The first sentence under "Viewing User-Library Source Code"
+		should be changed to read as follows:
+
+		QuickBASIC's debugger also lets you see the text of any BASIC
+		source file used to build the user library, provided the
+		source file was compiled with either the /d command-line option
+		or the Debug option in the Compile... dialog box. If a source
+		in the user library was compiled without these options, the
+		debugger displays the following message if you try to view the
+		file with the F6 command:
+
+			*****  No Debug Information	*****
+
+Update-44	The following information on emulating the function of an
+		8087/80287 math coprocessor should be added to Section 4.2:
+
+		Programs using either the standard BRUN3087.LIB library
+		or the alternate BCOM3087.LIB library automatically use an
+		8087/80287 coprocessor at run time if one is installed.
+		However, you can override the use of the coprocessor and force
+		an application to emulate its function by setting the NO87
+		environment variable.
+
+		HOW TO SET THE NO87 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE
+		----------------------------------------
+	    	
+		    EXAMPLES
+		    --------
+
+			SET NO87=Use of coprocessor suppressed
+	    		SET NO87=<one or more spaces>
+
+	    		  Both of the preceding examples force software emulation of
+		    the 8087/80287 coprocessor, provided the application is
+		    using BRUN3087.LIB or BCOM3087.LIB linked with EMULATOR.OBJ
+		    (see the "COPROCESSOR/EMULATION USAGE TABLE" below for
+		    more information on when NO87 forces emulation). The first
+		    setting causes the message
+
+		    	Use of coprocessor suppressed
+
+		    to appear on the screen when a program that uses an 8087
+		    or 80287 is executed, and an 8087 or 80287 is present.
+		    The second setting does not display a message.
+
+		    To turn off forced emulation, set NO87 equal to a null, or
+		    empty, value.
+
+		    EXAMPLE
+		    -------
+
+		    	SET NO87=
+
+		    The preceding example turns off software emulation of
+		    the 8087/80287. Note: no spaces follow the "equal" (=)
+		    sign.
+
+		COPROCESSOR/EMULATION USAGE TABLE
+		---------------------------------
+
+		The following table shows the effects of setting the NO87
+		variable on applications using QB87:
+
+			 +----------------------+-----------------------+
+			 | Math Coprocessor	|  Math Coprocessor not |
+			 | Present and NO87 Set	|  Present		|
+    +--------------------+----------------------+-----------------------+
+    | 			 |			|			|
+    | Application	 |    Emulates 		|    Emulates		|
+    | using BRUN3087.EXE |    coprocessor	|    coprocessor	|
+    |			 |			|			|
+    +--------------------+----------------------+-----------------------+
+    | Application	 |			|			|
+    | compiled with /o,	 |    Emulates		|    Emulates		|
+    | and linked with	 |    coprocessor	|    coprocessor	|
+    | EMULATOR.OBJ	 |			|			|
+    +--------------------+----------------------+-----------------------+
+    | Application	 |			|			|
+    | compiled with /o,	 |    Uses		|    Does not run	|
+    | but not linked	 |    coprocessor	|			|
+    | with EMULATOR.OBJ	 |			|			|
+    +--------------------+----------------------+-----------------------+
+
+		NOTES ON TABLE:
+
+		1) The entries under the "Math Coprocessor not Present"
+		   heading are valid regardless of whether or not the
+		   NO87 variable is set.
+
+		2) If an 8087/80287 coprocessor is present and either one
+		   of the following conditions is true, the application
+		   always uses the coprocessor:
+
+		   	a) The NO87 variable is not set.
+
+		   	b) Forced emulation has been turned off by setting
+			   NO87 equal to a null value.
+
+Update-45	The text under the "Effect" heading for CLS 1 should
+		be changed to read as follows:
+
+		    ...Previously, CLS 1 changed the screen only
+		    after a VIEW statement was executed.
+
+		Also, add the following to the text for CLS 2:
+
+		    See the reference entry for VIEW PRINT in the
+		    Microsoft QuickBASIC Compiler manual for more
+		    information on creating a text window.
+
+===<Part 3: Corrections to the QuickBASIC Compiler Version 2.0 Manual>=======
+
+Page	Correction
+----	----------
+
+61-63	Significant enhancements have been made to QuickBASIC's debugging
+	capabilities. See the discussion in Section 3, "Debugging Commands,"
+	of the "Microsoft QuickBASIC Compiler Version 3.0 Update," which
+	supersedes the discussion on pages 61-63 of the Version 2.0 manual.
+
+71	In the syntax line at the bottom of the page, the "c:buffersize"
+	option should be preceded by a forward slash, as follows:
+
+	/c:buffersize
+
+76	In the first paragraph after Figure 4.2, the sentence "If you
+	are in a subdirectory..." should state that the entry ".."
+	appears in the "upper-left corner", not the "upper-right".
+
+78	Binary files cannot be loaded into QuickBASIC. The note in the
+	middle of the page should read:
+
+	QuickBASIC accepts only ASCII files. If you attempt to load a
+	binary file, you will get an error.
+
+78	BASICA ASCII files containing explicit extended ASCII characters,
+	(graphics characters), are treated as binary files by QuickBASIC.
+
+93	In Section 4.4.3.11, "Exe," it should be noted that the executable
+	files created using this method require the support of the BRUN30.EXE
+	run-time module in order to execute.
+
+120	The first line of this example (DEFINT I-L) should be changed
+	to DEFINT I-S so as to execute correctly.
+
+152	The stack is preset to 768 bytes, not 512.
+
+160	The list of nonexecutable statements should also include the
+	CONST statement.
+
+161	In the example under Section 9.2.2, there should not be an underscore
+	character (_) following the FIELD variable D$.
+
+162	String constants can be ASCII characters in the range 32 to 126.
+	(127 is the DEL character)
+
+172	In the discussion of "Overflow" and "Division by zero" errors, the
+	following paragraph should be added to item 1a:
+
+	    If you are running a program from the QuickBASIC
+	    user interface (editor) with the Debug option on,
+	    and one of these errors occurs, the program ends
+	    and the appropriate error message appears in the
+	    dialog box at the bottom of the screen.  You are
+	    then returned to the editor, with the cursor
+	    positioned on the line where the error occurred.
+
+	The following should also be added to item 2:
+
+	    If you are running a program from the QuickBASIC
+	    interface with the Debug option off, the program
+	    still ends with the appropriate error message
+	    displayed; however, when you are returned to the
+	    editor, the cursor is positioned on the first line
+	    of the program, rather than the offending line.
+
+183	In Table 10.1, you should add the statements PEEK, POKE, and DEF SEG
+	to the column "May Require Modifying Interpreter Programs," since
+	the memory maps of the interpreter and the compiler are different.
+	For example, programs that read from or write to memory locations in
+	the RAM-resident portion of the interpreter do not work in the
+	compiler environment since the interpreter is not present.
+
+188	In Section 10.3.2, the $INCLUDE metacommand, restriction 2) is in
+	error.	Included files may contain END statements.
+
+193	In Table 10.6, you should add the statements PEEK, POKE, and
+	DEF SEG, since the memory maps of the interpreter and the compiler
+	are different. For example, programs that read from or write to memory
+	locations in the RAM-resident portion of the interpreter do not work in
+	the compiler environment since the interpreter is not present.
+
+200	In the Action section for the BLOAD command, it states that
+	BLOAD can take input from "any input device." This is not true,
+	as the BLOAD command does not take input from the "KYBD:" device.
+
+222	The EGA card does not support the COLOR statement's border parameter.
+	If you have an EGA card installed on your system, using the border
+	parameter causes unpredictable results.
+
+229	The list of nonexecutable statements should also include the
+	CONST and DATA statements.
+
+232	The "VO1" variable in the third line from the bottom should be changed
+	to read as follows:
+
+		DENS=W/VOL
+
+235	The last line in the example should be "LOCATE Y,X" not
+	"LOCATE X,Y".
+
+265	The syntax for the ERASE statement should have a comma between
+	the array names, as shown here:
+
+		ERASE arrayname [,arrayname...]
+
+275	In the FIELD statement's Example 2, the order of arguments is reversed
+	for all string-manipulation functions. The affected section of the
+	program should read as follows:
+
+	.
+	.
+	.
+	IF (ZCHECK$ > "85699" AND ZCHECK$ < "85801") THEN
+	    INFO$ = PLIST$
+	    PRINT LEFT$(INFO$,25)
+	    PRINT MID$(INFO$,16,25)
+	    PRINT RIGHT$(INFO$,17)
+	END IF
+
+	The FIELD statements in the two examples shown under Example 4 should
+	be changed to read as follows:
+
+		FIELD #1, RECLENGTH% AS OFFSET$, SIZE% AS A$(I%)
+
+		and
+
+		FIELD #1, 15 AS A$(1), 10 AS A$(2),..., 8 AS A$(14)
+
+280	Change the first sentence at the top of the page to read as
+	follows:
+
+		The body of a FOR...NEXT loop is executed at least
+		once, unless one of the following conditions is true,
+		in which case the loop is not executed:
+
+		* Step size is positive, and <start> is greater
+		  than <end>.
+
+		* Step size is negative, and <start> is less than
+		  <end>.
+
+283	In the FRE function example, the first line of the example should be
+	a $DYNAMIC metacommand, as follows:
+
+	'  $DYNAMIC
+	PRINT "Before dimensioning arrays:   " FRE(""),FRE(0),FRE(-1)
+	.
+	.
+	.
+
+286	There is a missing parenthesis in the formula for computing the GET
+	graphics statement's array size. There should be three left parentheses
+	after the INT keyword, as follows:
+
+	4 + INT(((x2 - x1 +1) * bits-per-pixel + 7)/8) * ((y2 - y1) +1)
+
+297	The two examples comparing the single-line and block forms of the
+	IF...THEN...ELSE statement should read as follows:
+
+	Example 1:
+
+	INPUT "Price = ",x
+	IF (x >= 10000) THEN DISC! = x * .25! ELSE _
+
+	    IF (x < 10000) AND (x >= 5000) THEN DISC! = x * .2! ELSE _
+
+	    IF (x < 5000) AND (x >= 1000) THEN DISC! = x * .1! ELSE _
+
+		DISC! = 0
+
+	IF DISC! = 0 THEN PRINT "No discount" ELSE _
+
+	    PRINT "Discounted price = "; : PRINT USING "$$####.##";x - DISC!
+
+	Example 2:
+
+	INPUT "Price = ",x
+	IF (x >= 10000) THEN
+	    DISC! = x * .25!
+	ELSEIF (x < 10000) AND (x >= 5000) THEN
+	    DISC! = x * .2!
+	ELSEIF (x < 5000) AND (x >= 1000) THEN
+	    DISC! = x * .1!
+	ELSE DISC! = 0
+	END IF
+	IF DISC! = 0 THEN
+	    PRINT "No discount"
+	ELSE
+	    PRINT "Discounted price = ";
+	    PRINT USING "$$####.##";x - DISC!
+	END IF
+
+313	The last sentence of the description of Example 2, after
+	the semicolon, should read: "The last line displays the new
+	soft-key values."
+
+314	Since QB3 supports the Advanced 101-Key keyboard, the
+	function keys F11 and F12 can now be trapped. Trapping
+	of F11 can be controlled with KEY(30) {ON | OFF | STOP},
+	while trapping of F12 can be controlled with
+	KEY(31) {ON | OFF | STOP}.
+
+315	The table listed on this page is incomplete. In addition to
+	the values listed, you must also take into account the state
+	of the NUM LOCK and CAPS LOCK keys. For NUM LOCK active you
+	should add the value &H20, and for CAPS LOCK active you should
+	add the value &H40 to the keyboard flag.
+
+317	The second comment in the example program should read:
+
+	' DOWN key will now be trapped
+
+	Also, note this program traps only the CTRL-s (lowercase s) key
+	sequence. To trap CTRL-S (with a capital S), you need to deal with
+	capital letters produced by holding down the SHIFT key, as well as
+	capital letters produced when the CAPS-LOCK key is active, as shown
+	here:
+
+	KEY 16, CHR$(&H05) + CHR$(&H1F)	   ' Trap CTRL + SHIFT + s
+	KEY 17, CHR$(&H44) + CHR$(&H1F)	   ' Trap CTRL + CAPS-LOCK + s
+
+	KEY (16) ON
+	KEY (17) ON
+
+	ON KEY (16) GOSUB KEYTRAP
+	ON KEY (17) GOSUB KEYTRAP
+
+325	The STEP option example requires a hyphen before the STEP keyword, as
+	follows:
+
+	LINE -STEP (10,5)
+
+	The phrase following the example should read:
+
+	"draws a line from (10,10) to the point with x-coordinate
+	10+10 and y-coordinate 10+5, or (20,15)."
+
+327	The Action for LINE INPUT should read:
+
+	Inputs an entire line (up to 255 characters) to a string variable...
+
+338	The Remark for LOF should read:
+
+	When a file is opened in any mode, LOF returns the size of the file in
+	bytes.
+
+348	In the description of the example it should be noted that line 100
+	converts the single-precision variable AMT to a 4-byte string;
+	therefore, the field variable D$ needs to be defined as only a
+	4-byte string:
+
+	FIELD #1, 4 AS D$, 20 AS N$
+
+353	Delete the last sentence on this page.
+
+369	Add the following note concerning the ACCESS clause:
+
+	The ACCESS clause works in an OPEN statement only if you are using
+	versions of DOS that support networking (3.0 or later). In addition,
+	you must run the SHARE.EXE program (or the network startup program must
+	run it) to perform any locking operation. Earlier versions of DOS
+	return an "Advanced Feature" error if ACCESS is used with OPEN.
+
+375	The second sentence under the Action heading for the LF option should be
+	changed to read:
+
+	When LF is specified, a line-feed character (0AH) is automatically sent
+	after each carriage-return character (0DH).
+
+388	The last sentence in the REMARKS section should be deleted. The
+	argument to the PEEK statement should be a single-precision
+	variable in the range 0-1,048,575.
+
+396	The variable in the first line of PLAY statement's Example 1 should be
+	SCALE$, not SCALES$:
+
+	SCALE$ = "CDEFGAB"
+
+410	In the example, all references to the file STORINVENT should be changed
+	to INVENT.DAT. The file argument to both OPEN statements should be
+	the same file, INVENT.DAT.
+
+418	The first entry in the "Arguments" column should be (x,y), not
+	(x1,y1).
+
+420	Images cannot be scaled with the PUT graphics statement. Only one set
+	of x,y coordinates can be specified as arguments to PUT. All text
+	after "Because you can specify..." in the second paragraph, and all of
+	the following paragraph, should be ignored.
+
+424	The second sentence in the Remarks section for the READ statement should
+	be changed to read as follows:
+
+	READ statements assign DATA-statement values to variables on a
+	one-to-one basis.
+
+448	The text format for SCREEN 1 should be 40 X 25, and the text format
+	for SCREEN 2 should be 80 X 25.
+
+	The first line under the SCREEN 2 heading should be corrected to
+	read as follows:
+
+		* 640 x 200 pixel high-resolution graphics
+
+452	The color range listed for SCREEN 2 should be 0 - 15, not 0 - 1.
+
+	Because the WIDTH statement in QuickBASIC 3 now lets you set the
+	number of lines displayed on the screen as well as the number of
+	columns, the information on legal video-page ranges in SCREEN 0
+	shown in Table 11.6 should be updated as follows:
+
+	WIDTH Statement 	Display/Adapter		Legal Video-Page
+	Format			Hardware		Ranges
+	----------------------------------------------------------------
+	WIDTH 80,25		MDPA			0 only
+				CGA			0 - 3
+				EGA (64K)		0 - 3
+				EGA (128K - 256K)	0 - 7
+
+	WIDTH 40,25		CGA, EGA		0 - 7
+
+	----------------------------------------------------------------
+	WIDTH 80,43		EGA (64K)		0 - 1
+				EGA (128K - 256K)	0 - 3
+
+	WIDTH 40,43		EGA (64K)		0 - 3
+				EGA (128K - 256K)	0 - 7
+	----------------------------------------------------------------
+	NOTE:	43-line mode is valid only with an EGA adapter with its
+		switch set for an EGA display.
+
+474	The example for the STR$ function should read as follows:
+
+	DEF FNNum$(X)
+	    X$ = STR$(X)
+	    LENGTH = LEN(X$)
+	    IF LEFT$(X$,1) <> "-" THEN LENGTH = LENGTH - 1
+	    FNNum$ = RIGHT$(X$,LENGTH)
+	END DEF
+
+	PRINT "Enter 0 to end."
+	DO
+	    INPUT "Find cosine of: ",Num
+	    IF Num THEN PRINT "COS(" FNNum$(Num) ") = " COS(Num)
+	LOOP WHILE Num <> 0
+
+482	In the example, the input to the prompt "Pattern to be searched
+	for?" must be SUB (not "sub") in order to get the output shown.
+
+525	Add CASE, CONST, DEBUG, DO, ELSEIF, LOOP, OFF, RANDOM, and SELECT
+	to the list of reserved words.
+
+	Delete the dollar-sign ($) character at the end of GOTO.
+
+535	Batch files created for versions of QuickBASIC before 2.0 require
+	modification. In older batch files, "bascom" should be "qb".
+
+536	If you are using a version of DOS earlier than 3.0, use the PATH command
+	instead of the SET command to define the PATH variable. Using SET under
+	earlier versions of DOS can cause the PATH variable to work incorrectly
+	for some path specifications containing lowercase letters.
+
+546 &	The stack is preset to 768 bytes, not 512.
+547
+
+566	The third bulleted remark ("A USR function...") should be deleted.
+
+570	The explanation for the error message "Too many files" should read:
+
+	This error most commonly occurs when an attempt is made to open a
+	number of files that exceeds the limit set by the FILES= parameter in
+	the CONFIG.SYS file. It also occurs when the per-directory file limit
+	is exceeded by an attempt to create a new file with the SAVE or OPEN
+	statement. Refer to your DOS manual for the number of files permitted
+	in a directory.
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/REMLINE.BAS b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/REMLINE.BAS
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ad6e9db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/REMLINE.BAS	
@@ -0,0 +1,382 @@
+'   Microsoft RemLine- Line Number Removal Utility
+'   Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation- 1985,1986
+
+'   REMLINE.BAS is a program to remove line numbers from Microsoft BASIC
+'   Programs. It removes only those line numbers that are not the object
+'   of a goto, gosub or if-then
+'
+'   REMLINE is run by typing:
+'
+'			REMLINE [<input file> [, <output file>]]
+'
+'   where <input file> is any input file name and <output file> is 
+'         is any output file name. If <output file> is not present 
+'         the output goes to the console.  If <output file>
+'         is present <input file> has to be present.
+'
+'   It makes several assumptions about the program
+'	 1. Program is correct syntactically, and runs in an MS Interpreter.
+'     2. 200 limit on referenced line numbers. If larger, change LineTable!
+'        declaration.
+'     3. The first number encountered on a line is considered a line num-
+'        ber; thus some continuation lines (in a compiler specific 
+'        construct) may not work correctly.
+'     4. Remember that ERL assumes the existence of line numbers, so 
+'        REMLINE should not be used on programs which depend on ERL.
+
+	DEFINT a - z 
+	DIM SHARED KeyWordTable$( 8 ) 
+	DIM SHARED LineTable!( 400 )
+	DIM KeyWordCount, LineCount, Seps$
+	DIM KeyBoard, Console
+	DIM InputFile$, OutputFile$
+	 
+'
+' FNToUpper$ - Convert string to uppercase
+' Description:
+'  This routine converts a string to uppercase. If already uppercase
+'  nothing is done. Returns a null string if input is null
+' Input:
+'  InString$ - string to convert
+' Output:
+'  FNToUpper$ - uppercase string
+' Uses:
+'  AscChar - temp used to hold ASCII form of character
+'  LenInString - Length of input string
+'  IndexInstring - Current index into input string
+Def FNToUpper$(InString$)
+
+	LenInString = len(InString$)
+	' Exit if input string is empty (null)
+	if (LenInString = 0) then FNToUpper$ = "" : Exit Def
+	for IndexInstring = 1 to LenInString
+		AscChar = asc(mid$(InString$, IndexInstring, 1))
+		' &hdf is special bit pattern that converts from lower to upper
+		if ((AscChar >= asc("a")) and (AscChar <= asc("z"))) then _
+			AscChar = AscChar and &hdf: _	
+		mid$(InString$, IndexInstring, 1) = chr$(AscChar)
+	next IndexInString
+	FNToUpper$ = InString$
+
+End Def
+
+'
+' FNStrSpn - Get the index of the first character within InString$ that is
+'				 NOT one of the characters from Separater$ 
+' Description:
+' This routine will search the parameter string InString$ until it finds 
+' a character that is not part of the Separater string. This can be used 
+' with FNStrBrk to isolate strings within strings that are separated by
+' blanks, comma etc. whatever is specified in Separater$.  This is especially
+' helpful in extracting parameters from the command line. See FNGetToken$
+' for example of use.
+'
+' Input:
+'   InString$ = string to search 
+'   Separater$ = string of Separater
+'
+' Output:
+'   FNStrSpn = index into InString$ if 0 then all character in Separater$ 
+'              are in InString$
+' Uses:
+'  LenInString, LenSeprater = length parameter strings
+'  ChTemp$ = temp used for current character from InString$
+'  StartFound = Logical flag if search was successful
+'  IndexSeparater, IndexInString = current indices into parameter strings
+'
+Def FNStrSpn(InString$, Separater$)
+
+	LenInString = Len(InString$)
+	LenSeparater = Len(Separater$)
+	' Examine each character from InString$ to see if it is in Separater$
+	for IndexInString = 1 to LenInString
+		ChTemp$ = Mid$(InString$, IndexInString, 1)
+		StartFound = false
+		' search all of the Separaters to see of any equal this character
+		for IndexSeparater = 1 to LenSeparater
+			if (ChTemp$ = Mid$(Separater$, IndexSeparater, 1)) then _
+			goto NextChar
+		next IndexSeparater
+		' found a character not equal to one of the Separaters$
+		' exit from loops
+		StartFound = true
+		goto EndStrSpn
+NextChar:
+	Next IndexInString
+EndStrSpn:
+	if (StartFound) then _
+		FNStrSpn = IndexInString _
+	else FnStrSpn = 0 
+
+End Def
+
+'
+' FNStrBrk - finds the first occurance of any character in string2$ in
+'            string1$
+' Description:
+' This routine is the opposite to FNStrSpn. It finds the first occurance
+' of one of the characters from String2$ within String$. It is used
+' generally for search from specific strings within strings. See FNSeparater
+' on use. See FNGetToken$ to see the routines in use.
+'
+' Input:
+'   string1$ = string to search for first occurance
+'   string2$ = string of characters to search for
+' Output:
+'   FNStrBrk = index to character in string1$ of first occurance
+'
+' Uses:
+'  LenString1 = length parameter string
+'  ChTemp$ = temp used for current character from String1$
+'  IndexString1 = current indices into parameter string
+'
+Def FNStrBrk(String1$, String2$)
+
+	LenString1 = Len(String1$)
+	' Search String1$ until one of the characters from String2$ is found
+	' or run out of characters from String$2
+	for IndexString1 = 1 to LenString1
+		ChTemp$ = Mid$(String1$, IndexString1, 1)
+		if (instr(String2$, ChTemp$)) then _
+			StartFound = true: _
+			FNStrBrk = IndexString1: _
+			Exit Def
+	Next IndexString1
+	FnStrBrk = 0
+
+End Def
+'
+' FNGetToken$ - Extract a token for a string.
+' Description:
+' This routine extracts tokens from strings. A token is a word that is 
+' surrounded by separaters, such as spaces or commas. It is usually the
+' word of interest and examining sentences or commands. If the string
+' to search for tokens "Search$" is null (.i.e "") then the last
+' non-null string passed will be used. The allows for multiple calls
+' to FNGetToken$ to move through the string. EG: the sequences of calls
+'  would be:
+'    token$ = FNGetToken$("token string, a short one", " ,")
+'    while (token$ <> "")
+'       print token$
+'       token$ = FNGetToken$("", " ,")
+'    wend
+' This will return "token", "string", "a", "short", "one" 
+'
+' Note that the token is returned as an Uppercase character string.
+'
+' Input:
+'  Search$ = string to search
+'  InSeps$  = String of Seps$
+' Output:
+'  FNGetToken$ = next token
+' Uses:
+'  TokenString$ = last non-null string passed as parameter (do not modify)
+'  TokenIndex2 = index to last separater (do not modify)
+'  TokenIndex1 = index to last token
+'
+def FNGetToken$(Search$, InSeps$)
+
+
+	' Null strings indicate use of last string used
+	' TokenString$ is set to last string if Search$ is not null
+	if (Search$ = "") then _
+		Search$ = TokenString$ _
+	else TokenIndex2 = 1: _
+		TokenString$ = Search$
+	' If last separater position is past end of search string then no more
+	' tokens can be in string, since searching is started from this position
+	' Exit with null return in this case
+	if (TokenIndex2 >= len(Search$)) then _
+		FNGetToken$ = "": Exit Def
+	' Section out a token from the search string. This is done by finding the
+	' start of a token then locating it's end by the start of separaters
+	TokenIndex1 = FNStrSpn(mid$(Search$, TokenIndex2, len(Search$)), InSeps$) 
+	' If no more token bump to end of line so we move past current point
+	if (TokenIndex1 = 0) then _
+		TokenIndex1 = len(Search$): _
+	else TokenIndex1 = TokenIndex1 + TokenIndex2 - 1
+	TokenIndex2 = FNStrBrk(mid$(Search$, TokenIndex1, len(Search$)), InSeps$) 
+	' If separater position (end of token) came back zero the token must be
+	' up against end of string. Set the separater position one past string
+	' length so that size of token computation is correct and next call
+	' with same string will return null for no more tokens
+	if (TokenIndex2 = 0) then _
+		TokenIndex2 = len(Search$) + 1 _
+	else TokenIndex2 = TokenIndex1 + TokenIndex2 - 1
+	' Cut out token from search string and convert to uppercase. 
+	' It is converted to uppercase since string compares are case sensitive
+	FNGetToken$ = FNToUpper$(mid$(Search$,TokenIndex1,TokenIndex2 - TokenIndex1))
+end def
+
+'
+' FNIsNumber - Checks to see if character a number or alpha
+' Description:
+'  This routine returns true if character passed is in the range 0 - 9
+'  It returns false if not. It is used to tell wither a token is
+'  a number or alpha.
+' Input:
+'  Char - character to check
+' Output:
+'  FNIsNumber - true if within 0 - 9
+'
+def FNIsNumber(Char$)
+
+	if (Char$ = "") then _
+		FNIsNumber = false: _
+	else CharAsc = asc(Char$): _
+		FNIsNumber = ((CharAsc >= asc("0")) and (CharAsc <= asc("9")))
+
+end def
+
+' 
+' GetFileNames - Parses the input and output file names from command$
+' Description:
+'	This routine retrieves the input and output file names. These should
+'  be separated by a comma with the input file name coming first.
+' Input:
+'  Command$ - Command line
+'  true, false - logical flags
+' Output:
+'	Console - flag if no output file
+'  InputFile$, OutputFile$ - Input/Output file name
+' 
+sub GetFileNames static
+shared Console, InputFile$, OutputFile$, Seps$, true, false
+
+	Console = false
+	if (Command$ = "") then
+		print " Microsoft RemLine: Line Number Removal Utility"
+		print " "
+		Input "    Input Filename (return to terminate)";InputFile$
+		If inputfile$ = "" Then Exit Sub
+		Input "    Output Filename (default is console:)";OutputFile$
+		if (OutputFile$ = "") then Console = true
+		CLS
+	    ELSE
+		InputFile$ = FNGetToken$(Command$, Seps$)
+		OutputFile$ = FNGetToken$("", Seps$)
+		if (OutputFile$ = "") then Console = true
+	END IF
+
+ExitGet:
+end sub
+	
+' 
+' BuildTable - Build a table of line numbers that are references
+' Description:
+'  This routine examines all of the text file looking for line numbers
+'  that are the object of goto, gosub etc. As each is found it is entered
+'  into a table of these line numbers. This table is used during a second
+'  pass at the source to remove all line numbers not in this list
+' Input:
+'  KeyWordTable$ - array of keywords that have line number following them
+'  KeyWordCount - number of entries in KeyWordTable$
+'  Seps$ - current token Seps$
+'  true, false - true, false flags
+' Output:
+'  LineTable! - table of referenced line numbers
+'  LineCount - number of lines in LineTable!
+' 
+sub BuildTable	static
+shared KeyWordCount, Seps$, LineCount, false, true
+
+	WHILE NOT EOF( 1 ) 
+		LINE INPUT #1, inlin$ 
+		token$ = FNGetToken$(inlin$, Seps$)
+		WHILE (token$ <> "")
+			for KeyIndex = 0 to KeyWordCount
+				if (KeyWordTable$(KeyIndex) <> token$) then  goto KeyNotFound
+				token$ = FNGetToken$("", Seps$)
+				' loop through looking for multiple lines in the case 
+				' of a computed gosub or goto. A non-numeric will terminate
+				' search (another keyword etc.)
+				while (FNIsNumber(Left$(token$,1)))
+					LineCount = LineCount + 1
+					LineTable!(LineCount) = val(token$)
+					token$ = FNGetToken$("", Seps$)
+					if token$ <> "" then KeyIndex = 0
+				wend 
+KeyNotFound:
+			next KeyIndex
+KeyFound:
+			token$ = FNGetToken$("", Seps$)
+		WEND
+	WEND
+
+end Sub
+
+' 
+' GenOutFile - Generate output file
+' Description:
+'  This routine generates the output file removing the unreferenced line
+'  numbers. 
+' Input:
+'  LineTable! - Table of line numbers that are referenced
+'  LineCount - number of entries in LineTable!
+'  Seps$ - Separaters used between keywords
+'   Console - flags if output to file 
+'  false, true - logical flags
+'
+
+sub GenOutFile static
+shared false, true, Seps$, LineCount, Console
+
+	WHILE NOT EOF( 1 ) 
+		LINE INPUT #1, inlin$ 
+		if (inlin$ = "") then goto NoLine
+		token$ = FNGetToken$(inlin$, Seps$)
+		if (not FNIsNumber(Left$(token$,1))) then goto NoLine
+		Linenumber! = VAL(token$)
+		FoundNumber = false
+		for index = 1 to LineCount
+			if (Linenumber! = LineTable!(index)) then _
+				FoundNumber = true
+		next index
+		if (not FoundNumber) then _
+			mid$(inlin$,FNStrSpn(inlin$,Seps$),len(token$)) = space$(len(token$))
+NoLine:
+		if (Console) then _
+			PRINT inlin$ _
+		else Print #2, inlin$
+WEND 
+end sub 
+' 
+'  initialize the system 
+' 
+SUB initsys STATIC
+SHARED true, false, KeyWordCount, Seps$, KeyWordTable$()
+
+	Seps$ = " ,:	": true = -1: false = 0 
+	RESTORE keydata       'keywords 
+	' Initialize the keyword table. Keywords are recognized so that 
+	' the difference between a line number and a numeric contstant can
+	' be determined
+	KeyWordCount = 0 
+	READ KeyWord$ 
+	WHILE KeyWord$ <> "" 
+		KeyWordCount = KeyWordCount + 1 
+		KeyWordTable$( KeyWordCount ) = KeyWord$ 
+		READ KeyWord$ 
+	WEND 
+END SUB 
+
+'  keyword search data 
+
+keydata:
+	DATA THEN, ELSE, GOSUB, GOTO, RESUME, RETURN, RESTORE, RUN, "" 
+
+main:
+	CALL initsys 
+	CALL GetFileNames
+	if (InputFile$ = "") goto ExitMain
+	OPEN InputFile$ FOR INPUT AS 1 
+	call BuildTable
+	CLOSE #1 
+	OPEN InputFile$ FOR INPUT AS 1 
+	if (not Console) then _
+		OPEN OutputFile$ FOR OUTPUT AS 2
+	call GenOutFile
+	CLOSE #1 
+	ExitMain:
+end
+
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/SIEVE.BAS b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/SIEVE.BAS
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee54d72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/SIEVE.BAS	
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+1 SIZE% = 8190
+2 DIM FLAGS%(8191)
+3 PRINT "10 iterations"
+4 FOR X% = 1 TO 10
+5 COUNT% = 0
+6 FOR I% = 0 TO SIZE%
+7 FLAGS%(I%) = 1
+8 NEXT I%
+9 FOR I% = 0 TO SIZE%
+10 IF FLAGS%(I%) = 0 THEN 18
+11 PRIME% = I% + I% + 3
+12 K% = I% + PRIME%
+13 IF K% > SIZE% THEN 17
+14 FLAGS%(K%) = 0
+15 K% = K% + PRIME%
+16 GOTO 13
+17 COUNT% = COUNT% + 1
+18 NEXT I%
+19 NEXT X%
+20 PRINT COUNT%," PRIMES"
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/SMALLERR.OBJ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/SMALLERR.OBJ
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..822eab0
Binary files /dev/null and b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/SMALLERR.OBJ differ
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/SQUARE.BAS b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/SQUARE.BAS
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3ffd632
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/SQUARE.BAS	
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+defint a-z
+sub square(starta) static
+for x = starta to (starta+5)
+    for y = (starta) to (starta+5)
+        locate x,y:print "*"
+    next y
+next x
+end sub
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/TRIANGLE.BAS b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/TRIANGLE.BAS
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..646018b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/TRIANGLE.BAS	
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+defint a-z
+
+sub tri (startd) static
+startrow=10:startcol=startd
+for row = 0 to 10
+    locate startrow+row,startcol-row
+    for x = startcol - row to startcol+row
+        locate startrow+row,x
+        print "*"
+    next x
+next row
+end sub
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/TTT.BAS b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/TTT.BAS
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f2ae254
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/TTT.BAS	
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+1  REM Tic Tac Toe solving app that learns what WOPR learned: you can't win
+2  REM Only three starting positions are examined. Others are just reflections of these
+3  REM b%   -- The board
+4  REM al%  -- Alpha, for pruning
+5  REM be%  -- Beta, for pruning
+6  REM l%   -- Top-level loop iteration
+7  REM wi%  -- The winning piece (0 none, 1 X, 2, O )
+8  REM re%  -- Resulting score of 4000/minmax board position. 5 draw, 6 X win, 4 Y win
+9  REM sx%  -- Stack array for "recursion" X can be P, V, A, or B for those variables.
+10 REM v%   -- Value of a board position
+11 REM st%  -- Stack Pointer. Even for alpha/beta pruning Minimize plys, Odd for Maximize
+12 REM p%   -- Current position where a new piece is played
+14 REM rw%  -- Row in the Winner function (2000)
+15 REM cw%  -- Column in the Winner function (2000)
+18 REM mc%  -- Move count total for debugging. Should be a multiple of 6493
+19 REM Note: Can't use real recursion with GOSUB because stack is limited to roughly 5 deep
+20 REM       BASIC doesn't support goto/gosub using arrays for target line numbers
+23 li% = val( command$ )
+24 if 0 = li% then li% = 1
+30 DIM b%(9)
+32 DIM sp%(10)
+34 DIM sv%(10)
+36 DIM sa%(10)
+37 DIM sb%(10)
+38 mc% = 0
+39 PRINT "start time: "; TIME$
+40 FOR l% = 1 TO li%
+41 mc% = 0
+42 al% = 2
+43 be% = 9
+44 b%(0) = 1
+45 GOSUB 4000
+58 al% = 2
+59 be% = 9
+60 b%(0) = 0
+61 b%(1) = 1
+62 GOSUB 4000
+68 al% = 2
+69 be% = 9
+70 b%(1) = 0
+71 b%(4) = 1
+72 GOSUB 4000
+73 b%(4) = 0
+74 REM print "mc: "; mc%; "  l is "; l%
+80 NEXT l%
+82 REM print elap$
+83 PRINT "end time: "; TIME$
+84 print "iterations: "; li%
+85 PRINT "final move count "; mc%
+88 SYSTEM
+100 END
+
+2000 wi% = b%(0)
+2010 IF 0 = wi% GOTO 2100
+2020 IF wi% = b%(1) AND wi% = b%(2) THEN RETURN
+2030 IF wi% = b%(3) AND wi% = b%(6) THEN RETURN
+2100 wi% = b%(3)
+2110 IF 0 = wi% GOTO 2200
+2120 IF wi% = b%(4) AND wi% = b%(5) THEN RETURN
+2200 wi% = b%(6)
+2210 IF 0 = wi% GOTO 2300
+2220 IF wi% = b%(7) AND wi% = b%(8) THEN RETURN
+2300 wi% = b%(1)
+2310 IF 0 = wi% GOTO 2400
+2320 IF wi% = b%(4) AND wi% = b%(7) THEN RETURN
+2400 wi% = b%(2)
+2410 IF 0 = wi% GOTO 2500
+2420 IF wi% = b%(5) AND wi% = b%(8) THEN RETURN
+2500 wi% = b%(4)
+2510 IF 0 = wi% THEN RETURN
+2520 IF wi% = b%(0) AND wi% = b%(8) THEN RETURN
+2530 IF wi% = b%(2) AND wi% = b%(6) THEN RETURN
+2540 wi% = 0
+2550 RETURN
+
+4000 REM minmax function to find score of a board position
+4010 REM recursion is simulated with gotos
+4030 st% = 0
+4040 v% = 0
+4060 re% = 0
+4100 mc% = mc% + 1
+4102 REM gosub 3000
+4104 IF st% < 4 THEN GOTO 4150
+4105 GOSUB 2000
+4106 IF 0 = wi% THEN GOTO 4140
+4110 IF wi% = 1 THEN re% = 6: GOTO 4280
+4115 re% = 4
+4116 GOTO 4280
+4140 IF st% = 8 THEN re% = 5: GOTO 4280
+4150 IF st% AND 1 THEN v% = 2 ELSE v% = 9
+4160 p% = 0
+4180 IF 0 <> b%(p%) THEN GOTO 4500
+4200 IF st% AND 1 THEN b%(p%) = 1 ELSE b%(p%) = 2
+4210 sp%(st%) = p%
+4230 sv%(st%) = v%
+4245 sa%(st%) = al%
+4246 sb%(st%) = be%
+4260 st% = st% + 1
+4270 GOTO 4100
+4280 st% = st% - 1
+4290 p% = sp%(st%)
+4310 v% = sv%(st%)
+4325 al% = sa%(st%)
+4326 be% = sb%(st%)
+4328 b%(p%) = 0
+4330 IF st% AND 1 THEN GOTO 4340
+4331 IF re% = 4 THEN GOTO 4530
+4332 IF re% < v% THEN v% = re%
+4334 IF v% < be% THEN be% = v%
+4336 IF be% <= al% THEN GOTO 4520
+4338 GOTO 4500
+4340 IF re% = 6 THEN GOTO 4530
+4341 IF re% > v% THEN v% = re%
+4342 IF v% > al% THEN al% = v%
+4344 IF al% >= be% THEN GOTO 4520
+4500 p% = p% + 1
+4505 IF p% < 9 THEN GOTO 4180
+4520 re% = v%
+4530 IF st% = 0 THEN RETURN
+4540 GOTO 4280
+
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/UPDATE.DOC b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/UPDATE.DOC
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e4144ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/UPDATE.DOC	
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+			"UPDATE.DOC" File
+	 Update Notes for the MICROSOFT(R) QuickBASIC Compiler
+	       	Version 3.0 for IBM(R) Personal Computers
+			 and Compatibles
+
+	     (C) Copyright Microsoft Corporation, 1987
+
+
+This file contains a list of corrections made to Microsoft(R) QuickBASIC
+since the last release.	 See the README.DOC file for corrections to the
+manual and enhancements made to the product.  These enhancements include
+error listing capability and IBM(R) Advanced 101-Key keyboard support.
+
+(1)  With an IBM CGA card, and your display in screen mode 0, the active
+     page parameter now works as it does in IBM BASICA and as it did in
+     QuickBASIC 1.x.  That is, more than one active page is allowed.
+
+(2)  With an IBM EGA card, the active page is now reset correctly upon return
+     to the user interface after program execution.
+
+(3)  In the user interface, inserting a word deleted from the end of a line no
+     longer inserts two spaces following the word.
+
+(4)  Palettes are no longer reversed on a CGA display in screen mode 1.
+
+(5)  A program that accesses a user-library routine containing a RESUME NEXT
+     no longer locks up the system.
+
+(6)  Compiling a program from the command line no longer locks up the system
+     if the disk is full.
+
+(7)  Variables passed to user-library routines no longer produce spurious
+     "String space corrupt" or "Out of data" errors, nor do they generate
+     incorrect values.
+
+(8)  The interaction between CHAIN, SHELL, and the DEBUG and .EXE options no
+     longer causes problems.
+
+(9)  Passing strings in COMMON that were defined in a FIELD statement no longer
+     causes a problem.
+
+(10) High-intensity colors are now options for the foreground color in the
+     View menu's Options... dialog box.
+
+(11) If an invalid CIRCLE statement was followed by a valid CIRCLE statement,
+     sometimes both the valid and invalid statements generated
+     "Illegal function call" errors.  This has been corrected.
+
+(12) The compiler no longer has problems optimizing code written without
+     line numbers and compiled without the DEBUG option.
+
+(13) A problem with function-key assignments giving spurious "String space
+     corrupt" and "String heap corrupt" errors has been corrected.
+
+(14) If a loop contained a SHELL statement followed by an LPRINT statement,
+     the LPRINT would sometimes fail after multiple iterations.	 This has
+     been corrected.
+
+(15) The PAINT statement no longer has problems painting figures in EGA
+     screen modes 7-10 when there is a gap of less than eight pixels between
+     figures and painting begins on a byte boundary.
+
+(16) The BSAVE statement now returns the proper error message if there is
+     no space on the disk.
+
+(17) The STOP statement has been corrected to set the error stack level
+     properly.
+
+(18) The color of the screen is now restored properly after a COLOR statement.
+
+(19) The LOCATE statement now properly handles the cursor.
+
+(20) Variables from a QuickBASIC program compiled with the BRUN20 library
+     are now accessed properly after a CHAIN statement transfers control
+     to an assembly-language program.
+
+(21) The SCREEN statement has been corrected so that the order of COLOR and
+     SCREEN statements no longer makes a difference.
+
+(22) An error could occur when a program containing an ON...GOSUB statement
+     was compiled with the /w (event handling) option.	This has been corrected.
+
+(23) The INKEY$ statement now works properly after an error routine traps an
+     attempt to open a nonexistent file with the OPEN statement.
+
+(24) After a character is printed in column 80 followed by a semi-colon, CSRLIN
+     now returns the next line, as it does in IBM BASICA.
+
+(25) Memory is no longer lost when the CHAIN statement runs multiple programs.
+
+(26) Calling a user-defined function (DEF FN) within an OPEN statement no
+     longer causes an error.
+
+(27) Using the compiler's /w option and the EXIT statement within a batch
+     file no longer causes a problem when the batch file is run.
+
+(28) Integer division with a denominator of zero no longer locks up the system.
+
+(29) Several memory-management problems -- including string-space manipulation,
+     which in turn led to errors ranging from "String space corrupt" to a
+     system lock up -- have been corrected.
+
+(30) The combination of the SOUND statement with an OPEN statement that
+     accesses the "SCRN:" device now works properly.
+
+(31) Floating-point subtraction performed between two SOUND statements no
+     longer causes an "Illegal function call" error on the second SOUND
+     statement.
+
+(32) A problem with the the substring form of the PLAY statement has been
+     corrected.
+
+(33) Typing CTRL-PRTSC in response to an INPUT statement no longer results
+     in all characters typed being printed twice on the printer.
+
+(34) Using a null string for a file name in an OPEN statement now gives the
+     same error message whether the file is opened for input or output.
+
+(35) The VIEW PRINT and CLS statements now work properly together.
+
+(36) KEY(<n>) ON and ON KEY(<n>) GOSUB <line> statements can now be in the
+     same FOR...NEXT loop and work properly
+
+(37) A machine lock up could occur on an 80286 machine if a COMMON block had
+     a single-precision variable as its first argument, the next statement
+     modified the variable (as in "b=b+1"), and the program was compiled with
+     the /O switch.  This problem has been corrected.
+
+(38) When the Compile... screen was displayed, pressing the right direction
+     key, the spacebar, and the ENTER key in the Program box (in that order)
+     would result in an "Invalid file specification" error.  This error could
+     not be corrected except by completely retyping the file name.  This has
+     been corrected so that the cursor is placed at the end of the name,
+     allowing use of the BACKSPACE key to correct the input error.
+
+(39) The PPRINT utility now handles the metacommand SKIP[ :n] correctly.
+
+(40) The PPRINT utility now works properly with line lengths greater than
+     80 characers when output is directed to LPT1:.
+
+(41) The editor could lock up if a CUT/COPY operation was attempted when
+     the mouse was used to select text and the area marked for selection
+     extended beyond the last line of code.  This has been corrected.
+
+(42) An "Input past end" error could occur when using BLOAD to retrieve a file
+     that contained a 1A hex character (Control-Z).  This has been corrected.
+
+(43) QuickBASIC can now correctly handle user libraries larger than 64K.
+
+(44) A DRAW statement containing a string expression and a very complex drawing
+     string could generate an "Out of memory" error.  This has been corrected.
+
+(45) A directory specified in a $INCLUDE statement could not contain an
+     extension.	 This has been corrected.
+
+(46) Addressing an array element using an invalid subscript, even with the
+     Debug (/d) option set, could produce spurious or misleading error
+     messages.	This has been corrected.
+
+(47) The program INT86.ASM has been corrected to work with VARPTR.
+
+(48) If the WRITE# statement is used to store characters in a random-file
+     buffer (a variable defined in a FIELD statement), QuickBASIC now pads
+     the record with blanks, as stated in the entry for the "PUT Statement
+     (File I/O)" in the QuickBASIC reference manual.
+
+(49) Local variables in a user library are no longer preserved across a CHAIN,
+     and no longer result in a "String space corrupt" error.
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/l.bat b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/l.bat
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e4a060
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/l.bat	
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+rem compile to .obj in the app then link like this:
+
+ntvdm -c link %1,,%1,.\,nul.def
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/info.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/info.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6aa504c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/info.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD>
+<TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Information</TITLE>
+</HEAD>
+<BODY>
+<PRE>  Title: QuickBASIC 3.0
+Credits:       The QuickBASIC 3.0 database, Copyright (C) 1987 by
+            Peter Norton Computing, Inc., was written by Craig Stinson,
+            Burt Alperson, Brad Kingsbury, John Socha, and Peter Norton.
+         
+         
+</PRE>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/menu.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/menu.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f34270d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/menu.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Menu</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<OL>
+<H2><LI>BASIC</LI></H2><P>
+<OL>
+<H3><LI><A HREF="ng320.html">Language</H3></A></LI><P>
+<H3><LI><A HREF="ng34ce6.html">Operators</H3></A></LI><P>
+<H3><LI><A HREF="ng38448.html">Data Types</H3></A></LI><P>
+<H3><LI><A HREF="ng386bd.html">Switches and Options</H3></A></LI><P>
+<H3><LI><A HREF="ng3943b.html">Type Conversions</H3></A></LI><P>
+<H3><LI><A HREF="ng39706.html">Reserved Words</H3></A></LI><P>
+<H3><LI><A HREF="ng39d55.html">Runtime Errors</H3></A></LI><P>
+</OL>
+<H2><LI>Tables</LI></H2><P>
+<OL>
+<H3><LI><A HREF="ng3a3de.html">ASCII Chart</H3></A></LI><P>
+<H3><LI><A HREF="ng3b7e3.html">Line-Drawing Chars</H3></A></LI><P>
+<H3><LI><A HREF="ng3bb15.html">Special Characters</H3></A></LI><P>
+<H3><LI><A HREF="ng3c223.html">Color Chart</H3></A></LI><P>
+<H3><LI><A HREF="ng3c7f0.html">Keyboard Codes</H3></A></LI><P>
+<H3><LI><A HREF="ng3f0fb.html">Credits</H3></A></LI><P>
+</OL>
+</OL>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng101c4.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng101c4.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..813abf4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng101c4.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngff2b.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng10367.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ERDEV                    Critical Error Code</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>ERDEV</B>
+
+    Returns the error status of a device error.  The low-order byte will
+    contain the INT 24h error code.  The high-order byte will contain the
+    bits 15, 14, 13, 3, 2, 1, and 0 of the device attribute word.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    ERDEV is a read-only variable.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng10367.html">ERDEV$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng10367.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng10367.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a5d2d62
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng10367.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng101c4.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng10563.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ERDEV$                   Device Causing Critical Error</B>
+
+ <U>s$</U> = <B>ERDEV$</B>
+
+    Returns the name of the device that has caused an INT 24h (critical
+    error).
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the device is a character device, ERDEV$ returns the
+                eight-bit device name. If the device is a block device,
+                ERDEV$ returns a two-character string consisting of the
+                drive letter and a colon.
+
+                ERDEV$ is a read-only variable.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng101c4.html">ERDEV</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng10563.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng10563.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe3cee1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng10563.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng10367.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng107b9.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ERL                      Line Number of Most Recent Error</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>ERL</B>
+
+    Returns the program line number at which the most recent error
+    occurred.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If an error occurs on an unnumbered program line, then ERL
+                returns the last line number before the program line that
+                caused the error.  If no line numbers are used at all, ERL
+                returns 0.
+
+                If the error occurs in an unnumbered program line, ERL
+                returns the last line number before the label.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng107b9.html">ERR</A>
+<A HREF="ng108e8.html">ERROR</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ded6.html">ON ERROR</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b195.html">RESUME</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng107b9.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng107b9.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..42dcc2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng107b9.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng10563.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng108e8.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ERR                      Error Number</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>ERR</B>
+
+    Returns the error number of the most recent runtime error.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If no error has occurred, ERR returns 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng10563.html">ERL</A>
+<A HREF="ng108e8.html">ERROR</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ded6.html">ON ERROR</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b195.html">RESUME</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng108e8.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng108e8.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ae70c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng108e8.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng107b9.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng10c5d.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ERROR                    Force Error</B>
+
+<B>ERROR</B> <U>n</U>
+
+    Produces error number <U>n</U>.
+
+           <U>n</U>    An integer expression in the range 0 to 255.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If <U>n</U> is not one of BASIC's standard error numbers, and no
+                ON ERROR routine is in use, ERROR <U>n</U> stops program
+                execution and produces an "Unprintable error" error
+                message.
+
+                If an ON ERROR routine is in effect, an ERROR <U>n</U> statement
+                is trapped in the normal way, whether or not the number is
+                one of BASIC's error numbers.
+
+                If you are using a nonstandard error number, Microsoft
+                recommends that you use the highest available number, to
+                maintain compatibility with future releases of QuickBASIC.
+
+                This statement is provided as an aid in debugging error-
+                trapping routines.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng10563.html">ERL</A>
+<A HREF="ng107b9.html">ERR</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ded6.html">ON ERROR</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b195.html">RESUME</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng10c5d.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng10c5d.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..21aea84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng10c5d.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng108e8.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng10e75.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>EXIT                     Exit Multiline Function, Loop, or Subprogram</B>
+
+ <B>EXIT</B> {DEF | DO | FOR | SUB}
+
+    Exits a multiline function definition, a DO loop, a FOR loop, or a
+    subprogram.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The construct definition is not ENDed by the EXIT
+                statement. An END statement is still required.
+
+                Premature exit from a nested DO or FOR loop transfers
+                control to the immediately enclosing loop.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngc7f7.html">DEF FN</A>
+<A HREF="nge1c2.html">DO</A>
+<A HREF="ng11abb.html">FOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng2fea2.html">SUB...END SUB</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng10e75.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng10e75.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3cf782d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng10e75.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng10c5d.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1107b.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>EXP                      Exponent (Natural)</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>EXP</B>(<U>numexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns e (the base of natural logarithms) to the power of <U>numexpr</U>.
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>   A numeric expression less than or equal to 88.02969.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If <U>x</U> is a double-precision variable or constant, EXP is
+                calculated in double precision. Otherwise it is calculated
+                in single precision.
+
+                The value of e is approximately 2.718282.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng19695.html">LOG</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1107b.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1107b.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74bf20b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1107b.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng10e75.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng11727.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>FIELD                    Allocate Space for Random File Variables</B>
+
+ <B>FIELD</B> [#]<U>filenum</U>, <U>fieldwidth</U> <B>AS</B> <U>stringvar</U> [,<U>fieldwidth</U> AS <U>stringvar</U>]...
+
+    Allocates storage for any number of string variables, each of
+    specified character width, to be used in conjunction with a specified
+    random file buffer.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which the file was OPENed.
+
+  <U>fieldwidth</U>    The number of character positions to be allotted to
+                <U>stringvar</U>.
+
+   <U>stringvar</U>    A string variable to be used for random access.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    Once the random file has been FIELDed, data may be
+                extracted from the random file buffer after a GET
+                statement or placed into the buffer in preparation for a
+                PUT statement.
+
+                A string variable defined by means of the FIELD statement
+                points to a specified position in the random file buffer.
+                It should not thereafter be used as an INPUT variable or
+                on the left side of an assignment statement. Doing either
+                of these things will point the variable name into the
+                string space and remove it from the file buffer.
+
+                Multiple field definitions for a given random file buffer
+                are permitted. Each new FIELD statement starts again at
+                the first character position of the buffer, and all FIELD
+                statements for a given random file are in effect
+                simultaneously. All FIELD definitions are removed when a
+                file is CLOSEd.
+
+                QuickBASIC resets all FIELDed variables to null when the
+                associated file is CLOSEd or RESET. (In interpreted BASIC,
+                such variables retain their last assigned values.)
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng127c8.html">GET (File I/O)</A>
+<A HREF="ng1b48a.html">LSET</A>
+<A HREF="ng298af.html">PUT (File I/O)</A>
+<A HREF="ng2bce4.html">RSET</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng11727.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng11727.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3671f2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng11727.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1107b.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng119e5.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>FILES                    Display File Directory</B>
+
+<B>FILES</B> [<U>filespec</U>]
+
+    Displays a directory listing, including all filenames, the name of the
+    directory, and the amount of free space.
+
+    <U>filespec</U>    A string expression that follows DOS file naming
+                conventions. Can contain the wild-card characters * and ?.
+                Defaults to *.*.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the <U>filespec</U> argument is omitted, FILES lists all the
+                files in the current directory.
+
+                No matter what the contents of <U>filespec</U>, the output of the
+                FILES statement always includes a header consisting of the
+                full pathname of the current directory.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng119e5.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng119e5.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b4a2d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng119e5.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng11727.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng11abb.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>FIX                      Truncate to Integer</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>FIX</B>(<U>numexpr</U>)
+
+    Truncates, without rounding, any numeric expression to an integer.
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>    A numeric expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng75f2.html">CINT</A>
+<A HREF="ng15fe6.html">INT</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng11abb.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng11abb.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0d22149
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng11abb.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng119e5.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1250d.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>FOR                      Begin Definition of FOR/NEXT Loop</B>
+
+ <B>FOR</B> <U>counter</U> = <U>start</U> <B>TO</B> <U>end</U> [STEP <U>increment</U>]
+ .
+ . [<U>statements</U>]
+ .
+ [EXIT FOR]
+ <B>NEXT</B> [<U>counter</U> [,<U>counter</U>...]]
+
+    Begins the definition of a FOR/NEXT loop.
+
+     <U>counter</U>    A numeric variable to be used as the loop counter. All
+                numeric types are allowed, but the loop executes fastest
+                if <U>counter</U> is an integer variable.
+
+       <U>start</U>    A numeric expression; the starting value of <U>counter</U>.
+
+         <U>end</U>    A numeric expression; the ending value of <U>counter</U>.
+
+   <U>increment</U>    A numeric expression; the value by which <U>counter</U> is
+                incremented or decremented with each iteration of the
+                loop. Defaults to +1.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    BASIC begins processing of the FOR/NEXT block by setting
+                <U>counter</U> equal to <U>start</U>. Then, if <U>increment</U> is positive and
+                <U>counter</U> is not greater than <U>end</U>, the statements between
+                the FOR statement and the NEXT statement are executed.
+                When the NEXT statement is encountered, <U>counter</U> is
+                increased by <U>increment</U>, and the process is repeated.
+                Execution passes to the statement following the NEXT
+                statement if <U>counter</U> is greater than <U>end</U>.
+
+                If <U>increment</U> is negative, execution of the FOR/NEXT loop
+                is terminated whenever <U>counter</U> becomes less than <U>end</U>.
+
+                If <U>increment</U> is 0, execution of the FOR/NEXT loop
+                continues until Ctrl-Break is pressed (unless one of the
+                repeated instructions itself increments <U>counter</U>).
+
+                Note that changes made within the FOR/NEXT loop to <U>counter</U>
+                affect the number of times the loop instructions are
+                executed; changes made to <U>start</U>, <U>end</U>, and <U>increment</U>,
+                however, do not have this effect.
+
+                There must be one and only one NEXT statement for each FOR
+                statement. Inclusion of <U>counter</U> in the NEXT statement is
+                optional; if <U>counter</U> is omitted, its value is assumed to
+                be that of <U>counter</U> in the most recent FOR statement.
+
+                FOR/NEXT loops may be nested within one another. Each FOR
+                must be given a unique <U>counter</U> value and each nested FOR
+                must have its NEXT statement appear within the enclosing
+                FOR-NEXT block.
+
+                Nested loops that have a common termination point may use
+                a single NEXT statement with values of <U>counter</U> matching
+                the values for each FOR statement.
+
+                The loop is skipped completely if <U>start</U> is greater than
+                <U>end</U> and <U>increment</U> is positive, or <U>start</U> is less than <U>end</U>
+                and <U>increment</U> is negative.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="nge1c2.html">DO</A>
+<A HREF="ng1982e.html">LOOP</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ca3c.html">NEXT</A>
+<A HREF="ng33204.html">WEND</A>
+<A HREF="ng335b1.html">WHILE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1250d.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1250d.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f2f0c95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1250d.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng11abb.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng127c8.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>FRE                      Available Memory</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>FRE</B>({<U>strexpr</U> | <U>numexpr</U>})
+
+    Returns the number of bytes available in QuickBASIC's string space;
+    optionally forces a defragmentation of the string space.
+
+     <U>strexpr</U>    A dummy argument; the actual value is inconsequential.
+                FRE(<U>strexpr</U>) causes QuickBASIC to clean house on its
+                string data space, then report the amount of free space
+                available.
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>    A dummy argument. If <U>numexpr</U> = -1, QuickBASIC reports the
+                size in bytes of the largest free LNA (large numeric
+                array) entry. If any other value is used, QuickBASIC omits
+                the housecleaning step and reports the amount of free
+                space available.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng127c8.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng127c8.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..010c09a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng127c8.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1250d.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng12b5a.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>GET                      Read Random File into Buffer                File I/O</B>
+
+ <B>GET</B> [#]<U>filenum</U> [,<U>recnum</U>]
+
+    Transfers a record from a specified random access file into the
+    associated random file buffer.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which the file was OPENed.
+
+      <U>recnum</U>    A numeric expression in the range 1 to 16,777,215,
+                specifying the number of the record to be transferred.
+                Defaults to the next record, or record 1 (if no previous
+                record has been read).
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    After a record has been transferred from disk to the
+                random file buffer, its data may be accessed via INPUT #,
+                LINE INPUT #, or references to variables defined in a
+                FIELD statement.
+
+                If the file associated with <U>filenum</U> is a communications
+                file, then <U>recnum</U> specifies the number of bytes to read.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng20da4.html">OPEN</A>
+<A HREF="ng298af.html">PUT (File I/O)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng12b5a.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng12b5a.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..956127a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng12b5a.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng127c8.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng13094.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>GET                      Read Points from Screen                     Graphics</B>
+
+ <B>GET</B> (<U>x1</U>,<U>y1</U>)-(<U>x2</U>,<U>y2</U>),<U>arrayname</U>
+
+    Copies attributes from a specified rectangle within the screen buffer
+    into a specified array.
+
+       <U>x1</U>,<U>y1</U>    Upper left corner of the rectangle to be copied.
+
+       <U>x2</U>,<U>y2</U>    Lower right corner of the rectangle to be copied.
+
+   <U>arrayname</U>    The name of a numeric array.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    To determine how large the array must be, use the
+                following formula:
+
+                    4+INT(((<U>x2</U>-<U>x1</U>+1)*<U>bitsperpixel</U>+7)/8)*((<U>y2</U>-<U>y1</U>)+1)
+
+                where <U>bitsperpixel</U> relates to screen mode as follows:
+
+                    <U>Mode</U>      <U>Bitsperpixel</U>
+                    SCREEN 1       2
+                    SCREEN 2       1
+                    SCREEN 7       4
+                    SCREEN 8       4
+                    SCREEN 9       2 (EGA memory = 64K)
+                                   4 (EGA memory &gt; 64K)
+                    SCREEN 10      2
+
+                The amount of memory allocated per array element is as
+                follows:
+
+                    Integer:            2 bytes per element
+                    Single-precision:   4 bytes per element
+                    Double-precision:   8 bytes per element
+
+                The first two bytes returned by the GET statement indicate
+                the horizontal dimension of the screen rectangle, in bits;
+                the second two bytes indicate the vertical dimension. The
+                remainder of the data returned by GET are the attributes
+                for each pixel in the rectangle.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng29bbc.html">PUT (Graphics)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng13094.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng13094.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..67d4d0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng13094.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng12b5a.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng13449.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>GOSUB                    Execute Subroutine</B>
+
+ <B>GOSUB</B> {<U>linenum1</U> | <U>linelabel1</U>}
+ .
+ . [<U>statements</U>]
+ .
+ <B>RETURN</B> [{<U>linenum2</U> | <U>linelabel2</U>}]
+
+    Causes program execution to branch to the specified line number or
+    line label; when the RETURN statement is encountered, execution
+    branches to the statement immediately following the most recent GOSUB
+    statement--or to a specified line number or line label.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If RETURN <U>linenumber2</U> or <U>linelabel2</U> is used, the return
+                must be made to a statement in the calling routine--i.e.,
+                the main program or the subroutine from which the current
+                subroutine was called.
+
+                Subroutines may be called any number of times, from any
+                number of different points in a program. They may be
+                nested, and they may have multiple RETURN statements.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngc7f7.html">DEF FN</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b513.html">RETURN</A>
+<A HREF="ng2fea2.html">SUB...END SUB</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng13449.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng13449.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..946b9ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng13449.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng13094.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng135de.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>GOTO                     Unconditional Branch</B>
+
+ <B>GOTO</B> {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>}
+
+    Causes program execution to branch to a specified line.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The target of the GOTO must be at the same program level.
+                That is, you cannot GOTO a subprogram, subroutine, or
+                multiline function definition.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng10c5d.html">EXIT</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng135de.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng135de.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e8c2de5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng135de.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng13449.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng137c6.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>HEX$                     Hexadecimal Value, as String</B>
+
+ <U>s$</U> = <B>HEX$</B>(<U>numexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns, as a string, the hexadecimal value of its argument.
+
+   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>    A numeric expression in the range -32768 to 32767.
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If <U>numexpr</U> is negative, HEX$ returns a two's complement
+                value.
+
+                Any fractional portion of <U>numexpr</U> is rounded before
+                creation of the string.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng1d6a0.html">OCT$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng137c6.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng137c6.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cacac09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng137c6.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng135de.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng13f30.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>IF                       Conditional Branch</B>
+
+ 1. Block syntax
+
+    <B>IF</B> <U>expression</U> <B>THEN</B>
+       <U>statement1</U>
+       [<U>statement2</U>]
+       .
+       .
+       .
+    [ELSEIF <U>expression</U> THEN
+       <U>statement10</U>
+       [<U>statement11</U>]
+       .
+       .
+       .
+    [ELSE
+       <U>statement15</U>
+       [<U>statement16</U>]]
+       .
+       .
+       .
+    <B>ENDIF</B>
+
+
+ 2. Single-line syntax (three variants)
+
+    <B>IF</B> <U>expression</U> <B>THEN</B> <U>statement1</U> [ELSE <U>statement2</U>]
+
+    Causes QuickBASIC to make a decision based on the value of an
+    expression.
+
+  <U>expression</U>    A numeric expression; 0 is equivalent to FALSE, while all
+                other values are equivalent to TRUE.
+
+   <U>statement</U>    Any legal statement.  The single-line mode's statement can
+                be just a line number or line label.  This is equivalent
+                to a GOTO statement with the specified label.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    Each <U>expression</U> in the IF/ELSEIF construct is tested in
+                order.  As soon as an <U>expression</U> is found to be TRUE, then
+                its corresponding statements are executed.  If no
+                expressions are TRUE, then the statements following the
+                ELSE keyword are executed.  If ELSE is not specified, then
+                execution continues with the statement following the ENDIF
+                or the single-line IF statement.
+
+                The only difference between QuickBASIC's one-line
+                construct and that of interpreted BASIC is that QuickBASIC
+                allows the use of labels as well as numbered lines.
+
+                In the block construct, the following rules apply:
+
+                    IF, ELSE, ELSEIF, and ENDIF must all be the first
+                    keywords on their respective lines.
+
+                    THEN must be the last keyword on its line; if anything
+                    other than a comment follows on the same line with
+                    THEN, QuickBASIC thinks it's reading a single-line
+                    IF/THEN/ELSE construct.
+
+                IF blocks may be nested.
+
+                Do not put a colon before the ELSE keyword.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng209fe.html">ON...GOTO</A>
+<A HREF="ng20631.html">ON...GOSUB</A>
+<A HREF="ng2d400.html">SELECT</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng13f30.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng13f30.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..896e17a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng13f30.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng137c6.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng141ee.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>IMP                      Implication Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 IMP exp2</B>
+
+    IMP is a logical operator. BASIC converts each operand to an integer
+    (each operand must yield an integer in the range -32768 to 32767, or
+    else an Overflow error occurs), then performs a bitwise comparison of
+    the results, according to the truth table below:
+
+                     <U>exp1</U><B>  </B><U>exp2</U><B>     </B><U>exp1 IMP exp2</U>
+                       1    1             1
+                       1    0             0
+                       0    1             1
+                       0    0             1
+
+    The result is an integer.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any expression that produces a numeric result. This
+                includes Boolean expressions, where a TRUE result is
+                evaluated as -1 and a FALSE result is evaluated as 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng5198.html">AND</A>
+<A HREF="ngfc6d.html">EQV</A>
+<A HREF="ng1d3c8.html">NOT</A>
+<A HREF="ng2265a.html">OR</A>
+<A HREF="ng34a1f.html">XOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng141ee.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng141ee.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..19801b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng141ee.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng13f30.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng147de.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>INKEY$                   Most Recent Character at Keyboard</B>
+
+<U>s$</U> = <B>INKEY$</B>
+
+    Returns, without echo, the character most recently entered into the
+    keyboard buffer, or a null string if no character is pending.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The system variable INKEY$ must be assigned to an ordinary
+                string variable before it can be used in a BASIC
+                statement.
+
+                If the most recent character is one of the 255 IBM ASCII
+                characters, INKEY$ returns that character only. If the
+                most recent character is a "special" character--a function
+                key or a cursor keypress, for example--INKEY$ returns a
+                two-byte string; the first byte is 00h, and the second
+                byte is the extended code corresponding to the key
+                pressed.
+
+                If a key defined with the KEY statement is pressed, then
+                INKEY$ will return with the sequence of characters mapped
+                to the key as if the characters had been entered
+                independently.
+
+                Cursor control keys, such as TAB and BACKSPACE, will be
+                returned to INKEY$ without processing (in "raw" mode).
+
+                The following keys have special functions and will not be
+                returned through INKEY$:
+
+                    Ctrl-Break          Terminates the program unless the
+                                        Keyboard break option in the
+                                        Options menu was turned off.
+                    Ctrl-Alt-Del        Resets the computer system.
+                    Ctrl-NumLock        Suspends the system.
+                    Shift-PrtScrn       Prints the current screen display.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng148c5.html">INPUT</A>
+<A HREF="ng151dd.html">INPUT #</A>
+<A HREF="ng157f1.html">INPUT$</A>
+<A HREF="ng18196.html">LINE INPUT</A>
+<A HREF="ng18562.html">LINE INPUT #</A>
+<A HREF="ng3c7f0.html">Keyboard Codes</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng147de.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng147de.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d62fc56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng147de.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng141ee.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng148c5.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>INP                      Read from an I/O Port</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>INP</B>(<U>port</U>)
+
+    Returns a byte from a specified I/O port.
+
+        <U>port</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 65535, specifying
+                the port to read.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng22914.html">OUT</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng148c5.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng148c5.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..09aa02b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng148c5.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng147de.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng151dd.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>INPUT                    Get Input from Keyboard</B>
+
+<B>INPUT</B>[;]["<U>prompt</U>" {; | ,}] <U>variable</U> [,<U>variable</U>]...
+
+    Assigns input from the keyboard to one or more string or numeric
+    variables.
+
+           ;    If a semicolon is included directly after the INPUT
+                keyword, QuickBASIC does not issue a carriage return/line
+                feed after receiving the user's input.
+
+      <U>prompt</U>    A string constant supplying a prompt to guide the user.
+
+    <U>variable</U>    The name of a variable (string or numeric) that will
+                receive input.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    A prompt may be included in the INPUT statement to guide
+                the user; if included, it must be a string constant,
+                enclosed within quote marks.
+
+                If a prompt is included, it must be followed by either a
+                semicolon or a comma (outside the quotes, before the first
+                variable name). If it's followed by a semicolon,
+                QuickBASIC displays a question mark after the prompt
+                string. If it's followed by a comma, QuickBASIC suppresses
+                the question mark.
+
+                If no prompt is included, QuickBASIC displays a question
+                mark.
+
+                If more than one variable is included in the INPUT
+                statement, the user must enter values for all variables,
+                separated by commas. If only one variable is included in
+                the INPUT statement, the user has the option of simply
+                pressing the Enter key; QuickBASIC interprets that action
+                as 0 (for numeric variables) or null (for string
+                variables).
+
+                If the user enters too few or too many values in response
+                to an INPUT statement, QuickBASIC displays a ?Redo from
+                Start error message; no values are assigned to variables
+                until satisfactory input is received.
+
+                If the user enters a comma in response to an INPUT
+                statement, BASIC displays a ?Redo from Start error
+                message. You can avoid this irritation by using LINE
+                INPUT, instead of INPUT.
+
+                Input for a string variable need not be enclosed in quote
+                marks. String input that is enclosed within quotes is
+                handled as though it were not (QuickBASIC ignores the
+                quotes).
+
+                Input to a numeric variable must be numeric.
+
+                Editing keystrokes are active during response to INPUT. To
+                receive such keystrokes as part of an input string, use
+                INKEY$.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng141ee.html">INKEY$</A>
+<A HREF="ng151dd.html">INPUT #</A>
+<A HREF="ng157f1.html">INPUT$</A>
+<A HREF="ng18196.html">LINE INPUT</A>
+<A HREF="ng18562.html">LINE INPUT #</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng151dd.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng151dd.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..61003cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng151dd.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng148c5.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng157f1.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>INPUT #                  Get Input from Sequential File or Device</B>
+
+<B>INPUT</B> <B>#</B><U>filenum</U>, <U>variable</U> [,<U>variable</U>]...
+
+    Receives input from a sequential file or device and assigns it to one
+    or more numeric or string variables.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which the input file was OPENed. It may
+                refer to a disk file, a communications file, or the
+                keyboard (KYBD:).
+
+    <U>variable</U>    The name of a variable (string or numeric) that will
+                receive input.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The input data must match in type the variable(s) in the
+                INPUT # statement.
+
+                String input need not be enclosed within quote marks,
+                unless it contains one or more line feeds or carriage
+                returns or a significant quote mark or comma.
+
+                When receiving string input, QuickBASIC looks for the
+                first character other than a space, line feed, or carriage
+                return. If that character is a quote mark, QuickBASIC
+                considers the string to be everything from the character
+                following the quote mark up to the next quote mark. If the
+                first character is not a quote mark, QuickBASIC terminates
+                the string when it encounters a line feed, a carriage
+                return, or a comma--or when it has received 255
+                characters.
+
+                When receiving numeric input, QuickBASIC ignores leading
+                carriage returns, line feeds, and spaces, and it
+                terminates the input when it encounters a carriage return,
+                a line feed, or a comma.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng141ee.html">INKEY$</A>
+<A HREF="ng148c5.html">INPUT</A>
+<A HREF="ng157f1.html">INPUT$</A>
+<A HREF="ng18196.html">LINE INPUT</A>
+<A HREF="ng18562.html">LINE INPUT #</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng157f1.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng157f1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fae9531
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng157f1.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng151dd.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng15bed.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>INPUT$                   Read Specified Number of Characters</B>
+
+ <B>INPUT$</B>(<U>n</U> [,[#]<U>filenum</U>])
+
+    Returns a specified number of characters from a specified sequential
+    file or device, or from the keyboard.
+
+           <U>n</U>    The number of characters to be read. Must be in the range
+                1 to 255.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which the input file was OPENed. If
+                omitted, the characters are read from the standard input
+                device (the keyboard, by default). Characters input from
+                the keyboard are not echoed to the screen.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The INPUT$ function terminates when the specified number
+                of characters have been received. It is not necessary to
+                press Enter.
+
+                INPUT$ doesn't allow the inputting of certain special key
+                combinations (for example, function and cursor keys).
+                These keys will return CHR$(0). Use INKEY$ to get around
+                this limitation.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng141ee.html">INKEY$</A>
+<A HREF="ng148c5.html">INPUT</A>
+<A HREF="ng151dd.html">INPUT #</A>
+<A HREF="ng18196.html">LINE INPUT</A>
+<A HREF="ng18562.html">LINE INPUT #</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng15bed.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng15bed.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1829727
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng15bed.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng157f1.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng15fe6.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>INSTR                    Find Substring</B>
+
+ <B>INSTR</B>([<U>start</U>,] <U>stringexp1</U>,<U>stringexp2</U>)
+
+    Returns the character position within a string at which a substring is
+    found.
+
+  <U>stringexp1</U>    The string to be scanned.
+
+  <U>stringexp2</U>    The substring to be searched for.
+
+       <U>start</U>    A numeric expression in the range 1 to 255; an optional
+                offset from which to start searching.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If <U>start</U> is specified, BASIC begins searching at the
+                character at offset <U>start</U> (The first character in the
+                string is at offset 1). Whether or not <U>start</U> is specified,
+                INSTR returns the position at which <U>stringexp2</U> is found--
+                relative to the first character in the string (not to
+                <U>start</U>).
+
+                If <U>stringexp1</U> is null or if <U>start</U> is greater than
+                LEN(<U>stringexp1</U>), INSTR returns 0.
+
+                If <U>stringexp2</U> is null, then INSTR returns 1 (if <U>start</U> was
+                specified, then INSTR returns <U>start</U>.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng15fe6.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng15fe6.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9398730
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng15fe6.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng15bed.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng161a8.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>INT                      Next Lower Integer</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>INT</B>(<U>numexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns the largest integer value less than its argument.
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>   A numeric expression.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    INT rounds everything down to the next lowest integer.
+                Compare this with CINT, which rounds in the conventional
+                manner, and FIX, which simply truncates.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng75f2.html">CINT</A>
+<A HREF="ng119e5.html">FIX</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng161a8.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng161a8.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..02176be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng161a8.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng15fe6.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng16339.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>IOCTL                    Send Control String to Device Driver</B>
+
+ <B>IOCTL</B>[#]<U>filenum</U>,<U>stringexpr</U>
+
+    Sends a command string of up to 255 characters to a specified device
+    driver.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which the device driver was OPENed.
+
+  <U>stringexpr</U>    A string expression of up to 255 characters; can include
+                multiple commands separated by semicolons.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng16339.html">IOCTL$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng16339.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng16339.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36fc66d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng16339.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng161a8.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng16438.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>IOCTL$                   Read Control String from Device Driver</B>
+
+ <U>s$</U> = <B>IOCTL$</B>([#]<U>filenum</U>)
+
+    Reads a control string from a specified device driver.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which the device driver was OPENed.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng161a8.html">IOCTL</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng16438.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng16438.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..af3129c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng16438.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng16339.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng16dd7.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>KEY                      Set or Display Soft Keys</B>
+
+ <B>KEY</B> {ON | OFF | LIST}
+ <B>KEY</B> <U>n</U>, <U>strexpr</U>
+ <B>KEY</B> <U>n</U>, CHR$(<U>KBflag</U>) + CHR$(<U>scancode</U>)
+
+    Controls the display and contents of the function keys F1 through F10;
+    allows trapping of any scan code in any shift state.
+
+          ON    KEY ON enables the display, on line 25, of current
+                function key settings. Only the first six character
+                assigned to each function key are displayed. If the screen
+                is in an 80-column display mode, all ten function keys are
+                displayed; if it's in a 40-column mode, the first five are
+                displayed. KEY ON is the default setting in BASIC.
+
+         OFF    KEY OFF removes the function key display from line 25,
+                making line 25 available for other purposes. With KEY OFF
+                in effect, a LOCATE 25,<U>n</U> can be used to display other text
+                at the bottom of the screen. Line 25 does not scroll, but
+                it is erased by a CLS statement.
+
+        LIST    KEY LIST displays the current soft key definitions on
+                screen.
+
+  <U>n</U>, <U>strexpr</U>    KEY <U>n</U>, <U>strexpr</U> assigns the string expression <U>strexpr</U> to
+                function key <U>n</U>. <U>n</U> is a numeric expression in the range 1
+                to 10. Only the first 15 characters of <U>strexpr</U> are
+                significant. A null string <U>strexpr</U> deactivates the
+                associated function key.
+
+<U>n</U>, CHR$(<U>KBflag</U>) + CHR$(<U>scancode</U>)
+                The statement KEY <U>n</U>, CHR$(<U>KBflag</U>) + CHR$(<U>scancode</U>) enables
+                your program to trap specified Ctrl keys, Alt keys, and
+                Shifted keys. <U>n</U> is a numeric expression in the range 15 to
+                20 (up to six traps may be in effect at once). <U>KBflag</U>,
+                which must be expressed in hexadecimal, specifies the
+                shift state of the key to be trapped, and scancode
+                specifies which alphanumeric key is to be trapped.
+
+                The following options are available for <U>KBflag</U>:
+
+                    &amp;H40      Caps Lock active
+                    &amp;H20      Num Lock active
+                    &amp;H08      Alt key pressed
+                    &amp;H04      Ctrl key pressed
+                    &amp;H02      Left Shift key pressed
+                    &amp;H01      Right Shift key pressed
+                    &amp;H00      Caps Lock inactive, Num Lock inactive
+
+                These options may be used in additive fashion, to trap
+                combinations of shift states. For example,
+                CHR$(&amp;H08+&amp;H02+&amp;H01) would catch the combination of the
+                Alt key with either (or both) Shift keys.
+
+                Trapped keys do not enter the BIOS keyboard buffer.
+                Therefore, if either Ctrl-Break or Ctrl-Alt-Del is
+                trapped, there will be no way (other than powering down)
+                to break out of an infinite loop.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng16dd7.html">KEY(n)</A>
+<A HREF="ng1e384.html">ON KEY</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng16dd7.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng16dd7.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e527ef8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng16dd7.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng16438.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng17428.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>KEY(n)                   Enable/Disable Key Trapping</B>
+
+ <B>KEY</B>(<U>n</U>) {ON | OFF | STOP}
+
+    Enables or disables the trapping of a specified key via ON KEY(<U>n</U>).
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression in the range 1 to 20, specifying the
+                key to trap, as follows:
+
+                1-10,30,31    Function keys F1 through F10, F11, F12
+                11            Cursor Up
+                12            Cursor Left
+                13            Cursor Right
+                14            Cursor Down
+                15-25         Keys defined via KEY <U>n</U>, CHR$(<U>KBflag</U>) +
+                                                      CHR$(<U>scancode</U>)
+
+          ON    KEY(<U>n</U>) ON activates trapping. If an ON KEY(<U>n</U>) GOSUB
+                statement has been executed, QuickBASIC checks before
+                executing each statement to see if the specified key has
+                been pressed. If it has, QuickBASIC performs the indicated
+                GOSUB.
+
+         OFF    KEY(<U>n</U>) OFF deactivates trapping.
+
+        STOP    KEY(<U>n</U>) STOP also deactivates trapping, but QuickBASIC
+                continues checking to see if the specified key has been
+                pressed. If it has been pressed, a subsequent KEY(<U>n</U>) ON
+                results in an immediate trap (provided an ON KEY(<U>n</U>)
+                statement with a nonzero line number has been executed).
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the "Checking Between Statements" option is in effect,
+                QB checks for communication activity after each statement.
+                If the "Event Trapping" option is selected, QB checks
+                after each new program line. If neither option is
+                selected, no trapping takes place.
+
+                For command-line compilation, /v enables checking after
+                each statement, and /w enables checking after each new
+                line. If neither switch is used, no trapping takes place.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng1e384.html">ON KEY</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng17428.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng17428.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2efce92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng17428.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng16dd7.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng175c1.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>KILL                     Delete File(s)</B>
+
+ <B>KILL</B> <U>filespec</U>
+
+    Deletes one or more files from disk.
+
+    <U>filespec</U>    A string expression that follows DOS file naming
+                conventions.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    Currently open files may not be deleted via KILL.
+
+                This command is equivalent to DOS's DEL (ERASE) command.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2b8f2.html">RMDIR</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng175c1.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng175c1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4a7c1c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng175c1.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng17428.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng17755.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LBOUND                   Lower Bound of Array Dimension</B>
+
+ <B>LBOUND</B>(<U>array</U>[,<U>dimension</U>])
+
+    Returns the lowest subscript for a given dimension of a given array.
+
+       <U>array</U>    The name of an array.
+
+   <U>dimension</U>    The number of a dimension. The first dimension of an array
+                is 1, the second is 2, and so on. For one-dimensional
+                arrays, this argument can be omitted.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng314eb.html">UBOUND</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng17755.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng17755.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..60a2178
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng17755.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng175c1.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng17947.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LEFT$                    Substring at Left</B>
+
+ <U>s$</U> = <B>LEFT$</B>(<U>stringexpr</U>,<U>n</U>)
+
+    Returns the leftmost <U>n</U> characters of a string.
+
+  <U>stringexpr</U>    A string expression.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 32767.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If <U>n</U> is larger than LEN(<U>stringepxr</U>), LEFT$ returns the
+                entire string.
+
+                If <U>n</U> is 0, LEFT$ returns a null string.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng1b754.html">MID$ (Function)</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b724.html">RIGHT$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng17947.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng17947.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c4e589
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng17947.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng17755.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng17a25.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LEN                      Length of String</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>LEN</B>(<U>stringexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns the number of characters in a string, including blanks and
+    nonprinting characters.
+
+  <U>stringexpr</U>    A string expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng17a25.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng17a25.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..758c5ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng17a25.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng17947.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng17bbd.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LET                      Assignment</B>
+
+ [<B>LET</B>] <U>variable</U> = <U>expression</U>
+
+    Assigns the value of an expression to a variable.
+
+    <U>variable</U>    A valid variable name.
+
+  <U>expression</U>    The value assigned to <U>variable</U>. <U>expression</U> and <U>variable</U>
+                must match in type.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The keyword LET is optional.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng17bbd.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng17bbd.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca33804
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng17bbd.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng17a25.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng18196.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LINE                     Draw Line or Box</B>
+
+ <B>LINE</B> [[STEP] (<U>x1</U>,<U>y1</U>)] - [STEP] (<U>x2</U>,<U>y2</U>) [,[<U>color</U>] [,B[F]]] [,<U>style</U>]
+
+    Draws a line or a box at specified coordinates, in a specified color.
+
+        STEP    If included, coordinates are relative to last graphics
+                point referenced. If omitted, coordinates are absolute.
+
+       <U>x1</U>,<U>y1</U>    If ,B option is used, <U>x1</U>,<U>y1</U> and <U>x2</U>,<U>y2</U> are corner
+       <U>x2</U>,<U>y2</U>    coordinates of a rectangular box; otherwise <U>x1</U>,<U>y1</U> and
+                <U>x2</U>,<U>y2</U> are end points of a line.
+
+       <U>color</U>    Specifies color to use . Defaults to 3 in medium
+                resolution, 1 in high resolution.
+
+           B    Tells BASIC to draw a rectangular box instead of a line.
+
+           F    Tells BASIC to fill the box.
+
+       <U>style</U>    Allows you to draw a broken (dashed) line or box (see
+                below).
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If STEP is included with <U>x2</U>,<U>y2</U> but not <U>x1</U>,<U>y1</U>, then <U>x2</U> and
+                <U>y2</U> are measured relative to the absolute coordinate pair
+                (<U>x1</U>,<U>y1</U>).
+
+                QuickBASIC treats <U>style</U> as a 16-bit integer mask, plotting
+                the 1 bits and skipping the 0 bits, and repeating the
+                pattern as many times as necessary to create the specified
+                line. Thus a style value of 43690 (AAAAh,
+                1010101010101010b) would produce an evenly dotted line or
+                box, with every other pixel plotted. Note that QuickBASIC
+                ignores the "off" pixels; it does not plot them in the
+                background color.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng18196.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng18196.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d0e4f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng18196.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng17bbd.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng18562.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LINE INPUT               Read Line from Keyboard, Ignoring Delimiters</B>
+
+ <B>LINE</B> <B>INPUT</B>[;]["<U>prompt</U>";] <U>stringvar</U>
+
+    Assigns a line of keyboard input (up to 255 characters) to a string
+    variable.
+
+           ;    If a semicolon is included directly after the INPUT
+                keyword, QuickBASIC does not issue a carriage return/line
+                feed after receiving the user's input.
+
+      <U>prompt</U>    A string constant supplying a prompt to guide the user.
+
+   <U>stringvar</U>    The name of a string variable that will receive input.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    LINE INPUT does not automatically display a question mark.
+                If you want a question mark, include it within a prompt
+                string.
+
+                Unlike INPUT, LINE INPUT ignores all delimiters.
+                Everything entered at the keyboard, including quote marks
+                and commas, is treated as part of the input string.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng141ee.html">INKEY$</A>
+<A HREF="ng157f1.html">INPUT$</A>
+<A HREF="ng148c5.html">INPUT</A>
+<A HREF="ng151dd.html">INPUT #</A>
+<A HREF="ng18562.html">LINE INPUT #</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng18562.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng18562.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..194d0b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng18562.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng18196.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng18851.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LINE INPUT#              Read Line from File, Ignoring Delimiters</B>
+
+ <B>LINE</B> <B>INPUT</B> <B>#</B> <U>filenum</U>, <U>stringvar</U>
+
+    Assigns a line of input (up to 255 characters) from a sequential file
+    or device to a string variable.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which the file was opened.
+
+   <U>stringvar</U>    The name of a string variable that will receive input.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    LINE INPUT # treats all commas and quote marks as part of
+                the input string. Input is terminated by a carriage
+                return-line feed pair (the carriage return and line feed
+                are included in the string variable assignment).
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng141ee.html">INKEY$</A>
+<A HREF="ng157f1.html">INPUT$</A>
+<A HREF="ng148c5.html">INPUT</A>
+<A HREF="ng151dd.html">INPUT #</A>
+<A HREF="ng18196.html">LINE INPUT</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng18851.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng18851.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..449cd4c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng18851.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng18562.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng18b5e.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LOC                      Current File Position</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>LOC</B>(<U>filenum</U>)
+
+    Returns the record number last read from or written to a specified
+    (open) file.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which the file was OPENed.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    When a sequential file is opened for input, the first
+                sector is automatically read, so LOC(<U>filenum</U>) for a newly
+                opened sequential file returns 1. LOC(<U>filenum</U>) for a
+                sequential file opened for OUTPUT or APPEND returns the
+                current byte position divided by 128.
+
+                If <U>filenum</U> specifies a communications file, LOC returns
+                the number of characters waiting in the communications
+                buffer. If that number is larger than 255, LOC returns
+                255.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng18b5e.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng18b5e.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f4fd005
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng18b5e.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng18851.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1905a.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LOCATE                   Position the Cursor</B>
+
+ <B>LOCATE</B> [<U>row</U>][,[<U>col</U>][,[<U>cursor</U>][,[<U>start</U>][,<U>stop</U>]]]]
+
+    Sets the size and position of the cursor.
+
+         <U>row</U>    A numeric expression in the range 1 to 25. Sets the row
+                position of the cursor.
+
+         <U>col</U>    A numeric expression in the range 1 to 40 or 1 to 80. Sets
+                the column position of the cursor.
+
+      <U>cursor</U>    A numeric expression. If 1, the cursor is visible; if 0,
+                the cursor is invisible.
+
+       <U>start</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 31. Sets the
+                starting scan line for the cursor.
+
+        <U>stop</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 31. Sets the ending
+                scan line for the cursor. If <U>start</U> is specified and <U>stop</U>
+                is not, <U>stop</U> assumes the value of <U>start</U>.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    Cursor scan lines are numbered from 0 (top) to 7 (CGA) or
+                13 (MDA).
+
+                If <U>stop</U> is less than <U>start</U>, a two-part (wraparound) cursor
+                results.
+
+                If the softkey display on line 25 has been turned off (via
+                KEY OFF), you may write to line 25 by means of LOCATE.
+                Line 25 does not scroll in any case.
+
+                Any argument to LOCATE may be omitted. Omitted arguments
+                retain former values.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngb058.html">CSRLIN</A>
+<A HREF="ng264a0.html">POS</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1905a.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1905a.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8627e15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1905a.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng18b5e.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng19504.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LOCK                     Control File or Record Access</B>
+
+ <B>LOCK</B> [#] <U>filenum</U> [,{<U>record</U> | [<U>start</U>] TO <U>end</U>}]
+ .
+ . [<U>statements</U>]
+ .
+ UNLOCK [#] <U>filenum</U> [,{<U>record</U> | [<U>start</U>] TO <U>end</U>}]
+
+    Make a specified record range or an entire file inaccessible to other
+    users.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which the file was OPENed.
+
+      <U>record</U>    The number of a record to be LOCKed or UNLOCKed.
+
+       <U>start</U>    The number of the first record to be LOCKed or UNLOCKed.
+
+         <U>end</U>    The number of the last record to be LOCKed or UNLOCKed.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the file specified by <U>filenum</U> has been opened for
+                random access, you may lock either a single record number
+                (with the record argument) or a range of record numbers.
+                If you specify a range and omit the <U>start</U> argument, all
+                records from the beginning of the file to end are locked.
+
+                If the file specified by <U>filenum</U> was opened for sequential
+                input or output, the entire file is locked.
+
+                LOCK requires DOS 3.0 or later and SHARE.EXE.
+
+                It is important to UNLOCK all LOCKed records before
+                closing the file.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng19504.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng19504.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f7bd6c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng19504.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1905a.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng19695.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LOF                      Length of File</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>LOF</B>(<U>filenum</U>)
+
+    Returns the length, in bytes, of a specified file.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which the file was OPENed.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If <U>filenum</U> specifies a communications file, LOF returns
+                the amount of free space in the communications buffer.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng19695.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng19695.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..acfd98a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng19695.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng19504.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1982e.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LOG                      Natural Logarithm</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>LOG</B>(<U>n</U>)
+
+    Returns the natural logarithm of a number.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression greater than 0.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the argument is a double-precision value, LOG is
+                calculated in double precision; otherwise, it is
+                calculated in single precision.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng10e75.html">EXP</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1982e.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1982e.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..420e1c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1982e.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng19695.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng19c46.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LOOP                     End Definition of DO/LOOP Loop</B>
+
+ 1. <B>DO</B>
+    .
+    . [statements]
+    .
+    .
+    [EXIT DO]
+    <B>LOOP</B> [{WHILE | UNTIL} <U>expression</U>]
+
+2. <B>DO</B> [{WHILE | UNTIL} <U>expression</U>]
+   .
+   . [statements]
+   .
+   .
+   [EXIT DO]
+   <B>LOOP</B>
+
+    Ends the definition of a DO/LOOP loop.
+
+  <U>expression</U>    A numeric expression. Nonzero values are equivalent to
+                TRUE, while zero values are equivalent to FALSE.
+
+       WHILE    Causes execution of the loop as long as <U>expression</U> is
+                TRUE.
+
+       UNTIL    Causes execution of the loop as long as <U>expression</U> is
+                FALSE.
+
+     EXIT DO    An optional means to escape from the loop before its
+                termination.
+
+        LOOP    Terminates the loop construct.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    DO...LOOP is a general-purpose looping construct. The
+                optional termination test may be supplied at either the
+                beginning or the end. If no test is supplied, EXIT DO is
+                the only way to break out of the loop.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="nge1c2.html">DO</A>
+<A HREF="ng11abb.html">FOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ca3c.html">NEXT</A>
+<A HREF="ng33204.html">WEND</A>
+<A HREF="ng335b1.html">WHILE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng19c46.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng19c46.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7d21f39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng19c46.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1982e.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng19d58.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LPOS                     Current Position of Print Head</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>LPOS</B>(<U>n</U>)
+
+    Returns the position of the print head within the printer buffer.
+
+           <U>n</U>    Specifies the printer. The following values are allowed:
+
+                1   LPT1:
+                2   LPT2:
+                3   LPT3:
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng264a0.html">POS</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng19d58.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng19d58.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3422924
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng19d58.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng19c46.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1a3ba.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LPRINT                   Output to LPT1:</B>
+
+ <B>LPRINT</B> [<U>exprlist</U>] [; | ,]
+
+    Prints one or more numeric or string expressions at LPT1:.
+
+    <U>exprlist</U>    Numeric and/or string expressions to print. Each
+                expression must be separated from the one after it by
+                either a comma or a semicolon.
+
+           ;    If included at the end of the statement, suppresses the
+                usual carriage return and line feed.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    LPRINT with no argument sends a carriage return-line feed
+                pair.
+
+                QuickBASIC divides the output field into zones of 14
+                character positions. If an expression is followed by a
+                comma, QuickBASIC prints the next expression at the
+                beginning of the next zone. If an expression is followed
+                by a semicolon or space character, QuickBASIC prints the
+                next expression directly after the previous one.
+
+                If the last expression in the list to be displayed is
+                followed by a comma, a semicolon, SPC, or TAB, QuickBASIC
+                spaces appropriately and suppresses the carriage return-
+                line feed pair. Otherwise, QuickBASIC issues a carriage
+                return and line feed after executing an LPRINT statement.
+
+                QuickBASIC assumes a maximum line length of 80 characters,
+                unless a different value has been specified by means of a
+                WIDTH "LPT1:" statement. QuickBASIC sends a carriage
+                return-line feed pair when the maximum line length has
+                been reached. Therefore, for example, if you LPRINT an 80-
+                character string (and do not follow the string expression
+                with a semicolon), you will get two carriage return-line
+                feed pairs.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2682a.html">PRINT</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1a3ba.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1a3ba.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..98887cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1a3ba.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng19d58.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1b48a.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LPRINT USING             Formatted Output to LPT1:</B>
+
+ <B>LPRINT</B> <B>USING</B> <U>formatstr</U>; <U>exprlist</U> [; | ,]
+
+    Prints one or more string or numeric expressions, in a specified
+    format, at LPT1:.
+
+   <U>formatstr</U>    A string variable or constant specifying the format in
+                which the data is to be printed (see below).
+
+    <U>exprlist</U>    Numeric and/or string expressions to print. Each
+                expression must be separated from the one after it by
+                either a comma or a semicolon.
+
+           ;    If included at the end of the statement, suppresses the
+                usual carriage return and line feed.
+
+    <B>Formatting options:</B>
+
+    The following symbols may be used in <U>formatstr</U>:
+
+      <U>Symbol</U>    <U>Meaning</U>
+
+           !    Print only the first character of a string expression.
+
+        \  \    Print only the first <U>n</U> characters of a string expression,
+                where <U>n</U> is the number of spaces between the two
+                backslashes. If <U>n</U> is larger than the number of characters
+                in the string expression, BASIC pads the string expression
+                on the right with space characters.
+
+           &amp;    Print a string expression without reformatting it.
+
+           .    Specifies the position of the decimal point in a numeric
+                expression.
+           #    A place-holder. If the numeric expression has more digits
+                to the right of the decimal point than the format string
+                has #s, BASIC rounds. If the numeric expression has more
+                digits to the left of the decimal point than the format
+                string has #s, BASIC prints all the digits to the left of
+                the decimal point and also prints a percent sign (%) to
+                the left of the number. If the numeric expression has
+                fewer digits to the left of the decimal point than the
+                format string has #s, BASIC right-justifies the number;
+                that is, it pads the number on the left with spaces. (But
+                if there are any #s to the left of the decimal point in
+                the format string, QuickBASIC always prints at least one
+                digit--a 0 if necessary--to the left of the decimal
+                point.)
+
+           +    Print a plus or minus sign, as appropriate, to the left of
+                the number. The sign is always printed immediately to the
+                left of the number.
+
+           -    Print a minus sign immediately to the right of a negative
+                number (the minus sign should appear after the place
+                holders in the format string).
+
+          $$    Print a dollar sign immediately to the left of the number.
+                The double dollar sign also acts as a place holder for two
+                additional digits to the left of the decimal point, one of
+                which is the dollar sign itself. The dollar sign cannot be
+                prefixed to a number printed in exponential format.
+
+          **    Fill any leading spaces with asterisks. The double
+                asterisk also acts as a place holder for two additional
+                digits to the left of the decimal point.
+
+         **$    Print a dollar sign immediately to the left of the number,
+                and fill any remaining leading spaces with asterisks. The
+                combination of two asterisks and a dollar sign also acts
+                as a place holder for three additional digits, one of
+                which is the dollar sign.
+
+        ^^^^    Print a number in exponential format. The four carets
+                should appear after all place holders in the format
+                string.
+
+           _    Print next character as a literal. The combination _#, for
+                example, allows you to include a number sign as a literal
+                in your numeric format.
+
+     [other]    Characters other than the foregoing may be included as
+                literals in the format string. Thus, for example, a single
+                dollar sign may be positioned to the left of a series of
+                place holders (#s) to achieve vertically aligned dollar
+                signs, and space characters may be placed at the right
+                side of the format string to achieve horizontal separation
+                between a series of numbers.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    QuickBASIC sends a carriage return-line feed pair after
+                the last expression to be printed, unless that expression
+                is followed by a semicolon.
+
+                QuickBASIC assumes a maximum line length of 80 characters,
+                unless a different value has been specified by means of a
+                WIDTH "LPT1:" statement. QuickBASIC sends a carriage
+                return-line feed pair when the maximum line length has
+                been reached.
+
+                Double-precision numbers in IEEE format may have three-
+                digit exponents. To print numbers with three-digit
+                exponents, use five carets instead of four.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1b48a.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1b48a.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..57f9d50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1b48a.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1a3ba.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1b754.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>LSET                     Left-Justify Data in Field Variable</B>
+
+ <B>LSET</B> <U>fieldvar</U> = <U>stringexpr</U>
+
+    Left-justifies string data in a specified field of the random buffer,
+    in preparation for a PUT statement. Or left-justifies string data in
+    an ordinary string variable.
+
+    <U>fieldvar</U>    A valid string variable name; specifies the variable into
+                which <U>stringexpr</U> is to be left-justified.
+
+  <U>stringexpr</U>    A string expression.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If LEN(<U>stringexpr</U>) is less than LEN(<U>fieldvar</U>), <U>fieldvar</U> is
+                padded on the right with space characters.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng1bf7e.html">MKD$</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c304.html">MKI$</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c42b.html">MKS$</A>
+<A HREF="ng298af.html">PUT (File I/O)</A>
+<A HREF="ng2bce4.html">RSET</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1b754.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1b754.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b8d140a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1b754.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1b48a.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ba73.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>MID$                     Substring in Middle                         Function</B>
+
+<U>s$</U> = <B>MID$</B>(<U>stringexpr</U>,<U>n</U>[,<U>length</U>])
+
+    Returns a specified number of characters from a specified string,
+    beginning at a specified character position.
+
+  <U>stringexpr</U>    A string expression.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression in the range 1 to 32767;, specifies
+                the character position from which the substring is to be
+                extracted.
+
+      <U>length</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 32767; specifies
+                the number of characters to return.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If length is omitted, MID$ returns all the characters in
+                the string beginning at character <U>n</U>.
+
+                MID$ may also be used as a statement.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng17755.html">LEFT$</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ba73.html">MID$ (Statement)</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b724.html">RIGHT$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1ba73.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1ba73.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..49fa39e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1ba73.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1b754.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1bf7e.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>MID$                     Assign Substring                           Statement</B>
+
+<B>MID$(</B><U>stringvar</U>,<U>n</U>[,length]) = <U>stringexpr</U>
+
+    Assigns all or some of a string expression to a string variable,
+    beginning at a specified character position within the string
+    variable.
+
+   <U>stringvar</U>    The string variable whose characters will be replaced.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression in the range 1 to 255, specifying the
+                position within <U>stringvar</U> where the character replacement
+                is to begin.
+
+      length    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 255, specifying the
+                number of characters from <U>stringexpr</U> that will be used. If
+                <U>length</U> is omitted, all of <U>stringexpr</U> is used.
+
+  <U>stringexpr</U>    The string expression supplying replacement characters for
+                <U>stringvar</U>.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    In the syntax shown above, the characters in <U>stringexpr</U>
+                replace length characters in <U>stringvar</U>, beginning at
+                character <U>n</U>.
+
+                In no case will the length of <U>stringvar</U> increase as a
+                result of a MID$ statement. For example, if <U>stringvar</U> is
+                seven characters long, and <U>n</U> is 3 and length is 6, only
+                the first five characters of <U>stringexpr</U> will be assigned
+                to <U>stringvar</U>.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng1b754.html">MID$ (Function)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1bf7e.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1bf7e.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..209ab80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1bf7e.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1ba73.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c0c5.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>MKD$                     Convert Double-Precision to String</B>
+
+ <U>s$</U> = <B>MKD$</B>(<U>doubleexpr</U>)
+
+    Converts a double-precision expression into an 8-byte string, so that
+    it may be LSET or RSET into a random file buffer.
+
+  <U>doubleexpr</U>    A double-precision expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngb1c8.html">CVD</A>
+<A HREF="ngb793.html">CVI</A>
+<A HREF="ngb980.html">CVS</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c304.html">MKI$</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c42b.html">MKS$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c0c5.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c0c5.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..596da98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c0c5.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1bf7e.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c1bb.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>MKDIR                    Create Subdirectory</B>
+
+ <B>MKDIR</B> <U>pathname</U>
+
+    Creates a new subdirectory.
+
+    <U>pathname</U>    A string expression, of 128 or fewer characters, that
+                follows DOS path naming conventions.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng7372.html">CHDIR</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b8f2.html">RMDIR</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c1bb.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c1bb.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4dd11f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c1bb.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1c0c5.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c304.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>MKDMBF$                  IEEE Double-Precision to MBF String        QB87 only</B>
+
+ <B>MKDMBF$</B>(<U>doubleexpr</U>)
+
+    Converts a IEEE-format double-precision expression into an 8-byte
+    Microsoft Binary Format string, so that it may be LSET or RSET into a
+    random file buffer.
+
+  <U>doubleexpr</U>    A double-precision expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c304.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c304.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4c9a498
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c304.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1c1bb.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c42b.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>MKI$                     Convert Integer to String</B>
+
+ <U>s$</U> = <B>MKI$</B>(<U>intexpr</U>)
+
+    Converts an integer expression into a 2-byte string, so that it may be
+    LSET or RSET into a random file buffer.
+
+     <U>intexpr</U>    An integer expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngb1c8.html">CVD</A>
+<A HREF="ngb793.html">CVI</A>
+<A HREF="ngb980.html">CVS</A>
+<A HREF="ng1bf7e.html">MKD$</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c42b.html">MKS$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c42b.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c42b.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ddf48f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c42b.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1c304.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c568.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>MKS$                     Convert Single-Precision to String</B>
+
+ <B>MKS$</B>(<U>singleexpr</U>)
+
+    Converts a single-precision expression into a 4-byte string, so that
+    it may be LSET or RSET into a random file buffer.
+
+  <U>singleexpr</U>    A single-precision expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngb1c8.html">CVD</A>
+<A HREF="ngb793.html">CVI</A>
+<A HREF="ngb980.html">CVS</A>
+<A HREF="ng1bf7e.html">MKD$</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c304.html">MKI$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c568.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c568.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6434104
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c568.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1c42b.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c6b1.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>MKSMBF$                  IEEE Single-Precision to MBF String        QB87 only</B>
+
+ <B>MKDMBF$</B>(<U>singleexpr</U>)
+
+    Converts a IEEE-format double-precision expression into an 8-byte
+    Microsoft Binary Format string, so that it may be LSET or RSET into a
+    random file buffer.
+
+  <U>singleexpr</U>    A single-precision expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c6b1.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c6b1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca419ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c6b1.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1c568.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c816.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>MOD                      Modulo Arithmetic Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 MOD exp2</B>
+
+    The MOD operator performs modulo arithmetic. That is, it performs an
+    integer division on its two operands (see \) and returns the
+    remainder. The result is an integer.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any numeric expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng4642.html">^^</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ac8.html">-</A>
+<A HREF="ng267b.html">*</A>
+<A HREF="ng2d59.html">/</A>
+<A HREF="ng447e.html">\</A>
+<A HREF="ng282a.html">+</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c816.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c816.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db4dd48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1c816.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1c6b1.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ca3c.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>NAME                     Rename File</B>
+
+ <B>NAME</B> <U>oldname</U> <B>AS</B> <U>newname</U>
+
+    Renames a disk file.
+
+     <U>oldname</U>    A string expression following the DOS file-naming
+                conventions. Must name an existing file.
+
+     <U>newname</U>    A string expression following the DOS file-naming
+                conventions. May not name an existing file.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    A file may be moved from one directory to another as a
+                result of NAME, but it may not be moved from one disk to
+                another.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1ca3c.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1ca3c.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c66bbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1ca3c.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1c816.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1d3c8.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>NEXT                     End Definition of FOR/NEXT Loop</B>
+
+ <B>FOR</B> counter = <U>start</U> <B>TO</B> <U>end</U> [STEP <U>increment</U>]
+ .
+ . [<U>statements</U>]
+ .
+ <B>NEXT</B> [<U>counter</U> [,<U>counter</U>...]]
+
+    Terminates the definition of a FOR/NEXT loop.
+
+     <U>counter</U>    A numeric variable to be used as the loop counter. All
+                numeric types are allowed, but the loop executes fastest
+                if counter is an integer variable.
+
+       <U>start</U>    A numeric expression; the starting value of counter.
+
+         <U>end</U>    A numeric expression; the ending value of counter.
+
+   <U>increment</U>    A numeric expression; the value by which counter is
+                incremented or decremented with each iteration of the
+                loop. Defaults to +1.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    BASIC begins processing of the FOR/NEXT block by setting
+                <U>counter</U> equal to start. Then, if <U>increment</U> is positive and
+                <U>counter</U> is less than end, the statements between the FOR
+                statement and the NEXT statement are executed. When the
+                NEXT statement is encountered, <U>counter</U> is increased by
+                <U>increment</U>, and the process is repeated. Execution passes
+                to the statement following the NEXT statement if <U>counter</U>
+                is equal to or greater than end.
+
+                If <U>increment</U> is negative, execution of the FOR/NEXT loop
+                is terminated whenever <U>counter</U> becomes equal to or less
+                than end.
+
+                If <U>increment</U> is 0, execution of the FOR/NEXT loop
+                continues until Ctrl-Break is pressed (unless one of the
+                repeated instructions itself increments <U>counter</U>).
+
+                Note that changes made within the FOR/NEXT loop to <U>counter</U>
+                affect the number of times the loop instructions are
+                executed; changes made to <U>start</U>, <U>end</U>, and <U>increment</U>,
+                however, do not have this effect.
+
+                There must be one and only one NEXT statement for each FOR
+                statement. Inclusion of <U>counter</U> in the NEXT statement is
+                optional; if <U>counter</U> is omitted, its value is assumed to
+                be that of <U>counter</U> in the most recent FOR statement.
+
+                FOR/NEXT loops may be nested within one another. Each FOR
+                must be given a unique <U>counter</U> value and each nested FOR
+                must have its NEXT statement appear within the enclosing
+                FOR-NEXT block.
+
+                Nested loops that have a common termination point may use
+                a single NEXT statement with values of <U>counter</U> matching
+                the values for each FOR statement.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="nge1c2.html">DO</A>
+<A HREF="ng11abb.html">FOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng1982e.html">LOOP</A>
+<A HREF="ng33204.html">WEND</A>
+<A HREF="ng335b1.html">WHILE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1d3c8.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1d3c8.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8300982
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1d3c8.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1ca3c.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1d6a0.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>NOT                      Logical NOT Operator</B>
+
+ <B>NOT exp1</B>
+
+    NOT is a logical operator. BASIC converts the operand to an integer
+    (the result of this conversion must lie within the range -32768 to
+    32767, or else an Overflow error occurs), then complements each bit of
+    the result. That is, each resulting 1 bit becomes a 0 bit, and each
+    resulting 0 bit becomes a 1 bit. The result is an integer.
+
+    <U>Bitwise truth table for NOT:</U>
+
+                              <U>exp1</U><B>   </B><U>NOT exp1</U>
+                                1       0
+                                0       1
+
+        <U>exp1</U>    Any expression that produces a numeric result. This
+                includes Boolean expressions, where a TRUE result is
+                evaluated as -1 and a FALSE result is evaluated as 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng5198.html">AND</A>
+<A HREF="ngfc6d.html">EQV</A>
+<A HREF="ng13f30.html">IMP</A>
+<A HREF="ng2265a.html">OR</A>
+<A HREF="ng34a1f.html">XOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1d6a0.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1d6a0.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..34ea8f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1d6a0.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1d3c8.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1d78d.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>OCT$                     Octal Value, as String</B>
+
+ <U>s$</U> = <B>OCT$</B>(<U>numexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns, as a string, the octal value of its decimal argument.
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>    A numeric expression in the range -32768 to 65535.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng135de.html">HEX$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1d78d.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1d78d.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e70f974
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1d78d.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1d6a0.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ded6.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ON COM                   Trap for Communications Activity</B>
+
+ <B>ON</B> <B>COM</B>(<U>n</U>) <B>GOSUB</B> {linenum | linelabel}
+
+    Specifies a subroutine to which QuickBASIC will branch if it detects
+    activity at a specified communications port. The trap must also be
+    turned on by means of a COM(<U>n</U>) ON statement.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression. Must be either 1, for COM1:, or 2,
+                for COM2:.
+
+     <U>linenum</U>    The first line of a communications-handling subroutine.
+                Setting linenum to 0 disables trapping.
+
+   <U>linelabel</U>    A label identifying the first line of a communications-
+                handling subroutine.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    {l<U>inenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>} must be defined at the main program
+                level.
+
+                With communications trapping in effect, QuickBASIC checks
+                for data at the specified communications port. When
+                activity is detected, QuickBASIC branches to the specified
+                subroutine and temporarily suspends trapping (by means of
+                an implicit COM(<U>n</U>) STOP statement). Trapping automatically
+                resumes when a RETURN from the communications-handling
+                subroutine is executed (unless the communications-handling
+                routine explicitly performs a COM(<U>n</U>) OFF or COM(<U>n</U>) STOP).
+
+                All event trapping is temporarily disabled when QuickBASIC
+                is executing an error-handling routine (established via an
+                ON ERROR statement).
+
+                If the "Checking Between Statements" option is in effect,
+                QB checks for communication activity after each statement.
+                If the "Event Trapping" option is selected, QB checks
+                after each new program line. If neither option is
+                selected, no trapping takes place.
+
+                For command-line compilation, /v enables checking after
+                each statement, and /w enables checking after each new
+                line. If neither switch is used, no trapping takes place.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng9a3c.html">COM(n)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1ded6.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1ded6.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..777b498
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1ded6.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1d78d.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1e384.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ON ERROR                 Enable Error Trapping</B>
+
+ <B>ON</B> <B>ERROR</B> <B>GOTO</B> {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>}
+
+    Enables the trapping of error conditions and specifies the beginning
+    line of an error-trapping routine.
+
+     <U>linenum</U>    The first line of an error-handling routine. Setting
+                linenum to 0 disables trapping.
+
+   <U>linelabel</U>    A label identifying the first line of an error-handling
+                routine.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>} must be defined at the main program
+                level.
+
+                It is recommended that an ON ERROR GOTO 0 statement be
+                included within an error-handling routine to handle
+                unidentifiable error conditions.
+
+                While an error-handling routine is being executed, error
+                trapping (and all other event trapping) is disabled. If an
+                error occurs during this time, QuickBASIC halts program
+                execution and displays an error message.
+
+                An error-handling routine must end with a RESUME
+                statement.
+
+                When compiling a QuickBASIC program that uses ON ERROR and
+                RESUME, you must use the On Error (/e) and Resume Next
+                (/x) compile options.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng10563.html">ERL</A>
+<A HREF="ng107b9.html">ERR</A>
+<A HREF="ng108e8.html">ERROR</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b195.html">RESUME</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1e384.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1e384.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e5f47b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1e384.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1ded6.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1eb89.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ON KEY                   Trap for Keypress</B>
+
+ <B>ON</B> <B>KEY</B>(<U>n</U>) <B>GOSUB</B> {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>}
+
+    Establishes a subroutine to which QuickBASIC will branch if it detects
+    a specified keypress. The trap must also be turned on by means of a
+    KEY(<U>n</U>) ON statement.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression in the range 1 to 20.
+
+     <U>linenum</U>    The first line of a keypress-handling subroutine. Setting
+                <U>linenum</U> to 0 disables trapping.
+
+   <U>linelabel</U>    A label identifying the first line of a keypress-handling
+                routine.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>} must be defined at the main program
+                level.
+
+                The following keys may be trapped:
+
+                1-10     Function keys F1 through F10
+                11       Cursor Up
+                12       Cursor Left
+                13       Cursor Right
+                14       Cursor Down
+                15-20    Keys defined via KEY <U>n</U>,
+                         CHR$(<U>KBflag</U>)+CHR$(<U>scancode</U>)
+
+                When the keypress is detected, QuickBASIC branches to the
+                specified subroutine and temporarily suspends trapping (by
+                means of an implicit KEY(<U>n</U>) STOP statement). Trapping
+                automatically resumes when a RETURN from the handling
+                subroutine is executed (unless the handler explicitly
+                performs a KEY(<U>n</U>) OFF or KEY(<U>n</U>) STOP).
+
+                The key that produced the trap may not be determined by
+                means of INPUT$ or INKEY$.
+
+                All event trapping is temporarily disabled when QuickBASIC
+                is executing an error-handling routine (established via an
+                ON ERROR statement).
+
+                ON KEY may be used to trap Ctrl-Break and Ctrl-Alt-Del,
+                thereby preventing a user from breaking out of a program.
+
+                If the "Checking Between Statements" option is in effect,
+                QB checks after each statement. If the "Event Trapping"
+                option is selected, QB checks after each new program line.
+                If neither option is selected, no trapping takes place.
+
+                For command-line compilation, /v enables checking after
+                each statement, and /w enables checking after each new
+                line. If neither switch is used, no trapping takes place.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng16dd7.html">KEY(n)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1eb89.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1eb89.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d24a0c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1eb89.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1e384.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1f18c.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ON PEN                   Trap for Light Pen Activity</B>
+
+ <B>ON</B> <B>PEN</B> <B>GOSUB</B> {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>}
+
+    Establishes a subroutine to which QuickBASIC will branch if it detects
+    light pen activity. The trap must also be turned on by means of a PEN
+    ON statement.
+
+     <U>linenum</U>    The first line of a pen-handling subroutine. Setting
+                <U>linenum</U> to 0 disables trapping.
+
+   <U>linelabel</U>    A label identifying the first line of a pen-handling
+                routine.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>} must be defined at the main program
+                level.
+
+                When activity is detected, QuickBASIC branches to the
+                specified subroutine and temporarily suspends trapping (by
+                means of an implicit PEN STOP statement). Trapping
+                automatically resumes when a RETURN from the handling
+                subroutine is executed (unless the handler explicitly
+                performs a PEN OFF or PEN STOP).
+
+                All event trapping is temporarily disabled when QuickBASIC
+                is executing an error-handling routine (established via an
+                ON ERROR statement).
+
+                If the "Checking Between Statements" option is in effect,
+                QB checks after each statement. If the "Event Trapping"
+                option is selected, QB checks after each new program line.
+                If neither option is selected, no trapping takes place.
+
+                For command-line compilation, /v enables checking after
+                each statement, and /w enables checking after each new
+                line. If neither switch is used, no trapping takes place.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2434c.html">PEN (Statement)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1f18c.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1f18c.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b9a94ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1f18c.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1eb89.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1f736.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ON PLAY(n)               Trap for Background Music Remaining</B>
+
+ <B>ON</B> <B>PLAY</B>(<U>queuelimit</U>) <B>GOSUB</B> {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>}
+
+    Establishes a subroutine to which QuickBASIC will branch if fewer than
+    a specified number of notes remain in the background music buffer.     T
+    he trap must also be turned on by means of a PLAY ON statement.
+
+  <U>queuelimit</U>    An integer expression in the range 1 to 32 specifying the
+                number of notes to be trapped.
+
+     <U>linenum</U>    The first line of a music-handling subroutine. Setting
+                <U>linenum</U> to 0 disables trapping.
+
+   <U>linelabel</U>    A label identifying the first line of a music-handling
+                routine.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>} must be defined at the main program
+                level.
+
+                With trapping in effect, and when QuickBASIC is executing
+                music in the background mode, when the number of notes
+                remaining is fewer than queuelimit, QuickBASIC branches to
+                the specified subroutine and temporarily suspends trapping
+                (by means of an implicit PLAY STOP statement). Trapping
+                automatically resumes when a RETURN from the handling
+                subroutine is executed (unless the handler explicitly
+                performs a PLAY OFF or PLAY STOP).
+
+                All event trapping is temporarily disabled when QuickBASIC
+                is executing an error-handling routine (established via an
+                ON ERROR statement).
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng248ab.html">PLAY (Event Trap)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1f736.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1f736.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..38a0d84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1f736.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1f18c.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ff42.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ON STRIG(n)              Trap for Specified Joystick Button</B>
+
+ <B>ON</B> <B>STRIG</B>(<U>n</U>) <B>GOSUB</B> {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>}
+
+    Establishes a subroutine to which QuickBASIC will branch if a
+    specified joystick button is pressed. The trap must also be turned on
+    by means of a STRIG(<U>n</U>) ON statement.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression indicating the button to be trapped.
+                Must be 0, 2, 4, or 6. The meaning of <U>n</U> is as follows:
+
+                0   button A1
+                2   button B1
+                4   button A2
+                6   button B2
+
+     <U>linenum</U>    The first line of the joystick-handling subroutine.
+                Setting <U>linenum</U> to 0 disables trapping.
+
+   <U>linelabel</U>    A label identifying the first line of a joystick-handling
+                routine.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>} must be defined at the main program
+                level.
+
+                With trapping in effect, QuickBASIC checks to see if the
+                specified joystick button has been pressed. When the
+                button has been pressed, QuickBASIC branches to the
+                specified subroutine and temporarily suspends trapping (by
+                means of an implicit STRIG(<U>n</U>) STOP statement). Trapping
+                automatically resumes when a RETURN from the handling
+                subroutine is executed (unless the handler explicitly
+                performs a STRIG(<U>n</U>) OFF or STRIG(<U>n</U>) STOP).
+
+                Downstrokes that cause joystick button trapping do not set
+                functions STRIG(0), STRIG(2), STRIG(4), or STRIG(6).
+
+                All event trapping is temporarily disabled when QuickBASIC
+                is executing an error-handling routine (established via an
+                ON ERROR statement).
+
+                If the "Checking Between Statements" option is in effect,
+                QB checks after each statement. If the "Event Trapping"
+                option is selected, QB checks after each new program line.
+                If neither option is selected, no trapping takes place.
+
+                For command-line compilation, /v enables checking after
+                each statement, and /w enables checking after each new
+                line. If neither switch is used, no trapping takes place.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2f749.html">STRIG (Statement)</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f914.html">STRIG (Function)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1ff42.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1ff42.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d8fbaa2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng1ff42.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1f736.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng20631.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ON TIMER                 Trap for Elapsed Time</B>
+
+ <B>ON</B> <B>TIMER</B>(<U>n</U>) <B>GOSUB</B> {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>}
+
+    Establishes a subroutine to which QuickBASIC will branch if a
+    specified number of seconds have passed. The trap must also be turned
+    on by means of a TIMER ON statement.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression in the range 1 to 86,400 (1 second to
+                24 hours).
+
+     <U>linenum</U>    The first line of a timer-handling subroutine. Setting
+                <U>linenum</U> to 0 disables trapping.
+
+   <U>linelabel</U>    A label identifying the first line of a timer-handling
+                routine.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>} must be defined at the main program
+                level.
+
+                With trapping in effect, QuickBASIC checks to see if the
+                specified number of seconds have elapsed. When the
+                specified amount of time has passed, QuickBASIC branches
+                to the specified subroutine and temporarily suspends
+                trapping (by means of an implicit TIMER STOP statement).
+                Trapping automatically resumes when a RETURN from the
+                handling subroutine is executed (unless the handler
+                explicitly performs a TIMER OFF or TIMER STOP).
+
+                All event trapping is temporarily disabled when QuickBASIC
+                is executing an error-handling routine (established via an
+                ON ERROR statement).
+
+                If the "Checking Between Statements" option is in effect,
+                QB checks after each statement. If the "Event Trapping"
+                option is selected, QB checks after each new program line.
+                If neither option is selected, no trapping takes place.
+
+                For command-line compilation, /v enables checking after
+                each statement, and /w enables checking after each new
+                line. If neither switch is used, no trapping takes place.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng30f52.html">TIMER (Statement)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng20631.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng20631.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ab166d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng20631.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng1ff42.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng209fe.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ON...GOSUB               Branch to nth Item in Subroutine List</B>
+
+ <B>ON</B> <U>n</U> <B>GOSUB</B> {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>}, [,{<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>}]...
+
+    Causes QuickBASIC to branch to one of a list of subroutine starting
+    lines.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric variable in the range 0 to 255. Upon execution
+                of the ON...GOSUB statement, QuickBASIC branches to the
+                <U>n</U>th item in the list of line numbers that follows the
+                keyword GOSUB.
+
+     <U>linenum</U>    The first line number of a subroutine.
+
+   <U>linelabel</U>    A label identifying the first line of a subroutine.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If <U>n</U> is a noninteger numeric value, QuickBASIC rounds <U>n</U>.
+
+                If <U>n</U> is 0 or larger than the number of items in the
+                subroutine list, QuickBASIC continues with the next
+                executable statement.
+
+                If <U>n</U> is negative or larger than 255, an Illegal Function
+                Call error occurs.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng209fe.html">ON...GOTO</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng209fe.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng209fe.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e0e4845
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng209fe.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng20631.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng20da4.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ON...GOTO                Branch to </B><B><U>n</B></U><B>th Item in Line List</B>
+
+ <B>ON</B> <U>n</U> <B>GOTO</B> {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>}, [,{<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>}]...
+
+    Causes QuickBASIC to branch to one of a list of line numbers and/or
+    line labels.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric variable in the range 0 to 255. Upon execution
+                of the ON...GOTO statement, QuickBASIC branches to the nth
+                item in the list of line numbers/line labels that follows
+                the keyword GOTO.
+
+     <U>linenum</U>    A valid line number.
+
+   <U>linelabel</U>    A valid line label.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If <U>n</U> is a noninteger numeric value, QuickBASIC rounds <U>n</U>.
+
+                If <U>n</U> is 0 or larger than the number of items in the line
+                list, QuickBASIC continues with the next executable
+                statement.
+
+                If <U>n</U> is negative or larger than 255, an Illegal Function
+                Call error occurs.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng20631.html">ON...GOSUB</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng20da4.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng20da4.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..32a4441
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng20da4.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng209fe.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng21818.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>OPEN                     Allow File or Device I/O</B>
+
+ (1) <B>OPEN</B> <U>filespec</U> [FOR <U>mode</U>] [ACCESS <U>access</U>] [lock] <B>AS</B> [#]<U>filenum</U> [LEN=<U>recl</U>]
+
+ or
+
+ (2) <B>OPEN</B> <U>mode2</U>, [#]<U>filenum</U>, <U>filespec</U> [,<U>recl</U>]
+
+    Makes a file or device available for sequential input, sequential
+    output, or random access (either input or output).
+
+     <U>filespec</U>  A string expression that follows DOS file naming conventions.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    An integer expression in the range 1 to 255.
+
+        <U>mode</U>    (Syntax 1) One of the following (default is RANDOM):
+
+                INPUT    Sequential input
+                OUTPUT   Sequential output
+                APPEND   Sequential output, beginning at current EOF
+                RANDOM   Random input/output
+
+      <U>access</U>    If included, must be one of the following:
+
+                READ          File is opened for reading only.
+                WRITE         File is opened for writing only.
+                READ WRITE    File is opened for both reading and writing.
+
+        <U>lock</U>    If included, must be one of the following:
+
+                SHARED   Any process may read from or write to the file.
+                LOCK READ     No other process is granted read access to
+                    the file.
+                LOCK WRITE    No other process is granted write access to
+                    the file.
+                LOCK READ WRITE    No other process is granted either read
+                    or write access to the file.
+
+        <U>recl</U>    An integer expression in the range 1 to 32767. Sets the
+                record length for random files and the capacity of the I/O
+                buffer for sequential files. Defaults to 128.
+
+       <U>mode2</U>    (Syntax 2) A string expression that must evaluate to one
+                of the following:
+
+                I   Sequential input
+                O   Sequential output
+                A   Sequential output at EOF
+                R   Random input/output
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If a file is opened in RANDOM mode with no ACCESS code
+                specified, QuickBASIC tries to open it for read/write
+                access. If permission is denied, it then tries write-only
+                access, then read-only access.
+
+                The read/write access code can be specified only for files
+                opened for APPEND in RANDOM mode.
+
+                The OPEN statement has additional optional arguments when
+                the device being opened is COM1: or COM2:. See OPEN COM...
+
+                Opening an existing file for sequential output destroys
+                the current file contents; to add to the current file,
+                open it for APPEND (the APPEND mode may be used only for
+                sequential disk files).
+
+                A file that is already open may not be opened for
+                sequential output or append.
+
+                Opening a nonexistent file for APPEND is equivalent to
+                opening it for OUTPUT.
+
+                Disk files and printers may be opened for either
+                sequential or random access. All other standard devices
+                may be opened only for sequential access.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng21818.html">OPEN "COM...</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng21818.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng21818.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..256f636
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng21818.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng20da4.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng22467.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>OPEN "COM...             Open a Communications File</B>
+
+ <B>OPEN</B> "COMn: [<U>speed</U>] [,<U>parity</U>] [,<U>data</U>] [,<U>stop</U>] [,RS] [,CS[<U>m</U>]] [,DS[<U>m</U>]]
+ [,CD[<U>m</U>]] [,LF] [,BIN] [,ASC]" [FOR <U>mode</U>] AS [#]<U>filenum</U> [LEN=<U>num</U>]
+
+    Opens a communications device for input and output via GET and PUT.
+
+    <B>Required arguments:</B>
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression. Must be either 1, for COM1:, or 2,
+                for COM2:. An asynchronous adapter must be installed.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    An integer expression specifying a valid file number.
+
+    <B>Optional arguments (all must be constants):</B>
+
+       <U>speed</U>    Transfer rate, in bits per second. Default: 300. Other
+                legal values: 75, 110, 150, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800,
+                and 9600.
+
+      <U>parity</U>    Type of parity checking, if any. Default: E, for EVEN.
+                Other legal values: S (SPACE), O (ODD), M (MARK), and <U>N</U>
+                (NONE). parity must be set to <U>N</U> if data is set to 8.
+
+        <U>data</U>    Number of data bits to be transmitted. Default: 7. Other
+                legal values: 5, 6, and 8.
+
+        <U>stop</U>    Number of stop bits. Must be 1 or 2. Default: 2, for 75
+                and 110 bps; 1, for all other transmission rates.
+
+          RS    If included, suppresses RTS (Request to Send). If not
+                included, OPEN "COM..." automatically turns the RTS line
+                on.
+
+         CS<U>m</U>    If included, controls CTS (Clear to Send). <U>m</U> specifies, in
+                milliseconds, the delay before a timeout occurs. Default:
+                1000. Acceptable values: 0 to 65535. If <U>m</U> is 0, the CS
+                argument is ignored. If RTS is suppressed via the RS
+                parameter, the default CS time is 0 milliseconds.
+
+         DS<U>m</U>    If included, controls DSR (Data Set Ready). <U>m</U> specifies,
+                in milliseconds, the delay before a timeout occurs;
+                acceptable values are 0 to 65535. Default: 1000. If <U>m</U> is
+                0, the DS argument is ignored.
+
+         CD<U>m</U>    If included, controls CD (Carrier Detect). <U>m</U> specifies, in
+                milliseconds, the delay before a timeout occurs;
+                acceptable values are 65535. Default: 0. If <U>m</U> is 0, the CD
+                argument is ignored.
+
+          LF    If included, sends a line feed after each carriage return.
+
+     LEN=<U>num</U>    If included, <U>num</U> specifies the maximum number of bytes
+                that can be read from the communications buffer via GET or
+                PUT. Default: 128.
+
+         BIN    Opens the device in binary mode. This argument overrides
+                an LF argument.
+
+         ASC    Opens the device in ASCII mode. Tabs are converted to
+                spaces, carriage returns are issued at the end of each
+                line, Ctrl-Z is read as EOF, and XON/XOFF is enabled.
+
+    FOR <U>mode</U>    <U>mode</U> may be OUTPUT, for sequential output, or INPUT, for
+                sequential input. If this argument is omitted, the device
+                is opened for random access (input and output).
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The speed, parity, data, and stop arguments must be
+                presented in that order. Use commas as placeholders for
+                omitted arguments.
+
+                The remaining arguments--RS, CS, DS, CD, LF, BIN, and ASC
+                may be specified in any order.
+
+                Communications devices are opened in binary mode by
+                default, unless an ASC argument is included in the OPEN
+                COM statement.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng9a3c.html">COM(n)</A>
+<A HREF="ng1d78d.html">ON COM</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng22467.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng22467.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db4abe1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng22467.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng21818.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2265a.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>OPTION BASE              Set Minimum Array Subscript</B>
+
+ <B>OPTION</B> <B>BASE</B> <U>n</U>
+
+    Specifies whether the lowest subscript in all arrays used in a program
+    is 0 or 1.
+
+           <U>n</U>    Must be 0 or 1. The default is 0.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The OPTION BASE statement, if used, must be executed
+                before any arrays are defined or used. Only one OPTION
+                BASE statement per compilation is allowed.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng175c1.html">LBOUND</A>
+<A HREF="ng314eb.html">UBOUND</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2265a.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2265a.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..71579dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2265a.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng22467.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng22914.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>OR                       Logical OR Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 OR exp2</B>
+
+    OR is a logical operator. BASIC converts each operand to an integer
+    (each operand must yield an integer in the range -32768 to 32767, or
+    else an Overflow error occurs), then performs a bitwise comparison of
+    the results, according to the truth table below:
+
+                     <U>exp1</U><B>  </B><U>exp2</U><B>     </B><U>exp1 OR exp2</U>
+                       1    1             1
+                       1    0             1
+                       0    1             1
+                       0    0             0
+
+    The result is an integer.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any expression that produces a numeric result. This
+                includes Boolean expressions, where a TRUE result is
+                evaluated as -1 and a FALSE result is evaluated as 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng5198.html">AND</A>
+<A HREF="ngfc6d.html">EQV</A>
+<A HREF="ng13f30.html">IMP</A>
+<A HREF="ng1d3c8.html">NOT</A>
+<A HREF="ng34a1f.html">XOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng22914.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng22914.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3039261
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng22914.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2265a.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng22a5b.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>OUT                      Send Byte to Output Port</B>
+
+ <B>OUT</B> <U>port</U>,<U>data</U>
+
+    Sends one byte of data to a specified output port.
+
+        <U>port</U>    An integer expression in the range 0 to 65535; specifies
+                the port number.
+
+        <U>data</U>    An integer expression in the range 0 to 255; specifies the
+                data byte.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng147de.html">INP</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng22a5b.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng22a5b.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1e216ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng22a5b.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng22914.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng23171.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PAINT                    Fill an Area with a Pattern or Color</B>
+
+ <B>PAINT</B> [STEP] (<U>x</U>,<U>y</U>) [[,<U>color</U>] [,<U>boundary</U>] [,<U>background</U>]]
+
+    Fills an enclosed area on the graphics screen with a specific color or
+    pattern.
+
+        STEP    If included, coordinates are relative to last graphics
+                point referenced (LPR). If omitted, coordinates are
+                absolute.
+
+         <U>x</U>,<U>y</U>    Screen coordinate (column, row) within the area that is to
+                be filled.
+
+       <U>color</U>    A numeric or string expression. If numeric, specifies
+                color to fill area with; if string, specifies a bit
+                pattern to fill the area with. If this argument is
+                omitted, the foreground color will be used.
+
+    <U>boundary</U>    The color of the border of the area to be filled. PAINT
+                stops filling when it reaches this color. If this argument
+                is omitted, then <U>color</U> will be used.
+
+  <U>background</U>    A string expression specifying the background tile slice
+                to skip when checking for termination of the boundary.
+                This allows you to repaint an already painted area.
+
+   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+<B>     </B><B>Notes:</B>     If <U>color</U> is a string expression, each character (8 bits)
+                in the string represents one scan line. Each character
+                therefore represents the status of 4 pixels in medium-
+                resolution and 8 pixels in high-resolution. The string can
+                be from 1 to 64 bytes long (thus allowing 1 to 64 scan
+                lines vertically).
+
+                Ensure that the area to be filled is completely enclosed,
+                or else "leaking" may destroy the entire drawing.
+
+                <U>background</U> is used to determine the stop condition when
+                filling an already painted area. If an existing pixel is
+                encountered that agrees with the corresponding bit in
+                <U>background</U>, then filling doesn't stop.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng76ee.html">CIRCLE</A>
+<A HREF="nge5df.html">DRAW</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng23171.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng23171.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2283909
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng23171.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng22a5b.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng23637.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PALETTE                  Change Color in the Palette</B>
+
+ <B>PALETTE</B> [<U>attribute</U>, <U>color</U>]
+
+    Changes a color in the palette. This statement can be used only with
+    the Enhanced Graphics Adapter (EGA).
+
+   <U>attribute</U>    Represents a color in the palette. The range of values
+                depends on the screen mode (see below).
+
+       <U>color</U>    Actual display color. The range of values depends on the
+                screen mode (see below).
+
+<B>                    Attribute and Color Ranges</B>
+
+           <U>Mode</U>          <U>Monitor</U>        <U>Attribute</U>           <U>Color</U>
+            0            Mono/MDA         N/A                N/A
+                         Mono/EGA         0-15               0-2
+                         Color/CGA        N/A                0-31
+                         Color/EGA        0-31               0-15
+            1            Color/CGA        N/A                0-3
+                         Color/EGA        0-3                0-15
+            2            Color/CGA        N/A                0-1
+                         Color/EGA        0-1                0-15
+            7            Color/EGA        0-15               0-15
+            8            Color/EGA        0-15               0-15
+            9            EGA (64K)        0-3                0-15
+                         EGA (&gt;64K)       0-15               0-63
+           10            Mono/EGA         0-3                0-8
+
+   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+<B>     </B><B>Notes:</B>     If no arguments are specified, then the palette is set to
+                its predefined default colors.
+
+                Changing the palette  will affect the current screen
+                colors immediately. Text or graphics on the screen will
+                not be destroyed.
+
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng86fb.html">COLOR</A>
+<A HREF="nge5df.html">DRAW</A>
+<A HREF="ng23637.html">PALETTE USING</A>
+<A HREF="ng2c723.html">SCREEN (Statement)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng23637.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng23637.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac5682c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng23637.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng23171.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng23b74.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PALETTE USING            Change Many Colors in the Palette</B>
+
+ <B>PALETTE</B> <B>USING</B> <U>intarray</U> (<U>arrayindex</U>)
+
+    Changes many colors in the palette in a single statement. This
+    statement can be used only with the Enhanced Graphics Adapter (EGA).
+
+    <U>intarray</U>    An integer array that containing the new colors in the
+                palette. The array must consist of at least 16 elements.
+
+  <U>arrayindex</U>    The starting index of <U>intarray</U> of where the new colors
+                begin. Most of the time this value will be 0.
+
+<B>                    Attribute and Color Ranges</B>
+
+           <U>Mode</U>          <U>Monitor</U>        <U>Attribute</U>           <U>Color</U>
+            0            Mono/MDA         N/A                N/A
+                         Mono/EGA         0-15               0-2
+                         Color/CGA        N/A                0-31
+                         Color/EGA        0-31               0-15
+            1            Color/CGA        N/A                0-3
+                         Color/EGA        0-3                0-15
+            2            Color/CGA        N/A                0-1
+                         Color/EGA        0-1                0-15
+            7            Color/EGA        0-15               0-15
+            8            Color/EGA        0-15               0-15
+            9            EGA (64K)        0-3                0-15
+                         EGA (&gt;64K)       0-15               0-63
+           10            Mono/EGA         0-3                0-8
+
+   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+<B>     </B><B>Notes:</B>     If the value of an array entry is -1, then the paired
+                attribute is not affected. Any other negative value is
+                illegal.
+
+                Changing the palette will affect the current screen colors
+                immediately. Text or graphics on the screen will not be
+                destroyed.
+
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng86fb.html">COLOR</A>
+<A HREF="nge5df.html">DRAW</A>
+<A HREF="ng23171.html">PALETTE</A>
+<A HREF="ng2c723.html">SCREEN (Statement)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng23b74.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng23b74.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bcd87c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng23b74.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng23637.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng23cd7.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PCOPY                    Copy Screen Page</B>
+
+ <B>PCOPY</B> <U>sourcepg</U>,<U>destpg</U>
+
+    Copies one screen page to another.
+
+    <U>sourcepg</U>    An integer expression in the current range of video page
+                options. Specifies the source page.
+
+      <U>destpg</U>    An integer expression in the current range of video page
+                options. Specifies the destination page.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng23cd7.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng23cd7.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6296cac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng23cd7.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng23b74.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng23ef7.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PEEK                     Value at Specified Address</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>PEEK</B>(<U>n</U>)
+
+    Returns the byte at a specified memory offset within the current
+    segment.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A single-precision expression in the range 0 to 1,048,575.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    <U>n</U> specifies a decimal offset within the segment specified
+                by the most recent DEF SEG statement. If there has been no
+                DEF SEG statement, the offset is within QuickBASIC's data
+                segment.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngcd1a.html">DEF SEG</A>
+<A HREF="ng2627a.html">POKE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng23ef7.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng23ef7.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b3d38cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng23ef7.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng23cd7.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2434c.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PEN                      Light Pen Status                            Function</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>PEN</B>(<U>n</U>)
+
+    Returns information about the status of the light pen. For the PEN
+    function to be available, a PEN ON statement must first be executed.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 9; specifies the
+                kind of information to be returned. Options are as
+                follows:
+
+                0   Returns -1 if light pen has been down since last PEN
+                    function; otherwise returns 0.
+                1   Returns x coordinate of location where pen was most
+                    recently activated.
+                2   Returns y coordinate of location where pen was most
+                    recently activated.
+                3   Returns -1 if pen switch is currently down; otherwise
+                    returns 0.
+                4   Returns x coordinate of last known valid pen location.
+                5   Returns y coordinate of last known valid pen location.
+                6   Returns row position of location where pen was most
+                    recently activated.
+                7   Returns column position of location where pen was most
+                    recently activated.
+                8   Returns row position of last known valid pen location.
+                9   Returns column position of last known valid pen
+                    location.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2434c.html">PEN (statement)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2434c.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2434c.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e4886fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2434c.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng23ef7.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng248ab.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PEN                      Enable/Disable Pen Read and Trap           Statement</B>
+
+ <B>PEN</B> {ON | OFF | STOP}
+
+    Enables or disables the PEN function (which returns light pen status
+    information. Also enables or disables trapping of light pen activity.
+
+          ON    Enables reading of the light pen status, via the PEN
+                function, and causes QuickBASIC to check for light pen
+                activity.
+
+         OFF    Disables reading of the light pen status and causes
+                QuickBASIC not to check for light pen activity. This is
+                the default condition.
+
+        STOP    Disables reading of the light pen status and deactivates
+                trapping, but QuickBASIC continues checking to see if the
+                pen has been activated. If it has, a subsequent PEN ON
+                results in an immediate trap (provided an ON PEN statement
+                with a nonzero line number has been executed).
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the "Checking Between Statements" option is in effect,
+                QB checks for light pen activity after each statement. If
+                the "Event Trapping" option is selected, QB checks after
+                each new program line. If neither option is selected, no
+                trapping takes place.
+
+                For command-line compilation, /v enables checking after
+                each statement, and /w enables checking after each new
+                line. If neither switch is used, no trapping takes place.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng1eb89.html">ON PEN</A>
+<A HREF="ng23ef7.html">PEN (Function)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng248ab.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng248ab.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2e075ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng248ab.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2434c.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng24ced.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PLAY                     Enable/Disable Music Trap                  Statement</B>
+
+ <B>PLAY</B> {ON | OFF | STOP}
+
+    Enables or disables the ON PLAY trap.
+
+          ON    PLAY ON enables checking of the background music buffer.
+
+         OFF    PLAY OFF disables checking of the background music buffer.
+                This is the default condition.
+
+        STOP    PLAY STOP inhibits trapping. QuickBASIC continues checking
+                the buffer, and if the notes remaining are fewer than
+                specified in the ON PLAY statement, a subsequent PLAY ON
+                results in an immediate trap.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the "Checking Between Statements" option is in effect,
+                QB checks for communication activity after each statement.
+                If the "Event Trapping" option is selected, QB checks
+                after each new program line. If neither option is
+                selected, no trapping takes place.
+
+                For command-line compilation, /v enables checking after
+                each statement, and /w enables checking after each new
+                line. If neither switch is used, no trapping takes place.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng1f18c.html">ON PLAY(n)</A>
+<A HREF="ng24ced.html">Play (Function)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng24ced.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng24ced.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6643d2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng24ced.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng248ab.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng24dc8.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PLAY                     Number of Notes in Background Buffer        Function</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>PLAY</B>(<U>n</U>)
+
+    Returns the number of notes remaining in the background music buffer.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A dummy; can be any value.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng24dc8.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng24dc8.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..715b939
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng24dc8.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng24ced.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng25c31.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PLAY                     Play Music                                 Statement</B>
+
+ <B>PLAY</B> <U>string</U>
+
+    Plays a melody according to instructions specified as a string
+    expression.
+
+      <U>string</U>    A string expression containing one or more commands in the
+                BASIC tune definition language.
+
+    <B>Tune Definition Language</B>
+
+      A to G    Name of a note to play. Case is not significant.
+
+          N<U>n</U>    Number of a note to play. Notes are numbered from 1,
+                corresponding to the lowest C on a piano, to 84,
+                corresponding to the highest B on a piano. A value of 0
+                for <U>n</U> specifies a rest.
+
+     #, +, -    Sharps and flats. The equivalent symbols # and + tell
+                BASIC to raise the specified note by a half step. The
+                symbol - tells BASIC to lower the specified note by a half
+                step. Only those sharps and flats that correspond to black
+                keys on a piano are valid; i.e., E# and B# are not valid
+                notes. Append these symbols to the notes.
+
+          O<U>n</U>    Octave (register) in which to play a letter-named note.
+                Octaves are numbered from 0 (lowest) to 6. The lowest note
+                in each octave is C.  The default is octave 4.
+
+          L<U>n</U>    Duration of note, as a reciprocal (but see MS, ML, and MN,
+                below). A value of 4 indicates a quarter note, a value of
+                16 indicates a sixteenth note, and so on. All values from
+                1 through 64 are valid. An L command affects all notes
+                that follow, until the next L command. But you may also
+                specify a duration value in conjunction with a note name
+                or number--as, for example, D#4 (a D-sharp quarter note);
+                a duration specified in this manner affects only the note
+                with which it is associated.
+
+          P<U>n</U>    A rest (pause) of specified duration. The duration is
+                specified in the same manner as for a note--i.e., as a
+                reciprocal. To generate a rest in the current value of L,
+                you may simply indicate a note number of 0.
+
+           .    Appended to a note name or number, or a rest, a dot
+                (period) extends the current duration of the note (or
+                rest) by one half. You may have more than one dot after a
+                note or rest.
+
+          T<U>n</U>    Tempo, specified as a number of quarter notes per minute.
+                Values of 32 to 255 are valid; the default is 120.
+
+    &gt;A to &gt;G    Increment the octave value by 1 and play the named note.
+                The octave value stays at the increased level. If the
+                current octave is 6, &gt; has no effect.
+
+    &lt;A to &lt;G    Decrement the octave value by 1 and play the named note.
+                The octave value stays at the decreased level. If the
+                current octave is 0, &lt; has no effect.
+
+          MF    Run music in foreground.
+
+          MB    Run music in background. Other program statements may be
+                executed while music is running. Up to 32 notes may be
+                held in the background music buffer at any time.
+
+          ML    Music legato: Notes are played for their full specified
+                duration.
+
+          MS    Music staccato: Notes are played for 3/4 of their
+                specified duration.
+
+          MN    Music normal: Notes are played for 7/8 of their specified
+                duration. This mode is default.
+
+"=" + VARPTR$(<U>var</U>)
+                Get argument from variable. May be used to supply
+                arguments to any of the foregoing commands.
+
+"X" + VARPTR$(<U>stringvar</U>)
+                Execute command sequence stored in a string variable. This
+                command allows you to call "subtunes."
+
+   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    To get arguments or instructions from variables, you must
+                use VARPTR$(<U>var</U>) or VARPTR$(<U>stringvar</U>). QuickBASIC does
+                not support the =<U>variable</U>; and X<U>stringvar</U> formulations
+                available with the Interpreter.
+
+                Spaces between or within instructions are insignificant.
+
+                Semicolons may be used between commands to enhance
+                readability.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng579e.html">BEEP</A>
+<A HREF="ng1f18c.html">ON PLAY(n)</A>
+<A HREF="ng248ab.html">PLAY (Event Trap)</A>
+<A HREF="ng2e58f.html">SOUND</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng25c31.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng25c31.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8fd9c8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng25c31.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng24dc8.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng25eb4.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PMAP                     Map Physical Coordinates to World</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>PMAP</B>(<U>expr</U>,<U>function</U>)
+
+    Converts a specified physical x or y coordinate to its world
+    coordinate value, as defined by the WINDOW statement; or vice versa.
+
+        <U>expr</U>    Specifies the x or y coordinate to be converted.
+
+    <U>function</U>    A value in the range 0 to 3; specifies what the PMAP
+                function is to do, as follows:
+
+                0   Maps world coordinate x to physical coordinate x
+                1   Maps world coordinate y to physical coordinate y
+                2   Maps physical coordinate x to world coordinate x
+                3   Maps physical coordinate y to world coordinate y
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng33e32.html">WINDOW</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng25eb4.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng25eb4.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..25aa772
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng25eb4.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng25c31.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2627a.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>POINT                    Attribute or Value at Screen Location</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>POINT</B>({<U>x</U>,<U>y</U> | <U>n</U>})
+
+    Returns the attribute of a specified screen coordinate or coordinate
+    information about the current screen location.
+
+         <U>x</U>,<U>y</U>    Screen coordinates. POINT(<U>x</U>,<U>y</U>) returns the attribute of
+                the screen location specified by the two arguments. The
+                screen coordinates must be given in absolute form (STEP is
+                not allowed). If either coordinate is out of range, POINT
+                returns -1.
+
+           <U>n</U>    Must be 0, 1, 2, or 3. POINT(<U>n</U>) returns the following
+                information about the current screen location:
+
+                If <U>n</U> = 0      the current physical x coordinate.
+                If <U>n</U> = 1      the current physical y coordinate.
+                If <U>n</U> = 2      the current world x coordinate, if WINDOW is
+                    active; otherwise, the current physical x coordinate.
+                If <U>n</U> = 3      the current world y coordinate, if WINDOW is
+                    active; otherwise, the current physical y coordinate.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2627a.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2627a.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa33c3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2627a.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng25eb4.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng264a0.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>POKE                     Write Byte to Memory</B>
+
+ <B>POKE</B> <U>address</U>,<U>byte</U>
+
+    Writes a specified byte at a specified memory offset within the
+    current segment.
+
+     <U>address</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 1048575; specifies
+                a decimal offset within the segment specified by the most
+                recent DEF SEG statement. If there has been no DEF SEG
+                statement, the offset is within QuickBASIC's data segment.
+
+        <U>byte</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 255; specifies the
+                data to be written at offset address.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng23cd7.html">PEEK</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng264a0.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng264a0.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df5acd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng264a0.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2627a.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2659c.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>POS                      Current Cursor Column Position</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>POS</B>(<U>column</U>)
+
+    Returns the column position of the current cursor location.
+
+      <U>column</U>    A dummy. Any numeric or string expression may be used.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngb058.html">CSRLIN</A>
+<A HREF="ng19c46.html">LPOS</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2659c.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2659c.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0de2cf5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2659c.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng264a0.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2682a.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PRESET                   Draw Point on Screen</B>
+
+ <B>PRESET</B> [STEP] (<U>x</U>,<U>y</U>) [,<U>color</U>]
+
+    Plots a point at a specified screen location.
+
+        STEP    If included, coordinates are relative to last graphics
+                point referenced. If omitted, coordinates are absolute.
+
+     <U>x</U>,<U>y</U>  Screen coordinates.
+
+       <U>color</U>    Specifies the attribute of the point to be plotted. If
+                color is omitted, the point is plotted in the background
+                color.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    PSET is exactly the same statement, except that it plots
+                by default in the current foreground color.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng29621.html">PSET</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng267b.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng267b.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4da1abd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng267b.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng282a.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>*                        Multiplication Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 * exp2</B>
+
+    The * operator performs multiplication. If the expression involves
+    operands of more than one precision, all operands are converted to the
+    same level--that of the highest-precision operand in the expression--
+    before the expression is evaluated.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any numeric expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng4642.html">^^</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ac8.html">-</A>
+<A HREF="ng2d59.html">/</A>
+<A HREF="ng447e.html">\</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c6b1.html">MOD</A>
+<A HREF="ng282a.html">+</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2682a.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2682a.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..278f1aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2682a.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2659c.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng26f10.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PRINT                    Display on Screen</B>
+
+ <B>PRINT</B> [<U>exprlist</U>][{, | ;}]
+
+    Displays one or more numeric or string expressions on screen.
+
+    <U>exprlist</U>    Numeric and/or string expressions to print. Each
+                expression must be separated from the one after it by
+                either a comma or a semicolon.
+
+           ;    If included at the end of the statement, suppresses the
+                usual carriage return and line feed.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    QuickBASIC divides the screen into zones of 14 character
+                positions. If an expression is followed by a comma,
+                QuickBASIC displays the next expression at the beginning
+                of the next screen zone. If an expression is followed by a
+                semicolon or space character, QuickBASIC displayed the
+                next expression directly after the last expression.
+
+                If the last expression in the list to be displayed is
+                followed by a comma, a semicolon, SPC, or TAB, QuickBASIC
+                spaces appropriately and suppresses its usual carriage
+                return-line feed pair. Otherwise, QuickBASIC issues a
+                carriage return and line feed after executing a PRINT
+                statement.
+
+                QuickBASIC also issues a carriage return and line feed if
+                the display of a list of expressions reaches the character
+                position specified by the most recent WIDTH statement (or
+                column 80, if no WIDTH statement has been executed).
+
+                Numbers are always followed by a space on the right.
+                Positive numbers are preceded by a space, and negative
+                numbers are preceded by a minus sign.
+
+                If no list of expressions is supplied, PRINT just issues a
+                carriage return and line feed.
+
+                Note that QuickBASIC does not allow the use of ? as a
+                synonym for PRINT.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng19d58.html">LPRINT</A>
+<A HREF="ng26f10.html">PRINT #</A>
+<A HREF="ng28508.html">PRINT USING</A>
+<A HREF="ng27378.html">PRINT # USING</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng26f10.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng26f10.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac6c9e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng26f10.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2682a.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng27378.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PRINT #                  Output to Sequential File</B>
+
+ <B>PRINT</B> <B>#</B><U>filenum</U>, [<U>exprlist</U>] [;]
+
+    Writes to a specified disk file an image of what would be displayed on
+    screen by a corresponding PRINT statement.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which the file was opened for output.
+
+    <U>exprlist</U>    Numeric and/or string expressions to print. Each
+                expression must be separated from the one after it by
+                either a comma or a semicolon.
+
+           ;    If included at the end of the statement, suppresses the
+                usual carriage return and line feed.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    PRINT # outputs exactly the same characters that would
+                appear on screen in response to a PRINT statement. Commas
+                between expressions, for example, result in the insertion
+                of space.
+
+                If an expression to be output contains significant quote
+                marks or commas, you should surround it with quote marks
+                by means of CHR$(34); otherwise, when you input these
+                fields, QuickBASIC will interpret the significant commas
+                or quotes as delimiters.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2682a.html">PRINT</A>
+<A HREF="ng27378.html">PRINT # USING</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng27378.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng27378.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e456450
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng27378.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng26f10.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng28508.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PRINT # USING            Formatted Output to File</B>
+
+ <B>PRINT</B> <B>#</B><U>filenum</U>, USING <U>strexpr</U>; <U>exprlist</U>[;]
+
+    Writes to a specified disk file an image of what would be displayed on
+    screen by a corresponding PRINT USING statement.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which the file was OPENed.
+
+     <U>strexpr</U>    A string variable or constant specifying the format in
+                which the data is to be printed (see below).
+
+    <U>exprlist</U>    Numeric and/or string expressions to print. Each
+                expression must be separated from the one after it by
+                either a comma or a semicolon.
+
+           ;    If included at the end of the statement, suppresses the
+                usual carriage return and line feed.
+
+    <B>Formatting options:</B>
+
+    The following symbols may be used in strexpr:
+
+      Symbol    Meaning
+
+           !    Print only the first character of a string expression.
+
+        \  \    Print only the first <U>n</U> characters of a string expression,
+                where <U>n</U> is the number of spaces between the two
+                backslashes. If <U>n</U> is larger than the number of characters
+                in the string expression, QuickBASIC pads the string
+                expression on the right with space characters.
+
+           &amp;    Print a string expression without reformatting it.
+
+           .    Specifies the position of the decimal point in a numeric
+                expression.
+
+           #    A place-holder. If the numeric expression has more digits
+                to the right of the decimal point than the format string
+                has #s, QuickBASIC rounds. If the numeric expression has
+                more digits to the left of the decimal point than the
+                format string has #s, QuickBASIC prints all the digits to
+                the left of the decimal point and also prints a percent
+                sign (%) to the left of the number. If the numeric
+                expression has fewer digits to the left of the decimal
+                point than the format string has #s, QuickBASIC right-
+                justifies the number; that is, it pads the number on the
+                left with spaces. (But if there are any #s to the left of
+                the decimal point in the format string, QuickBASIC always
+                prints at least one digit--a 0 if necessary--to the left
+                of the decimal point.)
+
+           +    Print a plus or minus sign, as appropriate, to the left of
+                the number. The sign is always printed immediately to the
+                left of the number.
+
+           -    Print a minus sign immediately to the right of a negative
+                number (the minus sign should appear after the place
+                holders in the format string).
+
+          $$    Print a dollar sign immediately to the left of the number.
+                The double dollar sign also acts as a place holder for two
+                additional digits to the left of the decimal point, one of
+                which is the dollar sign itself. The dollar sign cannot be
+                prefixed to a number printed in exponential format.
+
+          **    Fill any leading spaces with asterisks. The double
+                asterisk also acts as a place holder for two additional
+                digits to the left of the decimal point.
+
+         **$    Print a dollar sign immediately to the left of the number,
+                and fill any remaining leading spaces with asterisks. The
+                combination of two asterisks and a dollar sign also acts
+                as a place holder for three additional digits, one of
+                which is the dollar sign.
+
+        ^^^^    Print a number in exponential format. The four carets
+                should appear after all place holders in the format
+                string.
+
+           _    Print next character as a literal. The combination _#, for
+                example, allows you to include a number sign as a literal
+                in your numeric format.
+
+     [other]    Characters other than the foregoing may be included as
+                literals in the format string. Thus, for example, a single
+                dollar sign may be positioned to the left of a series of
+                place holders (#s) to achieve vertically aligned dollar
+                signs, and space characters may be placed at the right
+                side of the format string to achieve horizontal separation
+                between a series of numbers.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    PRINT # USING outputs exactly the same characters that
+                would appear on screen in response to a PRINT USING
+                statement. Commas between expressions, for example, result
+                in the insertion of space.
+
+                If an expression to be output contains significant quote
+                marks or commas, you should surround it with quote marks
+                by means of CHR$(34); otherwise, when you input these
+                fields, QuickBASIC will interpret the significant commas
+                or quotes as delimiters.
+
+                Double-precision numbers in IEEE format may have three-
+                digit exponents. To print numbers with three-digit
+                exponents, use five carets instead of four.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng28508.html">PRINT USING</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng282a.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng282a.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ef9f94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng282a.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng267b.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ac8.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>+                        Addition/Concatenation Operator</B>
+
+    <B>Addition</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 + exp2</B>
+
+    The + operator performs addition. If the expression involves operands
+    of more than one precision, all operands are converted to the same
+    level--that of the highest-precision operand in the expression--before
+    the expression is evaluated.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any numeric expression.
+
+
+    <B>Concatenation</B>
+
+ <B>str1 + str2</B>
+
+    The + operator also performs concatenation on string expressions. The
+    result is a string composed of <U>str1</U> followed by <U>str2</U>.
+
+   <U>str1</U>,<U>str2</U>    Any string expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng4642.html">^^</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ac8.html">-</A>
+<A HREF="ng267b.html">*</A>
+<A HREF="ng2d59.html">/</A>
+<A HREF="ng447e.html">\</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c6b1.html">MOD</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng28508.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng28508.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..852d271
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng28508.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng27378.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng29621.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PRINT USING              Formatted Screen Display</B>
+
+ <B>PRINT</B> <B>USING</B> <U>strexpr</U>; <U>exprlist</U> [;]
+
+    Displays one or more string or numeric expressions, in a specified
+    format, on screen.
+
+     <U>strexpr</U>    A string variable or constant specifying the format in
+                which the data is to be printed (see below).
+
+    <U>exprlist</U>    Numeric and/or string expressions to print. Each
+                expression must be separated from the one after it by
+                either a comma or a semicolon.
+
+           ;    If included at the end of the statement, suppresses the
+                usual carriage return and line feed.
+
+    <B>Formatting options:</B>
+
+    The following symbols may be used in strexpr:
+
+      Symbol    Meaning
+
+           !    Print only the first character of a string expression.
+
+        \  \    Print only the first <U>n</U> characters of a string expression,
+                where <U>n</U> is the number of spaces between the two
+                backslashes. If <U>n</U> is larger than the number of characters
+                in the string expression, QuickBASIC pads the string
+                expression on the right with space characters.
+
+           &amp;    Print a string expression without reformatting it.
+
+           .    Specifies the position of the decimal point in a numeric
+                expression.
+
+           #    A place-holder. If the numeric expression has more digits
+                to the right of the decimal point than the format string
+                has #s, QuickBASIC rounds. If the numeric expression has
+                more digits to the left of the decimal point than the
+                format string has #s, QuickBASIC prints all the digits to
+                the left of the decimal point and also prints a percent
+                sign (%) to the left of the number. If the numeric
+                expression has fewer digits to the left of the decimal
+                point than the format string has #s, QuickBASIC right-
+                justifies the number; that is, it pads the number on the
+                left with spaces. (But if there are any #s to the left of
+                the decimal point in the format string, QuickBASIC always
+                prints at least one digit--a 0 if necessary--to the left
+                of the decimal point.)
+
+           +    Print a plus or minus sign, as appropriate, to the left of
+                the number. The sign is always printed immediately to the
+                left of the number.
+
+           -    Print a minus sign immediately to the right of a negative
+                number (the minus sign should appear after the place
+                holders in the format string).
+
+          $$    Print a dollar sign immediately to the left of the number.
+                The double dollar sign also acts as a place holder for two
+                additional digits to the left of the decimal point, one of
+                which is the dollar sign itself. The dollar sign cannot be
+                prefixed to a number printed in exponential format.
+
+          **    Fill any leading spaces with asterisks. The double
+                asterisk also acts as a place holder for two additional
+                digits to the left of the decimal point.
+
+         **$    Print a dollar sign immediately to the left of the number,
+                and fill any remaining leading spaces with asterisks. The
+                combination of two asterisks and a dollar sign also acts
+                as a place holder for three additional digits, one of
+                which is the dollar sign.
+
+        ^^^^    Print a number in exponential format. The four carets
+                should appear after all place holders in the format
+                string.
+
+           _    Print next character as a literal. The combination _#, for
+                example, allows you to include a number sign as a literal
+                in your numeric format.
+
+     [other]    Characters other than the foregoing may be included as
+                literals in the format string. Thus, for example, a single
+                dollar sign may be positioned to the left of a series of
+                place holders (#s) to achieve vertically aligned dollar
+                signs, and space characters may be placed at the right
+                side of the format string to achieve horizontal separation
+                between a series of numbers.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    QuickBASIC sends a carriage return-line feed pair after
+                the last expression in a PRINT USING statement, unless the
+                expression is followed by a semicolon.
+
+                QuickBASIC assumes a maximum line length of 80 characters,
+                unless a different value has been specified by means of a
+                WIDTH statement. QuickBASIC sends a carriage return-line
+                feed pair when the maximum line length has been reached.
+
+                Double-precision numbers in IEEE format may have three-
+                digit exponents. To print numbers with three-digit
+                exponents, use five carets instead of four.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng19d58.html">LPRINT</A>
+<A HREF="ng1a3ba.html">LPRINT USING</A>
+<A HREF="ng2682a.html">PRINT</A>
+<A HREF="ng26f10.html">PRINT #</A>
+<A HREF="ng27378.html">PRINT # USING</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng29621.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng29621.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5e993e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng29621.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng28508.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng298af.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PSET                     Draw Point on Screen</B>
+
+ <B>PSET</B> [STEP] (<U>x</U>,<U>y</U>) [,<U>color</U>]
+
+    Plots a point at a specified screen location.
+
+        STEP    If included, coordinates are relative to last graphics
+                point referenced. If omitted, coordinates are absolute.
+
+         <U>x</U>,<U>y</U>    Screen coordinates.
+
+       <U>color</U>    Specifies the attribute of the point to be plotted. If
+                color is omitted, the point is plotted in the current
+                foreground color.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    PRESET is exactly the same statement, except that it plots
+                by default in the background color.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2659c.html">PRESET</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng298af.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng298af.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e70fbd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng298af.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng29621.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng29bbc.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PUT                      Write Record from Random Buffer to File     File I/O</B>
+
+ <B>PUT</B> [#]<U>filenum</U> [,<U>number</U>]
+
+    Writes a specified record from a specified random file buffer to disk.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which the file was OPENed.
+
+      <U>number</U>    A numeric expression in the range 1 to 16 megabytes,
+                specifying the number of the record to be transferred.
+                Defaults to the next record, or record 1 (if no previous
+                record has been PUT).
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If <U>filenum</U> specifies a communications device, number
+                specifies the number of bytes to write; number in this
+                case may not exceed the value of LEN given when the
+                communications device was OPENed.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng127c8.html">GET (File I/O)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng29bbc.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng29bbc.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3279240
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng29bbc.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng298af.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2a131.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>PUT                      Plot Array Image on Screen                  Graphics</B>
+
+ <B>PUT</B> (<U>x</U>,<U>y</U>), <U>array</U> [,<U>action</U>]
+
+    Transfers data from a numeric array to a specified location within the
+    (graphics) screen buffer.
+
+         <U>x</U>,<U>y</U>    The coordinates of the upper left corner of the screen
+                area that will receive the array image.
+
+       <U>array</U>    A numeric array.
+
+      <U>action</U>    An optional argument that allows you to control the
+                interaction of the incoming data with the data currently
+                in the screen buffer. Must be one of the following:
+
+                PSET     Replaces each screen location with data from the
+                         array.
+
+                PRESET   Replaces current screen values with values that
+                         are complementary to those held in the array. In
+                         medium resolution, a value of 0 in the array
+                         plots an attribute of 3, and vice versa. A value
+                         of 1 in the array plots an attribute of 2, and
+                         vice versa. In high resolution, a value of 0 in
+                         the array plots an attribute of 1, and vice
+                         versa.
+
+                XOR      Array values are XORed with current screen
+                         values. This is the default action.
+
+                OR       Array values are ORed with current screen values.
+
+                AND      Array values are ANDed with current screen
+                         values.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    Coordinates outside the current screen or window will
+                produce a runtime error when PUT is executed.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng12b5a.html">GET (Graphics)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2a131.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2a131.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..246fccd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2a131.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng29bbc.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2a3e4.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>RANDOMIZE                Reseed Random Number Generator</B>
+
+ <B>RANDOMIZE</B> [<U>expression</U>]   or   <B>RANDOMIZE</B> <B>TIMER</B>
+
+    Supplies a new seed for the pseudo-random number generator.
+
+  <U>expression</U>    A numeric expression; a seed for the random number
+                generator.
+
+       TIMER    If the keyword TIMER is supplied as argument, QuickBASIC
+                gets a new seed from the internal clock.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If no argument is given, QuickBASIC prompts for a number
+                between -32768 and 32767. Each random number seed produces
+                a unique sequence of random numbers, but the same seed
+                always produces the same sequence.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2a3e4.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2a3e4.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..65d5874
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2a3e4.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2a131.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2a6f2.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>READ                     Assign DATA Items to Variables</B>
+
+ <B>READ</B> <U>variable</U> [,<U>variable</U>]...
+
+    Assigns values in DATA items to specified variables.
+
+    <U>variable</U>    A numeric or string variable, or an array element.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    A single READ statement can assign multiple DATA items to
+                multiple variables; or several READ statements can assign
+                the same DATA item to several variables.
+
+                Unless a RESTORE statement is executed, QuickBASIC moves
+                to the next DATA item with each READ assignment. If
+                QuickBASIC runs out of DATA items to READ, an Out of Data
+                error occurs.
+
+                If the variable and the data item do not match in type, a
+                Syntax Error occurs.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngbf36.html">DATA</A>
+<A HREF="ng2af74.html">RESTORE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2a6f2.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2a6f2.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4164280
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2a6f2.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2a3e4.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2a9f5.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>REDIM                    Redimension Array</B>
+
+ <B>REDIM</B> [SHARED] <U>arrayname</U>(<U>subscripts</U>) [<U>arrayname</U>(<U>subscripts</U>)...]
+
+    Changes the size of the dimensions in one or more dynamic arrays.
+
+   <U>arrayname</U>    The name of a dynamic array.
+
+  <U>subscripts</U>    The new dimensions of an array.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    Only dynamic arrays may be REDIMensioned. To declare an
+                array dynamic, use a variable in its original DIM
+                statement, or use the $DYNAMIC metacommand.
+
+                The size of array dimensions may be changed via REDIM, but
+                the number of dimensions may not.
+
+                When REDIM is executed, all array elements are
+                reinitialized to 0 (numeric) and null (string).
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngdcd0.html">DIM</A>
+<A HREF="ngff2b.html">ERASE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2a9f5.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2a9f5.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..944a58d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2a9f5.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2a6f2.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2adfa.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>REM                      Comment or Metacommand</B>
+
+ <B>REM</B> [<U>remark</U>]   or   <B>REM</B> $METACOMMAND: <U>argument</U>
+
+    Adds explanatory commentary to a program listing or issues a compiler
+    metacommand.
+
+      <U>remark</U>    Commentary text, ignored by QuickBASIC.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    QuickBASIC does not execute REM statements, but a program
+                may branch to a REM statement; execution continues with
+                the first executable statement following the REM.
+
+                A REM statement must be the last statement in a program
+                line (QuickBASIC ignores everything after the REM
+                keyword).
+
+                A single quote mark (apostrophe) can is equivalent to REM,
+                with the following exceptions:
+
+                    A single quote can be used to attach a comment at the
+                    end of an existing program statement. A REM comment
+                    cannot written this way; it must be in a program
+                    statement by itself.
+
+                    A single quote cannot be used before a metastatement.
+
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng47f3.html">$DYNAMIC</A>
+<A HREF="ng49b8.html">$INCLUDE</A>
+<A HREF="ng4c6c.html">$STATIC</A>
+<A HREF="ng4ddd.html">'</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2ac8.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2ac8.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5036fb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2ac8.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng282a.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2d59.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>-                        Subtraction/Negation Operator</B>
+
+    <B>Subtraction</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 - exp2</B>
+
+    The - operator performs subtraction. If the expression involves
+    operands of more than one precision, all operands are converted to the
+    same level--that of the highest-precision operand in the expression--
+    before the expression is evaluated.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any numeric expression.
+
+
+
+    <B>Negation</B>
+
+ <B>- exp1</B>
+
+    As a unary operator (placed before a single numeric expression), -
+    performs negation; that is, it reverse the sign of its operand.
+
+        <U>exp1</U>    Any numeric expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng4642.html">^^</A>
+<A HREF="ng267b.html">*</A>
+<A HREF="ng2d59.html">/</A>
+<A HREF="ng447e.html">\</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c6b1.html">MOD</A>
+<A HREF="ng282a.html">+</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2adfa.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2adfa.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7710f34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2adfa.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2a9f5.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2af74.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>RESET                    Close All Disk Files</B>
+
+ <B>RESET</B>
+
+    Closes all disk files and flushes all buffers.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The difference between RESET and CLOSE (with no file
+                numbers) is that CLOSE closes both disk files and other
+                I/O devices; RESET closes disk files only.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng7fd0.html">CLOSE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2af74.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2af74.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ac5bce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2af74.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2adfa.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b195.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>RESTORE                  Reset DATA Item Pointer</B>
+
+ <B>RESTORE</B> [{<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>}]
+
+    Resets the DATA item pointer to the first item in the first DATA
+    statement or to the first DATA item in a specified DATA statement.
+
+     <U>linenum</U>    A program line number.
+
+   <U>linelabel</U>    A valid line label.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the statement at {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>} is not a DATA
+                statement, BASIC RESTOREs to the first following DATA
+                statement.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2b195.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2b195.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ead669a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2b195.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2af74.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b513.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>RESUME                   Continue after Error Trap</B>
+
+ <B>RESUME</B> [0]   or   <B>RESUME</B> NEXT   or   <B>RESUME</B> {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>}
+
+    Allows program execution to continue after an ON ERROR GOTO routine
+    has run.
+
+           0    RESUME by itself or with the optional dummy argument 0
+                causes the program to continue from the line that produced
+                the error.
+
+        NEXT    RESUME NEXT causes program execution to continue at the
+                line following the line that produced the error.
+
+     <U>linenum</U>    RESUME {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>} causes program execution to
+   <U>linelabel</U>    continue at a specified line number.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    All ON ERROR GOTO routines must end with some form of
+                RESUME statement.
+
+                A RESUME that is not part of an error trapping routine
+                produces a RESUME without Error error.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng1ded6.html">ON ERROR</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2b513.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2b513.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0718de3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2b513.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2b195.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b724.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>RETURN                   Return from Subroutine</B>
+
+ <B>RETURN</B> [{<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>}]
+
+    Transfers program execution from a subroutine to the line following
+    the GOSUB, or to another specified line.
+
+     <U>linenum</U>    A program line number.
+
+   <U>linelabel</U>    A valid line label.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    {<U>linenum</U> | <U>linelabel</U>}, if used, must refer to a line at
+                the same program level from which the subroutine was
+                called.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng13094.html">GOSUB</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2b724.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2b724.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52c0f28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2b724.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2b513.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b8f2.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>RIGHT$                   Substring at Right</B>
+
+ <B>RIGHT$(</B><U>strexpr</U>,<U>n</U>)
+
+    Returns the rightmost <U>n</U> characters of a string.
+
+     <U>strexpr</U>    A string expression.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If <U>n</U> is larger than LEN(<U>strexpr</U>), RIGHT$ returns all of
+                <U>strexpr</U>.
+
+                If <U>n</U> is 0, RIGHT$ returns a null string.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng17755.html">LEFT$</A>
+<A HREF="ng1b754.html">MID$ (Function)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2b8f2.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2b8f2.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..93e2ca3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2b8f2.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2b724.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ba71.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>RMDIR                    Remove Subdirectory</B>
+
+ <B>RMDIR</B> <U>pathname</U>
+
+    Removes a specified subdirectory.
+
+    <U>pathname</U>    A string expression, of 127 or fewer characters, that
+                follows DOS path-naming conventions.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The specified subdirectory must be empty.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng7372.html">CHDIR</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c0c5.html">MKDIR</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2ba71.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2ba71.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20b71f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2ba71.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2b8f2.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2bce4.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>RND                      Random Number</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>RND</B>[(<U>n</U>)]
+
+    Generates a single-precision random number in the range of 0 to 1.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If <U>n</U> is omitted or is positive, RND returns the next
+                random number in the current sequence.
+
+                If <U>n</U> is 0, RND returns the last (most recent) random
+                number in the current sequence.
+
+                If <U>n</U> is negative, BASIC uses <U>n</U> to reseed the random number
+                function. The first number in the reseeded random number
+                series is returned.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2a131.html">RANDOMIZE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2bce4.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2bce4.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..599b42f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2bce4.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2ba71.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2bf9a.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>RSET                     Right-Justify Data in Field Variable</B>
+
+ <B>RSET</B> <U>fieldvar</U> = <U>strexpr</U>
+
+    Right-justifies string data in a specified field of the random buffer,
+    in preparation for a PUT statement. Or right-justifies string data in
+    an ordinary string variable.
+
+    <U>fieldvar</U>    A variable defined in a FIELD statement; specifies the
+                variable into which <U>strexpr</U> is to be right-justified.
+
+     <U>strexpr</U>    A string expression.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If LEN(<U>strexpr</U>) is less than LEN(<U>fieldvar</U>), then <U>fieldvar</U>
+                is padded on the left with space characters.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng1b48a.html">LSET</A>
+<A HREF="ng298af.html">PUT (File I/O)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2bf9a.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2bf9a.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2545e57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2bf9a.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2bce4.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2c35f.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>RUN                      Execute Program</B>
+
+ <B>RUN</B> [{<U>linenum</U> | <U>filespec</U>}]
+
+    Executes the current program from the beginning or from a specified
+    line number; or loads a program from disk and runs it.
+
+     <U>linenum</U>    A program line number.
+
+    <U>filespec</U>    A string expression that follows DOS file naming
+                conventions.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If no argument is given, Quick BASIC begins execution at
+                the lowest numbered line. This line must be part of the
+                main program (not in a subprogram or multiline function).
+                Program execution may be started from a specified line
+                number, but not from a specified alphanumeric label.
+
+                If a program is run from disk (RUN <U>filespec</U>), QuickBASIC
+                first erases the program currently in memory. It also
+                closes any files left open by the current program (the
+                Interpreter's ,R option is not supported by QuickBASIC).
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng6e8b.html">CHAIN</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2c35f.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2c35f.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ea633dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2c35f.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2bf9a.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2c52c.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>SADD                     String Address</B>
+
+ <B>SADD</B>(<U>strexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns the address of a string expression.
+
+     <U>strexpr</U>    A string expression.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    Strings may be relocated in memory during program
+                execution, as a result of house-cleaning, opening or
+                closing of files, or allocation of string variables.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng1250d.html">FRE</A>
+<A HREF="ng23cd7.html">PEEK</A>
+<A HREF="ng2627a.html">POKE</A>
+<A HREF="ng31e18.html">VARPTR</A>
+<A HREF="ng321ab.html">VARPTR$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2c52c.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2c52c.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f26abd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2c52c.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2c35f.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2c723.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>SCREEN                   Character at Specified Location             Function</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>SCREEN</B>(<U>row</U>,<U>column</U>[,<U>z</U>])
+
+    Returns the ASCII or color information about a specified screen
+    location.
+
+     <U>row</U>,<U>col</U>    Absolute coordinates of a screen location.
+
+           <U>z</U>    If omitted or 0, SCREEN returns the ASCII value of the
+                    character at <U>row</U>,<U>col</U>.
+
+   ---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The <U>z</U> argument is valid only in text mode.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2c723.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2c723.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1379be4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2c723.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2c52c.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2d400.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>SCREEN                   Set Screen Attributes                      Statement</B>
+
+ <B>SCREEN</B> [<U>mode</U>][,[<U>colorflag</U>]][,[<U>apage</U>]][,[<U>vpage</U>]]
+
+    Sets screen parameters for use by subsequent statements.
+
+        <U>mode</U>    A numeric expression. Must be 0, 1, 2, 7, 8, 9, or 10. See
+                table below.
+
+   <U>colorflag</U>    A numeric expression. Turns color on or off for composite
+                monitors (color is always on for RGB monitors). In text
+                mode, a zero value turns color off; a nonzero value turns
+                color on. Works the opposite way in medium-resolution
+                graphics mode: A zero value turns color on, while a
+                nonzero value turns color off. In screen mode 2, <U>colorflag</U>
+                is irrelevant.
+
+       <U>apage</U>    An integer expression specifying the active screen page
+                (the page written to by statements that output to the
+                screen). Valid only in screen modes 0, 7, 8, 9, and 10.
+                Legal values depend on screen mode (see table below).
+
+       <U>vpage</U>    An integer expression specifying the visual screen page
+                (the page displayed on screen; may be different from the
+                active page). Valid only in screen modes 0, 7, 8, 9, and
+                10. Legal values depend on screen mode (see table below).
+
+    <B>Screen modes:</B>
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+SCREEN 0  | 40 x 25 text | 16 colors, 2 attributes (CGA) | MDA, CGA, EGA
+          | 80 x 25 text | 16 colors, 16 attributes (EGA |
+----------+--------------+-------------------------------+--------------
+SCREEN 1  | 320 x 200    | 16 colors, 4 attributes       | CGA, EGA
+          | 40 x 25 text |                               |
+----------+--------------+-------------------------------+--------------
+SCREEN 2  | 640 x 200    | 16 colors, 2 attributes       | CGA, EGA
+          | 80 x 25 text |                               |
+----------+--------------+-------------------------------+--------------
+SCREEN 7  | 320 x 200    | 16 colors, 16 attributes      | EGA only
+          | 40 x 25 text | 2 pages if 64K on EGA         |
+          |              | 4 pages if 128K on EGA        |
+          |              | 8 pages if 256K on EGA        |
+----------+--------------+-------------------------------+--------------
+SCREEN 8  | 640 x 200    | 16 colors, 16 attributes      | EGA only
+          | 80 x 25 text | 1 page if 64K on EGA          |
+          |              | 2 pages if 128K on EGA        |
+          |              | 4 pages if 256K on EGA        |
+----------+--------------+-------------------------------+--------------
+SCREEN 9  | 640 x 350    | 16 colors, 16 attributes      | EGA only
+          | 80 x 25 text |    if &gt;64K on EGA;            |
+          |   in 8 x 14  | 16 colors, 4 attributes       |
+          |   matrix     |    if 64K on EGA;             |
+          |              | 2 pages if 256K on EGA        |
+----------+--------------+-------------------------------+--------------
+SCREEN 10 | 640 x 350    | 9 pseudo colors, 4 attributes | EGA only
+          | 80 x 25 text | 2 pages if 256K on EGA        |
+          |   in 8 x 14  |                               |
+          |   matrix     |                               |
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    All arguments are optional; omitted parameters retain
+                former values.
+
+                All display pages share a single cursor. Therefore, it's
+                advisable to save cursor position (with POS and CSRLIN)
+                when switching pages.
+
+                If a valid SCREEN statement results in a new display mode,
+                BASIC erases the screen and sets colors to white
+                (foreground) on black (background and border). If a SCREEN
+                statement does not produce a new display mode, BASIC does
+                not erase the screen.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng86fb.html">COLOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng23171.html">PALETTE</A>
+<A HREF="ng23637.html">PALETTE USING</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2d400.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2d400.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..95fb8b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2d400.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2c723.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2db1d.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>SELECT                   Case Structure</B>
+
+ <B>SELECT</B> <B>CASE</B> <U>expression</U>
+ <B>CASE</B> <U>testlist</U>
+ .
+ . <U>statements</U>
+ .
+ [CASE <U>testlist</U>
+ .
+ . <U>statements</U>
+ .]
+ [CASE ELSE
+ .
+ . <U>statements</U>
+ .]
+ <B>END</B> <B>SELECT</B>
+
+    Compares an expression against one or more values and directs
+    execution flow in accordance with the result.
+
+  <U>expression</U>    An expression of any type.
+
+    <U>testlist</U>    A comma-delimited list of expressions (see further
+                description, below) that test the value of expression.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The elements of a given <U>testlist</U> argument are implicitly
+                ORed. Therefore, the statements following CASE <U>testlist</U>
+                are executed if any member of <U>testlist</U> is true. Following
+                execution of those statements, control passes to the first
+                statement following END SELECT.
+
+                The SELECT CASE structure may include any number of CASE
+                <U>testlist</U> clauses but must include at least one. All CASE
+                <U>testlist</U> clauses must appear before the optional CASE ELSE
+                clause.
+
+                The statements following CASE ELSE are executed if all
+                elements in all CASE <U>testlist</U> clauses are false.
+
+                The <U>testlist</U> argument may include the following kinds of
+                tests: equality, inequality, greater than, less than, and
+                range. Examples of each are as follows:
+
+                    CASE 100
+                    CASE IS = 100
+                    CASE IS &lt;&gt; "Yomama"
+                    CASE IS &gt; -5
+                    CASE IS &lt; 2E15
+                    CASE 5 TO 10
+
+                Note that the = operator is optional for the equality
+                test, and that the keyword IS must be used before any
+                relational operator. In the range test, the smaller of the
+                two values must appear before the keyword TO.
+
+                The SELECT CASE structure is equivalent to a set of nested
+                IF/THEN/ELSE statements but produces more readable source
+                code.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2d59.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2d59.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69ef72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2d59.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2ac8.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f41.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>/                        Division Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 / exp2</B>
+
+    The / operator performs floating-point division. If the expression
+    involves operands of more than one precision, all operands are
+    converted to the same level--that of the highest-precision operand in
+    the expression--before the expression is evaluated.
+
+        <U>exp1</U>    Any numeric expression.
+
+        <U>exp2</U>    Any numeric expression that does not evalute to 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng4642.html">^^</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ac8.html">-</A>
+<A HREF="ng267b.html">*</A>
+<A HREF="ng447e.html">\</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c6b1.html">MOD</A>
+<A HREF="ng282a.html">+</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2db1d.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2db1d.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..40fe66b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2db1d.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2d400.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2dcc2.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>SGN                      Sign of Number</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>SGN</B>(<U>numexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns the sign of its numeric argument.
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>    A numeric expression.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If <U>numexpr</U> is positive, SGN(<U>numexpr</U>) returns 1.
+
+                If <U>numexpr</U> is 0, SGN(<U>numexpr</U>) returns 0.
+
+                If <U>numexpr</U> is negative, SGN(<U>numexpr</U>) returns -1.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2dcc2.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2dcc2.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc36ee4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2dcc2.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2db1d.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2e004.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>SHARED                   Declare Global Variables</B>
+
+ <B>SHARED</B> <U>varlist</U>
+
+    Declares one or more variables in a subprogram global.
+
+     <U>varlist</U>    A comma-delimited list of valid variable and/or array
+                names; array names should be followed by empty
+                parentheses.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The SHARED statement may be used only within a subprogram,
+                and makes main program variables available only to the
+                current subprogram.
+
+                The SHARED attribute, in contrast, may be used in a COMMON
+                or DIM statement at the main program level to make
+                variables accessible by all subprograms in a module.
+
+                The SHARED statement does not make variables available to
+                library routines or subprograms compiled separately.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="nga150.html">COMMON</A>
+<A HREF="ngdcd0.html">DIM</A>
+<A HREF="ng2fea2.html">SUB...END SUB</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2e004.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2e004.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..227afc7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2e004.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2dcc2.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2e3eb.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>SHELL                    Execute DOS Command</B>
+
+ <B>SHELL</B> [<U>commandstr</U>]
+
+    Loads a secondary copy of COMMAND.COM and, optionally, executes an
+    .EXE, .COM, or .BAT program, or an internal DOS command.
+
+  <U>commandstr</U>    A string expression. If omitted, SHELL leaves the user at
+                the DOS command prompt. To return to the QuickBASIC
+                program, the user types EXIT.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the SHELLed program is a batch file, its last statement
+                should be EXIT.
+
+                Parameters may be passed to the SHELLed program in the
+                usual DOS fashion. Any words in <U>commandstr</U> that are
+                separated from the program name by one or more spaces are
+                considered parameters for the SHELLed program.
+
+                It is not advisable to run TSR programs via SHELL. They
+                may cause a crash on return to QuickBASIC.
+
+                After the specified DOS command or program terminates,
+                control is returned to the line following the SHELL
+                statement.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2e3eb.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2e3eb.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c0c423d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2e3eb.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2e004.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2e58f.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>SIN                      Sine</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>SIN</B>(<U>numexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns the sine of the angle whose value, in radians, is expressed in
+    <U>numexpr</U>.
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>    A numeric expression.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the argument is a double-precision expression, SIN
+                returns a double-precision value. Otherwise single
+                precision is returned.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2e58f.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2e58f.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74278a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2e58f.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2e3eb.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2e956.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>SOUND                    Sound the Speaker</B>
+
+ <B>SOUND</B> <U>freq</U>,<U>duration</U>
+
+    Sounds the speaker at a specified frequency for a specified length of
+    time.
+
+        <U>freq</U>    A numeric expression in the range 37 to 32767; specifies,
+                in Hertz, the frequency (pitch) of the tone to be sounded.
+
+    <U>duration</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 65535. Specifies
+                the length of time the tone is to be sounded, in units of
+                clock ticks. Each clock tick is 1/18.2 (0.054945054) of a
+                second.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    QuickBASIC continues program execution while a tone is
+                being sounded, unless a second SOUND statement is
+                encountered--in which case, QuickBASIC waits until the
+                first tone is finished, then begins executing the second
+                SOUND statement. The MB parameter of the PLAY statement,
+                however, can be used to enable buffering of SOUND
+                statements.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng24dc8.html">PLAY (Statement)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2e956.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2e956.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c679b45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2e956.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2e58f.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ea77.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>SPACE$                   String of </B><B>n</B><B> Spaces</B>
+
+ <U>s$</U> = <B>SPACE$</B>(<U>n</U>)
+
+    Returns a string consisting of a specified number of space characters.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 32767.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng1b48a.html">LSET</A>
+<A HREF="ng28508.html">PRINT USING</A>
+<A HREF="ng2bce4.html">RSET</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ea77.html">SPC</A>
+<A HREF="ng2fc55.html">STRING$</A>
+<A HREF="ng30654.html">TAB</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2ea77.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2ea77.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b6238b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2ea77.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2e956.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ed3b.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>SPC                      Skip </B><B><U>n</B></U><B> Spaces in a PRINT statement</B>
+
+ <B>PRINT</B> <B>SPC</B>(<U>n</U>)
+
+    Skips a specified number of spaces in a PRINT, LPRINT, or PRINT #
+    statement.
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 32767.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If <U>n</U> is larger than the width of the output device (as
+                defined by WIDTH), QuickBASIC skips <U>n</U> MOD <U>width</U> spaces.
+
+                If the SPC function is used at the end of a list of items
+                to print, QuickBASIC behaves as though the PRINT statement
+                were terminated with a semicolon; it suppresses the usual
+                carriage return and line feed.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2e956.html">SPACE$</A>
+<A HREF="ng30654.html">TAB</A>
+<A HREF="ng3395b.html">WIDTH</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2ed3b.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2ed3b.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0481552
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2ed3b.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2ea77.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2edd5.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>SQR                      Square Root</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>SQR</B>(<U>n</U>)
+
+    Returns the square root of a number.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A positive numeric expression.
+
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2edd5.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2edd5.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..93203f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2edd5.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2ed3b.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f2ce.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>STATIC                   Declare Local Variable(s)</B>
+
+ <B>STATIC</B> <U>varlist</U>
+
+    Declares one or more function or subprogram variables as local and
+    memory-based (as opposed to stack-based).
+
+     <U>varlist</U>    A comma-delimited list of valid variable and/or array
+                names. Array names must be followed by an integer enclosed
+                within parentheses; the integer specifies the number of
+                dimensions in the array.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The STATIC statement may be used only within multiline
+                function definitions and subprograms.
+
+                Variables used within multiline function definitions are
+                global by default. Variables used within subprograms are
+                local by default.
+
+                A STATIC variable is a local variable whose value doesn't
+                change between subprogram CALLs. Ordinary local variables
+                are reinitialized with each CALL. To guarantee that a
+                variable's value will not change between CALLs, declare
+                the variable STATIC.
+
+                The STATIC statement should not be confused with the
+                STATIC attribute of the SUB statement (which indicates
+                that a subprogram is nonrecursive) or the $STATIC
+                metacommand (which statically allocates memory for
+                arrays).
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngc7f7.html">DEF FN</A>
+<A HREF="ng2dcc2.html">SHARED</A>
+<A HREF="ng2fea2.html">SUB...END SUB</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f2ce.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f2ce.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e1d23b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f2ce.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2edd5.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f4d7.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>STICK                    Joystick Coordinates</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>STICK</B>(<U>n</U>)
+
+    Returns the x or y coordinate for joystick A or B.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 3. Determines what
+                kind of information is returned, as follows:
+
+                0   Returns x coordinate of joystick A. A STICK(0) call
+                    must be performed before STICK(1), STICK(2), or
+                    STICK(3) can be used.
+                1   Returns the y coordinate of joystick A.
+                2   Returns the x coordinate of joystick B.
+                3   Returns the y coordinate of joystick B.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f41.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f41.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b46f430
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f41.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2d59.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng330f.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>&lt;                        Less than Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 &lt; exp2</B>
+
+    The operator &lt; is a relational operator. If the value of <U>exp1</U> is less
+    than that of <U>exp2</U>, the result of <U>exp1</U> &lt; <U>exp2</U> is -1; otherwise the
+    result is 0. In IF statements, BASIC regards 0 as equivalent to FALSE
+    and all nonzero values as equivalent to TRUE.
+
+    If the operands are string expressions, BASIC compares the ASCII
+    values of the first character in each expression. If the first
+    characters have the same ASCII value, BASIC then evaluates the second
+    characters, and so on. If one string terminates before the other, and
+    the characters in each string are identical to that point, the shorter
+    string is considered "less" than the longer one.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any numeric or string expression, but <U>exp1</U> and <U>exp2</U> must
+                either both be numeric or both be strings; otherwise a
+                Type Mismatch error occurs.
+
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng3938.html">=</A>
+<A HREF="ng3702.html"><></A>
+<A HREF="ng3ce3.html">></A>
+<A HREF="ng330f.html"><=</A>
+<A HREF="ng40a9.html">>=</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f4d7.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f4d7.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..733854c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f4d7.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2f2ce.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f606.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>STOP                     Halt Program</B>
+
+ <B>STOP</B>
+
+    Stops program interruption and returns control to DOS or QuickBASIC.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    There is no CONT statement in QuickBASIC. Therefore STOP
+                is equivalent to END.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f606.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f606.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0d75dd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f606.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2f4d7.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f749.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>STR$                     String Representation of Numeric Expression</B>
+
+ <U>s$</U> = <B>STR$</B>(<U>numexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns the character representation of a number.
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>    A numeric expression. If <U>numexpr</U> is positive, the string
+                includes a leading space character (to accommodate a plus
+                sign).
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng31b33.html">VAL</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f749.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f749.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c0fea46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f749.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2f606.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f914.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>STRIG                    Enable/Disable the STRIG Function          Statement</B>
+
+ <B>STRIG</B> {ON | OFF | STOP}
+
+    Enables or disables the use of the STRIG(<U>n</U>) function.
+
+          ON    STRIG ON enables joystick trapping.
+
+         OFF    STRIG OFF disables joystick trapping.
+
+        STOP    STRIG STOP inhibits trapping. QuickBASIC continues
+                checking the joysticks, however, and if an event occurs, a
+                subsequent STRIG ON results in an immediate trap.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2f914.html">STRIG (Function)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f914.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f914.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8d55914
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2f914.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2f749.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2fc55.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>STRIG                    Status of Joystick Buttons                  Function</B>
+
+ <B>STRIG</B>(<U>n</U>)
+
+    Returns status information about the joystick buttons.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 3. Determines the
+                kind of information returned, as follows:
+
+                0   Returns -1 if button A has been pressed since the most
+                    recent STRIG(0) call; otherwise, returns 0.
+                1   Returns -1 if button A is currently pressed; otherwise
+                    returns 0.
+                2   Returns -1 if button B has been pressed since the most
+                    recent STRIG(2) call; otherwise returns 0.
+                3   Returns -1 if button B is currently pressed; otherwise
+                    returns 0.
+
+   -------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    A STRIG ON statement must be executed before the STRIG(<U>n</U>)
+                function can be used.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2f2ce.html">STICK</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f749.html">STRIG (Statement)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2fc55.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2fc55.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20aac32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2fc55.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2f914.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng2fea2.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>STRING$                  String of Specified Length and Character</B>
+
+ <U>s$</U> = <B>STRING$</B>(<U>m</U>,<U>n</U>) or <U>s$</U> = <B>STRING$</B>(<U>m</U>,<U>stringexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns a string of specified length, whose characters all have the
+    same specified ASCII value.
+
+           <U>m</U>    A numeric expression; specifies the length of the string.
+
+           <U>n</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 255; specifies the
+                ASCII value of the character to be returned <U>m</U> times.
+
+  <U>stringexpr</U>    A string expression. STRING$(<U>m</U>,<U>stringexpr</U>) returns the
+                first character of <U>stringexpr</U> <U>m</U> times.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2fea2.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2fea2.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..67a0b3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng2fea2.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2fc55.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng30480.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>SUB...END SUB            Define Subprogram</B>
+
+ <B>SUB</B> <U>globalname</U> [(<U>parmlist</U>)] <B>STATIC</B>
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ [EXIT SUB]
+ .
+ .
+ .
+ <B>END</B> <B>SUB</B>
+
+    Defines a subprogram.
+
+  <U>globalname</U>    A variable name of 31 or fewer characters. globalname may
+                not appear in any other SUB statement in the same program
+                or in the user library.
+
+    <U>parmlist</U>    One or more simple variables or arrays passed as
+                parameters when the subprogram is CALLed. Names of array
+                variables must be followed by an integer enclosed in
+                parentheses; the integer specifies the number of
+                dimensions in the array. Parameters are passed by
+                reference.
+
+      STATIC    Indicates that the subprogram is nonrecursive. QuickBASIC
+                3.0 does not support recursive subprograms, so the STATIC
+                attribute is mandatory.
+
+    EXIT SUB    Provides optional exit from within a subprogram.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    Variables used within subprograms are local unless
+                declared otherwise by means of a SHARED statement.
+                Nevertheless, when a subprogram is exited and later
+                reentered, the value of a local variable may have changed.
+                To guarantee that a variable's value will not change
+                between subprogram CALLs, declare the variable STATIC by
+                means of a STATIC statement (not to be confused with the
+                STATIC attribute of the SUB statement).
+
+                You may not enter or exit a subprogram by means of GOSUB,
+                GOTO, or RETURN.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng5e67.html">CALL</A>
+<A HREF="ng2dcc2.html">SHARED</A>
+<A HREF="ng2edd5.html">STATIC</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30480.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30480.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74aeabc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30480.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2fea2.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng3055b.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>SWAP                     Exchange the Values of Two Variables</B>
+
+ <B>SWAP</B> <U>var1</U>,<U>var2</U>
+
+    Exchanges the values of two variables. The arguments may be variables
+    of any type, but they must match in type.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3055b.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3055b.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b5780d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3055b.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng30480.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng30654.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>SYSTEM                   Return to Operating System</B>
+
+ <B>SYSTEM</B>
+
+    Closes all open files and returns control to DOS (for standalone EXE
+    programs) or to QuickBASIC (for programs compiled and run from within
+    QB).
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngf078.html">END</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f4d7.html">STOP</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30654.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30654.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5a3e141
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30654.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng3055b.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng309ca.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>TAB                      Tab to a Specified Position</B>
+
+ <B>PRINT</B> <B>TAB</B>(<U>column</U>)
+
+    Moves to a specified print position. May be used in conjunction with
+    PRINT, LPRINT, and PRINT #.
+
+      <U>column</U>    A numeric expression.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the current print (or screen) position is already to
+                the right of <U>column</U>, TAB moves to position <U>column</U> on the
+                next line.
+
+                If <U>column</U> is larger than the width of output device,
+                TAB(<U>column</U>) moves to <U>column</U> MOD <U>width</U>.
+
+                If <U>column</U> is less than 1, TAB(<U>column</U>) is treated as
+                TAB(1).
+
+                If the TAB function comes at the end of a list of data
+                items in a PRINT statement, BASIC behaves as if the PRINT
+                statement were terminated by a semicolon; it suppresses
+                the usual carriage return and line feed.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2e956.html">SPACE$</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ea77.html">SPC</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng309ca.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng309ca.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9f0d3b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng309ca.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng30654.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng30bd9.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>TAN                      Tangent</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>TAN</B>(<U>numexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns the tangent of the angle whose value, in radians, is expressed
+    in <U>numexpr</U>.
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>    A numeric expression.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the argument is a double-precision expression, TAN
+                returns a double-precision value. Otherwise single
+                precision is returned.
+
+                If TAN overflows, execution is halted, unless the error is
+                trapped by an error-handling routine.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30bd9.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30bd9.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eb69528
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30bd9.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng309ca.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng30cb3.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>TIME$                    Get System Time                             Function</B>
+
+<U>s$</U> = <B>TIME$</B>
+
+    Returns the current system time, as an eight-character string in the
+    form hh:mm:ss.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng30cb3.html">TIME$ (Statement)</A>
+<A HREF="ng30e94.html">TIMER (Function)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30cb3.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30cb3.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0f3b50f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30cb3.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng30bd9.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng30e94.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>TIME$                    Set System Time                            Statement</B>
+
+ <B>TIME$</B> = <U>stringexpr</U>
+
+    Sets the current system time.
+
+  <U>stringexpr</U>    A string expression in the form "hh" or "hh:mm" or
+                "hh:mm:ss". Leading 0s may be omitted in any of the three
+                fields.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    This command resets the AT system clock in nonvolatile
+                memory when QuickBASIC is run under DOS 3.3.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng30bd9.html">TIME$ (Function)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30e94.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30e94.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74c1173
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30e94.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng30cb3.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng30f52.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>TIMER                    Number of Seconds since Midnight            Function</B>
+
+<U>y</U> = <B>TIMER</B>
+
+    Returns, in single-precision, the number of seconds that have elapsed
+    since midnight.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30f52.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30f52.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f21c738
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng30f52.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng30e94.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng31353.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>TIMER                    Enable/Disable Timer Trap                  Statement</B>
+
+ <B>TIMER</B> {ON | OFF | STOP}
+
+    Enables or disables event trapping via ON TIMER.
+
+          ON    Causes QB to check the timer.
+
+         OFF    Causes QB not to check the timer. This is the default
+                condition.
+
+        STOP    Also disables trapping, but QB continues checking. If the
+                specified amount of time has elapsed, a subsequent TIMER
+                ON results in an immediate trap (provided an ON TIMER
+                statement with a nonzero line number has been executed).
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the "Checking Between Statements" option is in effect,
+                QB checks after each statement. If the "Event Trapping"
+                option is selected, QB checks after each new program line.
+                If neither option is selected, no trapping takes place.
+
+                For command-line compilation, /v enables checking after
+                each statement, and /w enables checking after each new
+                line. If neither switch is used, no trapping takes place.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng1ff42.html">ON TIMER</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng31353.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng31353.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36571a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng31353.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng30f52.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng313b4.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>TROFF                    Trace Off</B>
+
+ <B>TROFF</B>
+
+    Turns off trace mode.
+
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng313b4.html">TRON</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng313b4.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng313b4.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..245b653
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng313b4.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng31353.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng314eb.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>TRON                     Trace On</B>
+
+ <B>TRON</B>
+
+    Turns on trace mode.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    In trace mode, QuickBASIC produces an animated trace,
+                highlighting each program statement in reverse video as
+                it's executed.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng31353.html">TROFF</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng314eb.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng314eb.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ab902ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng314eb.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng313b4.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng31698.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>UBOUND                   Upper Bound of Array Dimension</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>UBOUND</B>(<U>array</U>[,<U>dimension</U>])
+
+    Returns the highest subscript for a given dimension of a given array.
+
+       <U>array</U>    The name of an array.
+
+   <U>dimension</U>    The number of a dimension. The first dimension of an array
+                is 1, the second is 2, and so on. For one-dimensional
+                arrays, this argument can be omitted.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng175c1.html">LBOUND</A>
+<A HREF="ng22467.html">OPTION BASE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng31698.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng31698.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dc9a05e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng31698.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng314eb.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng31b33.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>UNLOCK                   Remove File or Record Access Lock</B>
+
+ <B>LOCK</B> [#] <U>filenum</U> [,{<U>record</U> | [<U>start</U>] TO <U>end</U>}]
+ .
+ . [statements]
+ .
+ UNLOCK [#] <U>filenum</U> [,{<U>record</U> | [<U>start</U>] TO <U>end</U>}]
+
+    Removes a previously set file or record lock.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which the file was OPENed.
+
+      <U>record</U>    The number of a record to be LOCKed or UNLOCKed.
+
+       <U>start</U>    The number of the first record to be LOCKed or UNLOCKed.
+
+         <U>end</U>    The number of the last record to be LOCKed or UNLOCKed.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the file specified by <U>filenum</U> has been opened for
+                random access, you may lock either a single record number
+                (with the record argument) or a range of record numbers.
+                If you specify a range and omit the <U>start</U> argument, all
+                records from the beginning of the file to <U>end</U> are locked.
+
+                If the file specified by <U>filenum</U> was opened for sequential
+                input or output, the entire file is locked.
+
+                LOCK requires DOS 3.0 or later and SHARE.EXE.
+
+                It is important to UNLOCK all LOCKed records before
+                closing the file.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng1905a.html">LOCK</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng31b33.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng31b33.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1dbe87d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng31b33.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng31698.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng31e18.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>VAL                      Numeric Value of a String</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>VAL</B>(<U>stringexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns the numeric value represented by a string expression.
+
+  <U>stringexpr</U>    A string expression.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    VAL attempts to extract a number from the first characters
+                of its argument. In doing so, it ignores leading blanks,
+                tabs, and line feeds, and treats a single hyphen as
+                signifying negation. For example, VAL("   -32 Main
+                Street") returns -32.
+
+                If the first character in the argument (or the first
+                character following all space and tab characters) is a
+                letter, VAL returns 0. Thus, for example, VAL("Yomama")
+                returns 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng5456.html">ASC</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f606.html">STR$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng31e18.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng31e18.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6cb664a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng31e18.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng31b33.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng321ab.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>VARPTR                   Offset of Variable or Offset of File Buffer</B>
+
+ <B>VARPTR</B>(<U>variable</U>)   or   <B>VARPTR</B>(#<U>filenum</U>)
+
+    Returns the offset address of a variable, or of a file I/O buffer,
+    within the current data segment.
+
+    <U>variable</U>    The name of a string or numeric variable, or an array
+                element.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which a file was OPENed.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The offset returned is a single-precision value in the
+                range 0 to 1048575. For variables, the offset is that of
+                the first byte associated with the specified variable.
+
+                If the variable has not yet been used in an assignment
+                statement, an Illegal Function Call error results.
+
+                When using VARPTR with array variables, be aware that
+                array variables are moved in memory every time a new
+                nonarray variable is assigned.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng321ab.html">VARPTR$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng320.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng320.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..02ab191
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng320.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,236 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Short Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+[^^Up^^]
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<A HREF="ng267b.html"> *                     Multiplication                         Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng282a.html"> +                     Addition/Concatenation                 Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ac8.html"> -                     Subtraction/Negation                   Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng2d59.html"> /                     Division                               Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f41.html"> &lt;                     Less than                              Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng330f.html"> &lt;=                    Less than or Equal to                  Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng3702.html"> &lt;&gt;                    Not Equal to                           Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng3938.html"> =                     Equal to/Assignment                    Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng3ce3.html"> &gt;                     Greater than                           Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng40a9.html"> &gt;=                    Greater than or Equal to               Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng447e.html"> \                     Integer Division                       Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng4642.html"> ^                     Exponentiation                         Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng47f3.html"> $DYNAMIC              Declare Arrays Dynamic</A>
+<A HREF="ng49b8.html"> $INCLUDE              Include File</A>
+<A HREF="ng4c6c.html"> $STATIC               Declare Arrays Static</A>
+<A HREF="ng4ddd.html"> '                     Comment</A>
+<A HREF="ng50f1.html"> ABS                   Absolute Value</A>
+<A HREF="ng5198.html"> AND                   Logical AND                            Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng5456.html"> ASC                   ASCII Value of First Character</A>
+<A HREF="ng55f2.html"> ATN                   Arctangent</A>
+<A HREF="ng579e.html"> BEEP                  Beep the Speaker</A>
+<A HREF="ng5839.html"> BLOAD                 Load Binary (Memory Image) File</A>
+<A HREF="ng5b68.html"> BSAVE                 Save a Binary (Memory Image) File</A>
+<A HREF="ng5e67.html"> CALL                  Invoke Subprogram or Assembly Subroutine</A>
+<A HREF="ng63e4.html"> CALL ABSOLUTE         Invoke Subprogram or Assembly Subroutine</A>
+<A HREF="ng681f.html"> CALLS                 Invoke Subprogram or Assembly Subroutine</A>
+<A HREF="ng6db8.html"> CDBL                  Convert to Double Precision</A>
+<A HREF="ng6e8b.html"> CHAIN                 Transfer to Another Program</A>
+<A HREF="ng7372.html"> CHDIR                 Change Directory</A>
+<A HREF="ng74fa.html"> CHR$                  Convert ASCII Code to Character</A>
+<A HREF="ng75f2.html"> CINT                  Convert to Integer</A>
+<A HREF="ng76ee.html"> CIRCLE                Draw Ellipse on Screen</A>
+<A HREF="ng7c2f.html"> CLEAR                 Close Files, Reset Variables, Set Stack Space</A>
+<A HREF="ng7fd0.html"> CLOSE                 Close File or Device</A>
+<A HREF="ng8271.html"> CLS                   Clear Screen</A>
+<A HREF="ng86fb.html"> COLOR                 Set Foreground, Background, and Border Colors</A>
+<A HREF="ng9a3c.html"> COM(n)                Enable/Disable Comm Port Trapping</A>
+<A HREF="ng9f05.html"> COMMAND$              Get Command Line</A>
+<A HREF="nga150.html"> COMMON                Pass Variables to CHAINed Program or Subprogram</A>
+<A HREF="nga9db.html"> CONST                 Declare Symbolic Constant(s)</A>
+<A HREF="ngae1d.html"> COS                   Cosine</A>
+<A HREF="ngaf85.html"> CSNG                  Convert to Single Precision</A>
+<A HREF="ngb058.html"> CSRLIN                Line Position of Cursor</A>
+<A HREF="ngb1c8.html"> CVD                   Convert String to Double-Precision</A>
+<A HREF="ngb3ef.html"> CVDMBF                Convert MBF Double-Precision String to IEEE</A>
+<A HREF="ngb793.html"> CVI                   Convert String to Integer</A>
+<A HREF="ngb980.html"> CVS                   Convert String to Single Precision</A>
+<A HREF="ngbba5.html"> CVSMBF                Convert MBF Single-Precision String to IEEE</A>
+<A HREF="ngbf36.html"> DATA                  Store Constant(s) for Retrieval via READ</A>
+<A HREF="ngc42b.html"> DATE$                 Get or Set System Date</A>
+<A HREF="ngc7f7.html"> DEF FN                Define Function</A>
+<A HREF="ngcd1a.html"> DEF SEG               Define Segment</A>
+<A HREF="ngcf0a.html"> DEFDBL                Define Variable(s) as Double Precision</A>
+<A HREF="ngd283.html"> DEFINT                Define Variable(s) as Integer</A>
+<A HREF="ngd5ea.html"> DEFSNG                Define Variable(s) as Single Precision</A>
+<A HREF="ngd96b.html"> DEFSTR                Define Variable(s) as String</A>
+<A HREF="ngdcd0.html"> DIM                   Dimension Array(s)</A>
+<A HREF="nge1c2.html"> DO                    Begin Definition of DO/LOOP Loop</A>
+<A HREF="nge5df.html"> DRAW                  Draw Object</A>
+<A HREF="ngf078.html"> END                   Terminate Program</A>
+<A HREF="ngf203.html"> ENVIRON               Modify Environment Table</A>
+<A HREF="ngf619.html"> ENVIRON$              Environment Table Entry</A>
+<A HREF="ngf9b4.html"> EOF                   End of File Status</A>
+<A HREF="ngfc6d.html"> EQV                   Equivalence                            Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ngff2b.html"> ERASE                 Reset Static Array or Deallocate Dynamic Array</A>
+<A HREF="ng101c4.html"> ERDEV                 Critical Error Code</A>
+<A HREF="ng10367.html"> ERDEV$                Device Causing Critical Error</A>
+<A HREF="ng10563.html"> ERL                   Line Number of Most Recent Error</A>
+<A HREF="ng107b9.html"> ERR                   Error Number</A>
+<A HREF="ng108e8.html"> ERROR                 Force Error</A>
+<A HREF="ng10c5d.html"> EXIT                  Exit Multiline Function, Loop, or Subprogram</A>
+<A HREF="ng10e75.html"> EXP                   Exponent (Natural)</A>
+<A HREF="ng1107b.html"> FIELD                 Allocate Space for Random File Variables</A>
+<A HREF="ng11727.html"> FILES                 Display File Directory</A>
+<A HREF="ng119e5.html"> FIX                   Truncate to Integer</A>
+<A HREF="ng11abb.html"> FOR                   Begin Definition of FOR/NEXT Loop</A>
+<A HREF="ng1250d.html"> FRE                   Available Memory</A>
+<A HREF="ng127c8.html"> GET (File I/O)        Read Random File into Buffer</A>
+<A HREF="ng12b5a.html"> GET (Graphics)        Read Points from Screen</A>
+<A HREF="ng13094.html"> GOSUB                 Execute Subroutine</A>
+<A HREF="ng13449.html"> GOTO                  Unconditional Branch</A>
+<A HREF="ng135de.html"> HEX$                  Hexadecimal Value, as String</A>
+<A HREF="ng137c6.html"> IF                    Conditional Branch</A>
+<A HREF="ng13f30.html"> IMP                   Implication                            Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng141ee.html"> INKEY$                Most Recent Character at Keyboard</A>
+<A HREF="ng147de.html"> INP                   Read from an I/O Port</A>
+<A HREF="ng148c5.html"> INPUT                 Get Input from Keyboard</A>
+<A HREF="ng151dd.html"> INPUT #               Get Input from Sequential File or Device</A>
+<A HREF="ng157f1.html"> INPUT$                Read Specified Number of Characters</A>
+<A HREF="ng15bed.html"> INSTR                 Find Substring</A>
+<A HREF="ng15fe6.html"> INT                   Next Lower Integer</A>
+<A HREF="ng161a8.html"> IOCTL                 Send Control String to Device Driver</A>
+<A HREF="ng16339.html"> IOCTL$                Read Control String from Device Driver</A>
+<A HREF="ng16438.html"> KEY                   Set or Display Soft Keys</A>
+<A HREF="ng16dd7.html"> KEY(n)                Enable/Disable Key Trapping</A>
+<A HREF="ng17428.html"> KILL                  Delete File(s)</A>
+<A HREF="ng175c1.html"> LBOUND                Lower Bound of Array Dimension</A>
+<A HREF="ng17755.html"> LEFT$                 Substring at Left</A>
+<A HREF="ng17947.html"> LEN                   Length of String</A>
+<A HREF="ng17a25.html"> LET                   Assignment</A>
+<A HREF="ng17bbd.html"> LINE                  Draw Line or Box</A>
+<A HREF="ng18196.html"> LINE INPUT            Read Line from Keyboard, Ignoring Delimiters</A>
+<A HREF="ng18562.html"> LINE INPUT #          Read Line from File, Ignoring Delimiters</A>
+<A HREF="ng18851.html"> LOC                   Current File Position</A>
+<A HREF="ng18b5e.html"> LOCATE                Position the Cursor</A>
+<A HREF="ng1905a.html"> LOCK                  Control File or Record Address</A>
+<A HREF="ng19504.html"> LOF                   Length of File</A>
+<A HREF="ng19695.html"> LOG                   Natural Logarithm</A>
+<A HREF="ng1982e.html"> LOOP                  End Definition of DO/LOOP Loop</A>
+<A HREF="ng19c46.html"> LPOS                  Current Position of Print Head</A>
+<A HREF="ng19d58.html"> LPRINT                Output to LPT1:</A>
+<A HREF="ng1a3ba.html"> LPRINT USING          Formatted Output to LPT1:</A>
+<A HREF="ng1b48a.html"> LSET                  Left-Justify Data in Field Variable</A>
+<A HREF="ng1b754.html"> MID$ (Function)       Substring in Middle</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ba73.html"> MID$ (Statement)      Assign Substring</A>
+<A HREF="ng1bf7e.html"> MKD$                  Convert Double-Precision to String</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c0c5.html"> MKDIR                 Create Subdirectory</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c1bb.html"> MKDMBF$               Convert IEEE Double-Precision to MBF String</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c304.html"> MKI$                  Convert Integer to String</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c42b.html"> MKS$                  Convert Single-Precision to String</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c568.html"> MKSMBF$               Convert IEEE Single-Precision to MBF String</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c6b1.html"> MOD                   Modulo Arithmetic                      Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c816.html"> NAME                  Rename File</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ca3c.html"> NEXT                  End Definition of FOR/NEXT Loop</A>
+<A HREF="ng1d3c8.html"> NOT                   Logical NOT                            Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng1d6a0.html"> OCT$                  Octal Value, as String</A>
+<A HREF="ng1d78d.html"> ON COM                Trap for Communications Activity</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ded6.html"> ON ERROR              Enable Error Trapping</A>
+<A HREF="ng1e384.html"> ON KEY                Trap for Keypress</A>
+<A HREF="ng1eb89.html"> ON PEN                Trap for Light Pen Activity</A>
+<A HREF="ng1f18c.html"> ON PLAY(n)            Trap for Background Music Remaining</A>
+<A HREF="ng1f736.html"> ON STRIG(n)           Trap for Specified Joystick Button</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ff42.html"> ON TIMER              Trap for Elapsed Time</A>
+<A HREF="ng20631.html"> ON...GOSUB            Branch to nth Item in Subroutine List</A>
+<A HREF="ng209fe.html"> ON...GOTO             Branch to <U>n</U>th Item in Line List</A>
+<A HREF="ng20da4.html"> OPEN                  Allow File or Device I/O</A>
+<A HREF="ng21818.html"> OPEN "COM...          Open a Communications File</A>
+<A HREF="ng22467.html"> OPTION BASE           Set Minimum Array Subscript</A>
+<A HREF="ng2265a.html"> OR                    Logical OR                             Operator</A>
+<A HREF="ng22914.html"> OUT                   Send Byte to Output Port</A>
+<A HREF="ng22a5b.html"> PAINT                 Fill an Area with a Pattern or Color</A>
+<A HREF="ng23171.html"> PALETTE               Change Color in the Palette</A>
+<A HREF="ng23637.html"> PALETTE USING         Change Many Colors in the Palette</A>
+<A HREF="ng23b74.html"> PCOPY                 Copy Screen Page</A>
+<A HREF="ng23cd7.html"> PEEK                  Value at Specified Address</A>
+<A HREF="ng23ef7.html"> PEN (Function)        Light Pen Status</A>
+<A HREF="ng2434c.html"> PEN (Statement)       Enable/Disable Pen Read and Trap</A>
+<A HREF="ng248ab.html"> PLAY (Event Trap)     Enable/Disable Music Trap</A>
+<A HREF="ng24ced.html"> PLAY (Function)       Number of Notes in Background Buffer</A>
+<A HREF="ng24dc8.html"> PLAY (Statement)      Play Music</A>
+<A HREF="ng25c31.html"> PMAP                  Map Physical Coordinates to World</A>
+<A HREF="ng25eb4.html"> POINT                 Attribute or Value at Screen Location</A>
+<A HREF="ng2627a.html"> POKE                  Write Byte to Memory</A>
+<A HREF="ng264a0.html"> POS                   Current Cursor Column Position</A>
+<A HREF="ng2659c.html"> PRESET                Draw Point on Screen</A>
+<A HREF="ng2682a.html"> PRINT                 Display on Screen</A>
+<A HREF="ng26f10.html"> PRINT #               Output to Sequential File</A>
+<A HREF="ng27378.html"> PRINT # USING         Formatted Output to File</A>
+<A HREF="ng28508.html"> PRINT USING           Formatted Screen Display</A>
+<A HREF="ng29621.html"> PSET                  Draw Point on Screen</A>
+<A HREF="ng298af.html"> PUT (File I/O)        Write Record from Random Buffer to File</A>
+<A HREF="ng29bbc.html"> PUT (Graphics)        Plot Array Image on Screen</A>
+<A HREF="ng2a131.html"> RANDOMIZE             Reseed Random Number Generator</A>
+<A HREF="ng2a3e4.html"> READ                  Assign DATA Items to Variables</A>
+<A HREF="ng2a6f2.html"> REDIM                 Redimension Array</A>
+<A HREF="ng2a9f5.html"> REM                   Comment or Metacommand</A>
+<A HREF="ng2adfa.html"> RESET                 Close All Disk Files</A>
+<A HREF="ng2af74.html"> RESTORE               Reset DATA Item Pointer</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b195.html"> RESUME                Continue after Error Trap</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b513.html"> RETURN                Return from Subroutine</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b724.html"> RIGHT$                Substring at Right</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b8f2.html"> RMDIR                 Remove Subdirectory</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ba71.html"> RND                   Random Number</A>
+<A HREF="ng2bce4.html"> RSET                  Right-Justify Data in Field Variable</A>
+<A HREF="ng2bf9a.html"> RUN                   Execute Program</A>
+<A HREF="ng2c35f.html"> SADD                  String Address</A>
+<A HREF="ng2c52c.html"> SCREEN (Function)     Character at Specified Location</A>
+<A HREF="ng2c723.html"> SCREEN (Statement)    Set Screen Attributes</A>
+<A HREF="ng2d400.html"> SELECT                Case Structure</A>
+<A HREF="ng2db1d.html"> SGN                   Sign of Number</A>
+<A HREF="ng2dcc2.html"> SHARED                Declare Global Variables</A>
+<A HREF="ng2e004.html"> SHELL                 Execute DOS Command</A>
+<A HREF="ng2e3eb.html"> SIN                   Sine</A>
+<A HREF="ng2e58f.html"> SOUND                 Sound the Speaker</A>
+<A HREF="ng2e956.html"> SPACE$                String of n Spaces</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ea77.html"> SPC                   Skip <U>n</U> Spaces in a PRINT statement</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ed3b.html"> SQR                   Square Root</A>
+<A HREF="ng2edd5.html"> STATIC                Declare Local Variable(s)</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f2ce.html"> STICK                 Joystick Coordinates</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f4d7.html"> STOP                  Halt Program</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f606.html"> STR$                  String Representation of Numeric Expression</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f749.html"> STRIG (Statement)     Enable/Disable the STRIG Function</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f914.html"> STRIG (Function)      Status of Joystick Buttons</A>
+<A HREF="ng2fc55.html"> STRING$               String of Specified Length and Character</A>
+<A HREF="ng2fea2.html"> SUB...END SUB         Define Subprogram</A>
+<A HREF="ng30480.html"> SWAP                  Exchange the Values of Two Variables</A>
+<A HREF="ng3055b.html"> SYSTEM                Return to Operating System</A>
+<A HREF="ng30654.html"> TAB                   Tab to a Specified Position</A>
+<A HREF="ng309ca.html"> TAN                   Tangent</A>
+<A HREF="ng30bd9.html"> TIME$ (Function)      Get System Time</A>
+<A HREF="ng30cb3.html"> TIME$ (Statement)     Set System Time</A>
+<A HREF="ng30e94.html"> TIMER (Function)      Number of Seconds since Midnight</A>
+<A HREF="ng30f52.html"> TIMER (Statement)     Enable/Disable Timer Trap</A>
+<A HREF="ng31353.html"> TROFF                 Trace Off</A>
+<A HREF="ng313b4.html"> TRON                  Trace On</A>
+<A HREF="ng314eb.html"> UBOUND                Upper Bound of Array Dimension</A>
+<A HREF="ng31698.html"> UNLOCK                Remove File or Record Access Lock</A>
+<A HREF="ng31b33.html"> VAL                   Numeric Value of a String</A>
+<A HREF="ng31e18.html"> VARPTR                Offset of Variable or Offset of File Buffer</A>
+<A HREF="ng321ab.html"> VARPTR$               Offset of Variable, in Character Form</A>
+<A HREF="ng32510.html"> VIEW                  Define Screen Window</A>
+<A HREF="ng32b68.html"> VIEW PRINT            Set Screen Text Window</A>
+<A HREF="ng32d57.html"> WAIT                  Wait for Port Status</A>
+<A HREF="ng33204.html"> WEND                  End Definition of WHILE/WEND Loop</A>
+<A HREF="ng335b1.html"> WHILE                 Begin Definition of WHILE/WEND Loop</A>
+<A HREF="ng3395b.html"> WIDTH                 Set Output Width</A>
+<A HREF="ng33e32.html"> WINDOW                Redefine Screen Coordinates</A>
+<A HREF="ng34399.html"> WRITE                 Output to Screen</A>
+<A HREF="ng346ca.html"> WRITE #               Output to Sequential File</A>
+<A HREF="ng34a1f.html"> XOR                   Logical Exclusive OR                   Operator</A>
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng321ab.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng321ab.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..28dbed9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng321ab.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng31e18.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng32510.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>VARPTR$                  Offset of Variable, in Character Form</B>
+
+ <B>VARPTR$</B>(<U>variable</U>)
+
+    Returns, in a character format, the offset address of a specified
+    variable in the current data segment.
+
+    <U>variable</U>    The name of a string or numeric variable, or an array
+                element.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    A three-byte string is returned. The first byte reports
+                the variable type, the second reports the low-order
+                portion of the variable address, and the third reports the
+                high-order portion of the variable address. The type byte
+                is coded as follows:
+
+                2   Integer
+                3   String
+                4   Single-precision
+                8   Double-precision
+
+                When using VARPTR$ with array variables, be aware that
+                array variables are moved in memory every time a new
+                nonarray variable is assigned.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng31e18.html">VARPTR</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng32510.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng32510.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..84efd92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng32510.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng321ab.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng32b68.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>VIEW                     Define Screen Window</B>
+
+ <B>VIEW</B> [[SCREEN][(<U>x1</U>,<U>y1</U>)-(<U>x2</U>,<U>y2</U>)[,[<U>color</U>][,[<U>border</U>]]]]]
+
+    Defines a screen subset, or viewport.
+
+      SCREEN    If omitted, the coordinates of all subsequent graphics
+                statements are measured relative to the defined viewport,
+                whose upper left corner becomes 0,0. If included, 0,0 is
+                still the upper left corner of the screen, but only those
+                points that fall within the defined viewport are visible.
+
+ <U>x1</U>,<U>y1</U>,<U>x2</U>,<U>y2</U>    Corner coordinates of the viewport.
+
+       <U>colo</U>r    If included, QuickBASIC fills the viewport with the
+                specified color. Allowed values are 0 to 3 in medium
+                resolution, 0-1 in high resolution.
+
+      <U>borde</U>r    If included, QuickBASIC draws a border, in a specified
+                color, around the defined viewport. Allowed values are 0
+                to 3 in medium resolution, 0-1 in high resolution.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    QuickBASIC sorts the coordinates <U>x1</U>, <U>x2</U>, <U>y1</U>, and <U>y2</U>, so
+                that the lower value of <U>x</U> and the lower value of y specify
+                the upper left corner, regardless of how the coordinates
+                are presented; i.e., VIEW (280,120)-(140,180) would be
+                equivalent to VIEW (140,120)-(280,180).
+
+                VIEW with no argument redefines the viewport to the full
+                screen.
+
+                Multiple viewports may be defined, but only the most
+                recent definition is active.
+
+                A defined viewport is disabled by a RUN statement or a
+                change in SCREEN attributes.
+
+                With a viewport in effect, CLS clears only the viewport,
+                not the entire screen.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng33e32.html">WINDOW</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng32b68.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng32b68.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5622513
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng32b68.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng32510.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng32d57.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>VIEW PRINT               Set Screen Text Window</B>
+
+ <B>VIEW</B> <B>PRINT</B> [<U>top</U> TO <U>bottom</U>]
+
+    Sets the top and bottom boundaries of the screen text window.
+
+         <U>top</U>    The top line of the screen text window. Defaults to 1.
+
+      <U>bottom</U>    The bottom line of the screen text window. Defaults to 25.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    VIEW PRINT limits scrolling and cursor movement to the
+                area defined by top and bottom.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng32d57.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng32d57.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..303696b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng32d57.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng32b68.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng33204.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>WAIT                     Wait for Port Status</B>
+
+ <B>WAIT</B> <U>port</U>, <U>n</U>[,<U>m</U>]
+
+    Suspends program execution until a specified bit pattern appears at a
+    specified port address.
+
+        <U>port</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 65535; specifies
+                the I/O port to test.
+
+         <U>n</U>,<U>m</U>    Integer expressions in the range 0 to 255; they supply the
+                test. <U>m</U> defaults to 0.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    QuickBASIC gets the value at port, XORs it with <U>m</U>, then
+                ANDs it with <U>n</U>. If the result is zero, the process is
+                repeated. If the result is nonzero, program execution
+                continues with the next statement.
+
+                To test for a 1 at a particular bit position in <U>port</U>, <U>m</U>
+                should be omitted and <U>n</U> should have a 1 at the position in
+                question. To test for a 0 in <U>port</U>, both <U>n</U> and <U>m</U> should
+                have a 1 in the position in question.
+
+                Note that the test is considered positive if any nonzero
+                value is returned. Therefore, to test for multiple bit
+                positions, use multiple WAIT statements.
+
+                Warning: If <U>port</U> never develops a nonzero value, WAIT can
+                put your system into an infinite loop.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng330f.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng330f.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb988f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng330f.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng2f41.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng3702.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>&lt;=                       Less than or Equal to Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 &lt;= exp2</B>
+
+    &lt;= is a relational operator. If the value of <U>exp1</U> is either less than
+    that of <U>exp2</U> or equal to that of <U>exp2</U>, the result of <U>exp1</U> &lt;= <U>exp2</U> is
+    -1; otherwise the result is 0. In IF statements, BASIC regards 0 as
+    equivalent to FALSE and all nonzero values as equivalent to TRUE.
+
+    If the operands are string expressions, BASIC compares the ASCII
+    values of the first character in each expression. If the first
+    characters have the same ASCII value, BASIC then evaluates the second
+    characters, and so on. If one string terminates before the other, and
+    the characters in each string are identical to that point, the shorter
+    string is considered "less" than the longer one.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any numeric or string expression, but <U>exp1</U> and <U>exp2</U> must
+                either both be numeric or both be strings; otherwise a
+                Type Mismatch error occurs.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng3938.html">=</A>
+<A HREF="ng3702.html"><></A>
+<A HREF="ng2f41.html"><</A>
+<A HREF="ng3ce3.html">></A>
+<A HREF="ng40a9.html">>=</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng33204.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng33204.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1f8524a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng33204.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng32d57.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng335b1.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>WEND                     End Definition of WHILE/WEND Loop</B>
+
+ <B>WHILE</B> <U>expression</U>
+ .
+ . [<U>statements</U>]
+ .
+
+ <B>WEND</B>
+
+    Terminates the definition of a WHILE/WEND loop.
+
+  <U>expression</U>    A numeric expression.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    QuickBASIC starts by evaluating <U>expression</U>. If <U>expression</U>
+                is nonzero (true), the next statement is executed. If
+                <U>expression</U> is zero (false), control passes to the first
+                statement following the next WEND statement.
+
+                When QuickBASIC encounters the WEND statement, it
+                reevaluates the expression argument to the most recent
+                WHILE. If that argument is still nonzero (true), the
+                process is repeated; otherwise, execution continues at the
+                next statement.
+
+                WHILE-WEND loops may be nested to any level of complexity,
+                but there must be a WEND for each WHILE.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="nge1c2.html">DO</A>
+<A HREF="ng11abb.html">FOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng1982e.html">LOOP</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ca3c.html">NEXT</A>
+<A HREF="ng335b1.html">WHILE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng335b1.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng335b1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0cf8c77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng335b1.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng33204.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng3395b.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>WHILE                    Begin Definition of WHILE/WEND Loop</B>
+
+ <B>WHILE</B> <U>expression</U>
+ .
+ . [<U>statements</U>]
+ .
+ <B>WEND</B>
+
+    Begins the definition of a WHILE/WEND loop.
+
+  <U>expression</U>    A numeric expression.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    QuickBASIC starts by evaluating <U>expression</U>. If <U>expression</U>
+                is nonzero (true), the next statement is executed. If
+                <U>expression</U> is zero (false), control passes to the first
+                statement following the next WEND statement.
+
+                When QuickBASIC encounters the WEND statement, it
+                reevaluates the expression argument to the most recent
+                WHILE. If that argument is still nonzero (true), the
+                process is repeated; otherwise, execution continues at the
+                next statement.
+
+                WHILE-WEND loops may be nested to any level of complexity,
+                but there must be a WEND for each WHILE.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="nge1c2.html">DO</A>
+<A HREF="ng11abb.html">FOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng1982e.html">LOOP</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ca3c.html">NEXT</A>
+<A HREF="ng33204.html">WEND</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3395b.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3395b.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..85c3f12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3395b.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng335b1.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng33e32.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>WIDTH                    Set Output Width</B>
+
+ <B>WIDTH</B> [{#<U>filenum</U> | <U>device</U>},] <U>width</U>[,<U>lines</U>]   or   <B>WIDTH</B> <B>LPRINT</B> <U>width</U>
+
+    Sets the maximum width for a specified output device; QuickBASIC sends
+    a carriage return to the device when the specified width has been
+    reached.
+
+       <U>width</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 255. A value of 0
+                is equivalent to a value of 1.
+
+      <U>device</U>    A string expression. Legal values are "SCRN:", "LPT1:",
+                "LPT2:", "LPT3:", "COM1:", "COM2:", and their lowercase
+                equivalents.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    A numeric expression in the range 1 to 15; specifies a
+                file opened for output.
+
+       <U>lines</U>    A numeric expression; must be either 25 or 43. This
+                argument is valid only if <U>device</U> is "SCRN" or if the
+                {#<U>filenum</U> | <U>device</U>} argument is omitted. <U>lines</U> allows you
+                to specify 43-line screen mode on systems equipped with an
+                EGA.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    WIDTH size and WIDTH "SCRN:" size both set the screen
+                width. In this case, size must be either 40 or 80 (only 80
+                is allowed on the IBM Monochrome Display).
+
+                WIDTH LPRINT width sets the width of all subsequent LPRINT
+                output.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng33e32.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng33e32.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b40dd4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng33e32.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng3395b.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34399.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>WINDOW                   Redefine Screen Coordinates</B>
+
+ <B>WINDOW</B> [[SCREEN](<U>x1</U>,<U>y1</U>)-(<U>x2</U>,<U>y2</U>)]
+
+    Specifies "world" coordinates for the screen.
+
+      SCREEN    If omitted, <U>x1</U>,<U>y1</U> and <U>x2</U>,<U>y2</U> specify the upper left and
+                lower right corners of the world space, respectively. If
+                included, <U>x1</U>,<U>y1</U> and <U>x2</U>,<U>y2</U> specify the lower left and upper
+                right corners of the world space, respectively.
+
+ <U>x1</U>,<U>y1</U>,<U>x2</U>,<U>y2</U>    The corner coordinates of the world space.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The WINDOW statement allows you to redefine the corners of
+                the display screen as a pair of "world" coordinates.
+                Because objects plotted by subsequent graphics statements
+                are still plotted in the standard "physical" coordinates,
+                the WINDOW statement provides a way of scaling, rotating,
+                and/or transposing such objects.
+
+                BASIC sorts the coordinates so that the lower of <U>x1</U> and <U>y1</U>
+                will be treated as <U>x1</U> and the lower of <U>y1</U> and <U>y2</U> will be
+                treated as <U>y1</U>, regardless of how the coordinates are
+                presented. Thus WINDOW (280,120)-(140,180) would be
+                equivalent to WINDOW (140,120)-(280,180).
+
+                A world space defined by WINDOW is disabled by a RUN
+                statement, a change in SCREEN attributes, or a WINDOW
+                statement with no arguments.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng32510.html">VIEW</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng34399.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng34399.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..993ba66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng34399.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng33e32.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng346ca.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>WRITE                    Output to Screen</B>
+
+ <B>WRITE</B> [<U>exprlist</U>]
+
+    Displays numeric or string expressions on screen.
+
+    <U>exprlist</U>    Numeric or string expressions separated by commas or
+                semicolons. QuickBASIC outputs a carriage return and line
+                feed at the end of the list. If no items are included, a
+                blank line is displayed.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    Either semicolons or commas may be used as delimiters in
+                <U>exprlist</U> (it makes no difference).
+
+                WRITE differs from PRINT in the following ways:
+
+                    When the data items are displayed, each is separated
+                    from the one before it by a comma.
+
+                    String expressions are displayed enclosed in quote
+                    marks.
+
+                    Positive numbers are not preceded by blanks.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2682a.html">PRINT</A>
+<A HREF="ng346ca.html">WRITE #</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng346ca.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng346ca.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e4cccc9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng346ca.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng34399.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34a1f.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>WRITE #                  Output to Sequential File</B>
+
+ <B>WRITE</B> <B>#</B><U>filenum</U>,<U>exprlist</U>
+
+    Outputs one or more numeric or string expressions on screen.
+
+    <U>exprlist</U>    Numeric or string expressions separated by commas or
+                semicolons. QuickBASIC outputs a carriage return and line
+                feed at the end of the list. If no items are included, a
+                blank line is displayed.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    Either semicolons or commas may be used as delimiters in
+                <U>exprlist</U> (it makes no difference).
+
+                WRITE # differs from PRINT # in the following ways:
+
+                    When the data items are displayed, each is separated
+                    from the one before it by a comma.
+
+                    String expressions are output enclosed in quote marks.
+
+                    Positive numbers are not preceded by blanks.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng26f10.html">PRINT #</A>
+<A HREF="ng34399.html">WRITE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng34a1f.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng34a1f.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..086f6b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng34a1f.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng346ca.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>XOR                      Logical Exclusive OR Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 XOR exp2</B>
+
+    XOR is a logical operator. BASIC converts each operand to an integer
+    (each operand must yield an integer in the range -32768 to 32767, or
+    else an Overflow error occurs), then performs a bitwise comparison of
+    the results, according to the truth table below:
+
+                     <U>exp1</U><B>  </B><U>exp2</U><B>     </B><U>exp1 XOR exp2</U>
+                       1    1             0
+                       1    0             1
+                       0    1             1
+                       0    0             0
+
+    The result is an integer.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any expression that produces a numeric result. This
+                includes Boolean expressions, where a TRUE result is
+                evaluated as -1 and a FALSE result is evaluated as 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng5198.html">AND</A>
+<A HREF="ngfc6d.html">EQV</A>
+<A HREF="ng13f30.html">IMP</A>
+<A HREF="ng1d3c8.html">NOT</A>
+<A HREF="ng2265a.html">OR</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng34ce6.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng34ce6.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..303dafa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng34ce6.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Short Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+[^^Up^^]
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html"> Precedence        Operator Precedence in BASIC</A>
+<A HREF="ng35173.html"> ^                 Exponentiation</A>
+<A HREF="ng3531b.html"> *                 Multiplication</A>
+<A HREF="ng354c1.html"> /                 Division</A>
+<A HREF="ng356a1.html"> +                 Addition and Concatenation</A>
+<A HREF="ng3593a.html"> -                 Subtraction and Negation</A>
+<A HREF="ng35bc6.html"> \                 Integer Division</A>
+<A HREF="ng35d81.html"> MOD               Modulo Arithmetic</A>
+<A HREF="ng35ee9.html"> =                 Equal to/Assignment</A>
+<A HREF="ng362a8.html"> &lt;&gt;                Not Equal to</A>
+<A HREF="ng364e2.html"> &lt;                 Less than</A>
+<A HREF="ng368a7.html"> &gt;                 Greater than</A>
+<A HREF="ng36c71.html"> &lt;=                Less than or Equal to</A>
+<A HREF="ng3706a.html"> &gt;=                Greater than or Equal to</A>
+<A HREF="ng37443.html"> NOT               Logical NOT</A>
+<A HREF="ng3770a.html"> AND               Logical AND</A>
+<A HREF="ng379af.html"> OR                Logical OR</A>
+<A HREF="ng37c50.html"> XOR               Logical Exclusive OR</A>
+<A HREF="ng37efe.html"> EQV               Equivalence</A>
+<A HREF="ng381a3.html"> IMP               Implication</A>
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng34f34.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng34f34.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..106fc32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng34f34.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng35173.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>Precedence               Operator Precedence in BASIC</B>
+
+<B>          Operator Precedence</B>
+
+    <B>Highest:</B>       ^
+                   - (negation)
+                   *  /
+                   \
+                  MOD
+                   +  -
+                   =  &lt;&gt;  &lt;  &gt;  &lt;=  &gt;=
+                  NOT
+                  AND
+                   OR
+                  XOR
+                  EQV
+    <B>Lowest:       </B>IMP
+
+
+    Operators have an inherent precedence. In the absence of explicit
+    grouping (through parentheses), an expression is evaluated in the
+    order dictated by this inherent precedence. Operators of the same
+    precedence level are evaluated in left-to-right order.
+
+    All function calls in an expression are evaluated <U>before</U> any
+    operators.
+
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng35173.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng35173.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e28386c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng35173.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng3531b.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>^                       Exponentiation</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 ^ exp2</B>
+
+    The ^ operator performs exponentiation. If the expression involves
+    operands of more than one precision, all operands are converted to the
+    same level--that of the highest-precision operand in the expression--
+    before the expression is evaluated.
+
+   <B>exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any numeric expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng3531b.html">*</A>
+<A HREF="ng3593a.html">-</A>
+<A HREF="ng354c1.html">/</A>
+<A HREF="ng35bc6.html">\</A>
+<A HREF="ng35d81.html">MOD</A>
+<A HREF="ng356a1.html">+</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3531b.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3531b.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0fc437c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3531b.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng35173.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng354c1.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>*                        Multiplication</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 * exp2</B>
+
+    The * operator performs multiplication. If the expression involves
+    operands of more than one precision, all operands are converted to the
+    same level--that of the highest-precision operand in the expression--
+    before the expression is evaluated.
+
+   <B>exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any numeric expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng35173.html">^^</A>
+<A HREF="ng3593a.html">-</A>
+<A HREF="ng354c1.html">/</A>
+<A HREF="ng35bc6.html">\</A>
+<A HREF="ng35d81.html">MOD</A>
+<A HREF="ng356a1.html">+</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng354c1.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng354c1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c95d86b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng354c1.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng3531b.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng356a1.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>/                        Division</B>
+
+
+ <B>exp1 / exp2</B>
+
+    The / operator performs floating-point division. If the expression
+    involves operands of more than one precision, all operands are
+    converted to the same level--that of the highest-precision operand in
+    the expression--before the expression is evaluated.
+
+        <B>exp1</B>    Any numeric expression.
+
+        <B>exp2</B>    Any numeric expression that does not evalute to 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng35173.html">^^</A>
+<A HREF="ng3593a.html">-</A>
+<A HREF="ng3531b.html">*</A>
+<A HREF="ng35bc6.html">\</A>
+<A HREF="ng35d81.html">MOD</A>
+<A HREF="ng356a1.html">+</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng356a1.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng356a1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d904803
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng356a1.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng354c1.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng3593a.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>+                        Addition and Concatenation</B>
+
+    <B>Addition</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 + exp2</B>
+
+    The + operator performs addition. If the expression involves operands
+    of more than one precision, all operands are converted to the same
+    level--that of the highest-precision operand in the expression--before
+    the expression is evaluated.
+
+   <B>exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any numeric expression.
+
+
+    <B>Concatenation</B>
+
+ <B>str1 + str2</B>
+
+    The + operator also performs concatenation on string expressions. The
+    result is a string composed of <U>str1</U> followed by <U>str2</U>.
+
+   <B>str1</B>,<B>str2</B>    Any string expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng35173.html">^^</A>
+<A HREF="ng3593a.html">-</A>
+<A HREF="ng3531b.html">*</A>
+<A HREF="ng354c1.html">/</A>
+<A HREF="ng35bc6.html">\</A>
+<A HREF="ng35d81.html">MOD</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3593a.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3593a.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d4a5cde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3593a.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng356a1.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng35bc6.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>-                        Subtraction and Negation</B>
+
+    <B>Subtraction</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 - exp2</B>
+
+    The - operator performs subtraction. If the expression involves
+    operands of more than one precision, all operands are converted to the
+    same level--that of the highest-precision operand in the expression--
+    before the expression is evaluated.
+
+   <B>exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any numeric expression.
+
+
+
+    <B>Negation</B>
+
+ <B>- exp1</B>
+
+    As a unary operator (placed before a single numeric expression), -
+    performs negation; that is, it reverse the sign of its operand.
+
+<B>        exp1</B>    Any numeric expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng35173.html">^^</A>
+<A HREF="ng3531b.html">*</A>
+<A HREF="ng354c1.html">/</A>
+<A HREF="ng35bc6.html">\</A>
+<A HREF="ng35d81.html">MOD</A>
+<A HREF="ng356a1.html">+</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng35bc6.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng35bc6.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0509ef8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng35bc6.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng3593a.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng35d81.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>\                        Integer Division</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 \ exp2</B>
+
+    The \ operator performs integer division. The operands are rounded
+    (not truncated) to integers before the division is performed, and the
+    result is truncated (not rounded) to an integer. The operands must
+    round to integers in the range -32768 through 32767.
+
+<B>   exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any numeric expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng35173.html">^^</A>
+<A HREF="ng3593a.html">-</A>
+<A HREF="ng3531b.html">*</A>
+<A HREF="ng354c1.html">/</A>
+<A HREF="ng35bc6.html">\</A>
+<A HREF="ng35d81.html">MOD</A>
+<A HREF="ng356a1.html">+</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng35d81.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng35d81.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1893a5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng35d81.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng35bc6.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng35ee9.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>MOD                      Modulo Arithmetic</B>
+
+ <B>exp1</B> <B>MOD exp2</B>
+
+    The MOD operator performs modulo arithmetic. That is, it performs an
+    integer division on its two operands (see \) and returns the
+    remainder. The result is an integer.
+
+<B>   exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any numeric expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng35173.html">^^</A>
+<A HREF="ng3593a.html">-</A>
+<A HREF="ng3531b.html">*</A>
+<A HREF="ng354c1.html">/</A>
+<A HREF="ng35bc6.html">\</A>
+<A HREF="ng35d81.html">MOD</A>
+<A HREF="ng356a1.html">+</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng35ee9.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng35ee9.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b51b6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng35ee9.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng35d81.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng362a8.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>=                        Equal to/Assignment</B>
+
+    <B>Equal to</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 = exp2</B>
+
+    The = operator is a relational operator. If <U>exp1</U> has the same value as
+    <U>exp2</U>, the result of <U>exp1</U> = <U>exp2</U> is -1; otherwise the result is 0. In
+    IF statements, BASIC regards 0 as equivalent to FALSE and all nonzero
+    values as equivalent to TRUE.
+
+   <B>exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any numeric or string expression, but <U>exp1</U> and <U>exp2</U> must
+                either both be numeric or both be strings; otherwise a
+                Type Mismatch error occurs.
+
+    <B>Assignment</B>
+
+ <B>[LET] var = exp1</B>
+
+    As an assignment operator, = stores the value of <U>exp1</U> in variable <U>var</U>.
+    The keyword LET is optional (and is usually omitted).
+
+         <U>var</U>    A legal variable name, of any type.
+
+        <U>exp1</U>    Any numeric expression, but <U>exp1</U> and <U>exp2</U> must either both
+                be numeric or both be strings; otherwise a Type Mismatch
+                error occurs.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng362a8.html"><></A>
+<A HREF="ng364e2.html"><</A>
+<A HREF="ng368a7.html">></A>
+<A HREF="ng36c71.html"><=</A>
+<A HREF="ng3706a.html">>=</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng362a8.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng362a8.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f3624d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng362a8.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng35ee9.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng364e2.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>&lt;&gt;                       Not Equal to</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 &lt;&gt; exp2</B>
+
+    The &lt;&gt; operator is a relational operator. If <U>exp1</U> has a value
+    different from that of <U>exp2</U>, the result of <U>exp1</U> &lt;&gt; <U>exp2</U> is -1;
+    otherwise the result is 0. In IF statements, BASIC regards 0 as
+    equivalent to FALSE and all nonzero values as equivalent to TRUE.
+
+   <B>exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any numeric or string expression, but <U>exp1</U> and <U>exp2</U> must
+                either both be numeric or both be strings; otherwise a
+                Type Mismatch error occurs.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng35ee9.html">=</A>
+<A HREF="ng364e2.html"><</A>
+<A HREF="ng368a7.html">></A>
+<A HREF="ng36c71.html"><=</A>
+<A HREF="ng3706a.html">>=</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng364e2.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng364e2.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f79a85f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng364e2.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng362a8.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng368a7.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>&lt;                        Less than</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 &lt; exp2</B>
+
+    The operator &lt; is a relational operator. If the value of <U>exp1</U> is less
+    than that of <U>exp2</U>, the result of <U>exp1</U> &lt; <U>exp2</U> is -1; otherwise the
+    result is 0. In IF statements, BASIC regards 0 as equivalent to FALSE
+    and all nonzero values as equivalent to TRUE.
+
+    If the operands are string expressions, BASIC compares the ASCII
+    values of the first character in each expression. If the first
+    characters have the same ASCII value, BASIC then evaluates the second
+    characters, and so on. If one string terminates before the other, and
+    the characters in each string are identical to that point, the shorter
+    string is considered "less" than the longer one.
+
+   <B>exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any numeric or string expression, but <U>exp1</U> and <U>exp2</U> must
+                either both be numeric or both be strings; otherwise a
+                Type Mismatch error occurs.
+
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng35ee9.html">=</A>
+<A HREF="ng362a8.html"><></A>
+<A HREF="ng368a7.html">></A>
+<A HREF="ng36c71.html"><=</A>
+<A HREF="ng3706a.html">>=</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng368a7.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng368a7.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..08964ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng368a7.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng364e2.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng36c71.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>&gt;                        Greater than</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 &gt; exp2</B>
+
+    The &gt; operator is a relational operator. If the value of <U>exp1</U> is
+    greater than that of <U>exp2</U>, the result of <U>exp1</U> &gt; <U>exp2</U> is -1; otherwise
+    the result is 0. In IF statements, BASIC regards 0 as equivalent to
+    FALSE and all nonzero values as equivalent to TRUE.
+
+    If the operands are string expressions, BASIC compares the ASCII
+    values of the first character in each expression. If the first
+    characters have the same ASCII value, BASIC then evaluates the second
+    characters, and so on. If one string terminates before the other, and
+    the characters in each string are identical to that point, the shorter
+    string is considered "less" than the longer one.
+
+   <B>exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any numeric or string expression, but <U>exp1</U> and <U>exp2</U> must
+                either both be numeric or both be strings; otherwise a
+                Type Mismatch error occurs.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng35ee9.html">=</A>
+<A HREF="ng362a8.html"><></A>
+<A HREF="ng364e2.html"><</A>
+<A HREF="ng36c71.html"><=</A>
+<A HREF="ng3706a.html">>=</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng36c71.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng36c71.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9ae7e78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng36c71.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng368a7.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng3706a.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>&lt;=                       Less than or Equal to</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 &lt;= exp2</B>
+
+    The &lt;= operator is a relational operator. If the value of <U>exp1</U> is
+    either less than that of <U>exp2</U> or equal to that of <U>exp2</U>, the result of
+    <U>exp1</U> &lt;= <U>exp2</U> is -1; otherwise the result is 0. In IF statements, BASIC
+    regards 0 as equivalent to FALSE and all nonzero values as equivalent
+    to TRUE.
+
+    If the operands are string expressions, BASIC compares the ASCII
+    values of the first character in each expression. If the first
+    characters have the same ASCII value, BASIC then evaluates the second
+    characters, and so on. If one string terminates before the other, and
+    the characters in each string are identical to that point, the shorter
+    string is considered "less" than the longer one.
+
+   <B>exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any numeric or string expression, but <U>exp1</U> and <U>exp2</U> must
+                either both be numeric or both be strings; otherwise a
+                Type Mismatch error occurs.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng35ee9.html">=</A>
+<A HREF="ng362a8.html"><></A>
+<A HREF="ng364e2.html"><</A>
+<A HREF="ng368a7.html">></A>
+<A HREF="ng3706a.html">>=</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3702.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3702.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3a27319
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3702.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng330f.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng3938.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>&lt;&gt;                       Not Equal to Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 &lt;&gt; exp2</B>
+
+    &lt;&gt; is a relational operator. If <U>exp1</U> has a value different from that
+    of <U>exp2</U>, the result of <U>exp1</U> &lt;&gt; <U>exp2</U> is -1; otherwise the result is 0.
+    In IF statements, BASIC regards 0 as equivalent to FALSE and all
+    nonzero values as equivalent to TRUE.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any numeric or string expression, but <U>exp1</U> and <U>exp2</U> must
+                either both be numeric or both be strings; otherwise a
+                Type Mismatch error occurs.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng3938.html">=</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f41.html"><</A>
+<A HREF="ng3ce3.html">></A>
+<A HREF="ng330f.html"><=</A>
+<A HREF="ng40a9.html">>=</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3706a.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3706a.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..96c953b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3706a.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng36c71.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng37443.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>&gt;=                       Greater than or Equal to</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 &gt;= exp2</B>
+
+    The &gt;= operator is a relational operator. If the value of <U>exp1</U> is
+    greater than that of <U>exp2</U>, the result of <U>exp1</U> &lt; <U>exp2</U> is -1; otherwise
+    the result is 0. In IF statements, BASIC regards 0 as equivalent to
+    FALSE and all nonzero values as equivalent to TRUE.
+
+    If the operands are string expressions, BASIC compares the ASCII
+    values of the first character in each expression. If the first
+    characters have the same ASCII value, BASIC then evaluates the second
+    characters, and so on. If one string terminates before the other, and
+    the characters in each string are identical to that point, the shorter
+    string is considered "less" than the longer one.
+
+   <B>exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any numeric or string expression, but <U>exp1</U> and <U>exp2</U> must
+                either both be numeric or both be strings; otherwise a
+                Type Mismatch error occurs.
+
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng35ee9.html">=</A>
+<A HREF="ng362a8.html"><></A>
+<A HREF="ng364e2.html"><</A>
+<A HREF="ng368a7.html">></A>
+<A HREF="ng36c71.html"><=</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng37443.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng37443.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2520ca0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng37443.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng3706a.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng3770a.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>NOT                      Logical NOT</B>
+
+ <B>NOT exp1</B>
+
+    NOT is a logical operator. BASIC converts the operand to an integer
+    (the result of this conversion must lie within the range -32768 to
+    32767, or else an Overflow error occurs), then complements each bit of
+    the result. That is, each resulting 1 bit becomes a 0 bit, and each
+    resulting 0 bit becomes a 1 bit. The result is an integer.
+
+    <B>Bitwise truth table for NOT:</B>
+
+                              <U>exp1   NOT exp1</U>
+                                1       0
+                                0       1
+
+<B>        exp1</B>    Any expression that produces a numeric result. This
+                includes Boolean expressions, where a TRUE result is
+                evaluated as -1 and a FALSE result is evaluated as 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng3770a.html">AND</A>
+<A HREF="ng379af.html">OR</A>
+<A HREF="ng37c50.html">XOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng37efe.html">EQV</A>
+<A HREF="ng381a3.html">IMP</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3770a.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3770a.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8834783
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3770a.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng37443.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng379af.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>AND                      Logical AND</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 AND exp2</B>
+
+    AND is a logical operator. BASIC converts each operand to an integer
+    (each operand must yield an integer in the range -32768 to 32767, or
+    else an Overflow error occurs), then performs a bitwise comparison of
+    the results, according to the truth table below:
+
+                     <U>exp1  exp2     exp1 AND exp2</U>
+                       1    1             1
+                       1    0             0
+                       0    1             0
+                       0    0             0
+
+    The result is an integer.
+
+<B>   exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any expression that produces a numeric result. This
+                includes Boolean expressions, where a TRUE result is
+                evaluated as -1 and a FALSE result is evaluated as 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng37443.html">NOT</A>
+<A HREF="ng379af.html">OR</A>
+<A HREF="ng37c50.html">XOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng37efe.html">EQV</A>
+<A HREF="ng381a3.html">IMP</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng379af.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng379af.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..787feed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng379af.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng3770a.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng37c50.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>OR                       Logical OR</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 OR exp2</B>
+
+    OR is a logical operator. BASIC converts each operand to an integer
+    (each operand must yield an integer in the range -32768 to 32767, or
+    else an Overflow error occurs), then performs a bitwise comparison of
+    the results, according to the truth table below:
+
+                     <U>exp1  exp2     exp1 OR exp2</U>
+                       1    1             1
+                       1    0             1
+                       0    1             1
+                       0    0             0
+
+    The result is an integer.
+
+<B>   exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any expression that produces a numeric result. This
+                includes Boolean expressions, where a TRUE result is
+                evaluated as -1 and a FALSE result is evaluated as 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng37443.html">NOT</A>
+<A HREF="ng3770a.html">AND</A>
+<A HREF="ng37c50.html">XOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng37efe.html">EQV</A>
+<A HREF="ng381a3.html">IMP</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng37c50.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng37c50.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..041a992
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng37c50.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng379af.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng37efe.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>XOR                      Logical Exclusive OR</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 XOR exp2</B>
+
+    XOR is a logical operator. BASIC converts each operand to an integer
+    (each operand must yield an integer in the range -32768 to 32767, or
+    else an Overflow error occurs), then performs a bitwise comparison of
+    the results, according to the truth table below:
+
+                     <U>exp1  exp2     exp1 XOR exp2</U>
+                       1    1             0
+                       1    0             1
+                       0    1             1
+                       0    0             0
+
+    The result is an integer.
+
+<B>   exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any expression that produces a numeric result. This
+                includes Boolean expressions, where a TRUE result is
+                evaluated as -1 and a FALSE result is evaluated as 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng37443.html">NOT</A>
+<A HREF="ng3770a.html">AND</A>
+<A HREF="ng379af.html">OR</A>
+<A HREF="ng37efe.html">EQV</A>
+<A HREF="ng381a3.html">IMP</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng37efe.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng37efe.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f0d3636
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng37efe.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng37c50.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng381a3.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>EQV                      Equivalence</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 EQV exp2</B>
+
+    EQV is a logical operator. BASIC converts each operand to an integer
+    (each operand must yield an integer in the range -32768 to 32767, or
+    else an Overflow error occurs), then performs a bitwise comparison of
+    the results, according to the truth table below:
+
+                     <U>exp1  exp2     exp1 EQV exp2</U>
+                       1    1             1
+                       1    0             0
+                       0    1             0
+                       0    0             1
+
+    The result is an integer.
+
+<B>   exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any expression that produces a numeric result. This
+                includes Boolean expressions, where a TRUE result is
+                evaluated as -1 and a FALSE result is evaluated as 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng37443.html">NOT</A>
+<A HREF="ng3770a.html">AND</A>
+<A HREF="ng379af.html">OR</A>
+<A HREF="ng37c50.html">XOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng381a3.html">IMP</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng381a3.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng381a3.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1175e84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng381a3.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng37efe.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng34ce6.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>IMP                      Implication</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 IMP exp2</B>
+
+    IMP is a logical operator. BASIC converts each operand to an integer
+    (each operand must yield an integer in the range -32768 to 32767, or
+    else an Overflow error occurs), then performs a bitwise comparison of
+    the results, according to the truth table below:
+
+                     <U>exp1  exp2     exp1 IMP exp2</U>
+                       1    1             1
+                       1    0             0
+                       0    1             1
+                       0    0             1
+
+    The result is an integer.
+
+<B>   exp1</B>,<B>exp2</B>    Any expression that produces a numeric result. This
+                includes Boolean expressions, where a TRUE result is
+                evaluated as -1 and a FALSE result is evaluated as 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng37443.html">NOT</A>
+<A HREF="ng3770a.html">AND</A>
+<A HREF="ng379af.html">OR</A>
+<A HREF="ng37c50.html">XOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng37efe.html">EQV</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng38448.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng38448.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..90d52ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng38448.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]
+[^^Up^^]
+[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>                            BASIC Data Types</B>
+
+                   Declaration
+  <U>Type</U>             <U>Character</U> *       <U>Range</U>       <U>Accuracy</U>       <U>Storage</U>
+  Integer               %      -32768 to 32767   Perfect        2 bytes
+  Single precision      !      10E-38 to 10E38   6 digits       4 bytes
+  Double precision      #      10D-38 to 10D38   16 digits      8 bytes
+  String                $                                       See below
+
+  *  Variables may also be typed by means of BASIC's DEFtype statements:
+     DEFINT, DEFSNG, DEFDBL, and DEFSTR. Variables that are not explicitly
+     typed are treated as single precision.
+
+     String storage: 4 bytes for descriptor, 1 byte for string back
+                     pointer, and 1 byte for each character in
+                     the string.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng386bd.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng386bd.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a95c7c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng386bd.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]
+[^^Up^^]
+[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>               Command-Line Switches and Compiler Options</B>
+
+ <B>Command-line syntax:</B>
+
+ <B>QB [</B><U>source</U><B>] [/b] [/g] [/l</B><U>library</U><B>]] [c:</B><U>buffsize</U><B>] [</B><U>options</U><B>] [/cmd</B><U>string</U><B>]</B>
+
+      <U>source</U>    A source code file that's loaded when QB is invoked.
+
+          <B>/b</B>    Turns off the color burst. For use with composite displays
+                attached to CGAs.
+
+          <B>/g</B>    Turns off snow suppression. Produces faster screen update,
+                but may also produce snow. Has no effect on screens
+                attached to Monochrome Display Adapters or EGAs.
+
+<B>   /l</B><U>library</U>    Loads a specified user library. The argument <U>library</U>
+                defaults to USERLIB.EXE.
+
+  <B>c:</B><U>buffsize</U>    Specifies the size, in bytes, of the buffer for receiving
+                communications data. Default: 256 bytes, maximum: 32767
+                bytes. The transmit buffer is fixed at 128 bytes.
+
+     <U>options</U>   Specifies one or more compiler options. See below.
+
+  /<B>cmd</B><U>string</U>    Passes arguments at run time to a memory-compiled program.
+                Everything from /cmd to the carriage return is accessible
+                via the COMMAND$ function.
+
+ <B>Compiler options</B>
+
+          <B>/d</B>    <U>Debug</U>. Generates code that checks for arithmetic overflow,
+                array bounds, RETURNs without GOSUBs, and Ctrl-Break. Also
+                produces line number references for runtime errors and
+                enables the use of TRON and TROFF.
+
+          <B>/e</B>    <U>On Error</U>. For use when the program includes one or more ON
+                ERROR GOTO linenumber constructions.
+
+        <B>/MBF    </B><U>Microsoft Binary Format</U>. Designed to be used with the math
+                coprocessor version of QuickBASIC, /MBF reads data in
+                files stored via previous versions of BASIC and converts
+                it from Microsoft Binary Format to IEEE floating-point
+                format. The files are converted as they are read in, and
+                reconverted to MBF as they are written back to disk. An
+                alternative to the use of CVSMBF and CVDMBF, the /MBF
+                option allows you to preserve your original data files, so
+                they may be accessed on machines without coprocessors.
+
+          <B>/o</B>    <U>Obj(BCOM.LIB)</U>. Produces an object file linked with
+                selected routines from BCOM.LIB, instead of with BRUN.LIB.
+                Programs compiled in this manner are likely to use less
+                RAM and run faster, but take up more disk space. CHAIN and
+                COMMON are not supported by BCOM.LIB. For more
+                information, see Appendix D of the QuickBASIC manual.
+
+          <B>/q</B>    <U>Speed</U>. Optimizes for fast execution at the expense of
+                program size.
+
+          <B>/r</B>    <U>Arrays in Row Order</U>. Instructs the compiler to store
+                arrays in row order, so that, for example, ARRAY(2,1)
+                would be followed by ARRAY(2,2) instead of by ARRAY(3,1).
+                The compiler's (and the interpreter's) default storage is
+                in column order.
+
+          <B>/s</B>    <U>Turns off the Minimize String Data option</U>. By default, the
+                compiler references duplicate string literals at the same
+                memory location, in order to minimize storage
+                requirements. That requires it to keep all strings in
+                memory throughout compilation. Some programs with large
+                numbers of strings may cause memory overflow errors as a
+                result. The /s option turns off this default.
+
+          <B>/v</B>    <U>Checking Between Statements</U>. Enables event trapping, with
+                checking after each statement instead of after each
+                program line.
+
+          <B>/w</B>    <U>Event Trapping</U>. Enables event trapping, with checking
+                after each program line.
+
+          <B>/x</B>    <U>Resume Next</U>. For use with programs that contain one or
+                more RESUME, RESUME NEXT, or RESUME 0 statements.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3938.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3938.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..44917df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3938.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng3702.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng3ce3.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>=                        Equal to/Assignment Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 = exp2</B>
+
+    = is a relational operator. If <U>exp1</U> has the same value as <U>exp2</U>, the
+    result of <U>exp1</U> = <U>exp2</U> is -1; otherwise the result is 0. In IF
+    statements, BASIC regards 0 as equivalent to FALSE and all nonzero
+    values as equivalent to TRUE.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any numeric or string expression, but <U>exp1</U> and <U>exp2</U> must
+                either both be numeric or both be strings; otherwise a
+                Type Mismatch error occurs.
+
+    <B>Assignment</B>
+
+ <B>[LET] var = exp1</B>
+
+    As an assignment operator, = stores the value of <U>exp1</U> in variable <U>var</U>.
+    The keyword LET is optional (and is usually omitted).
+
+         <U>var</U>    A legal variable name, of any type.
+
+        <U>exp1</U>    Any numeric expression, but <U>exp1</U> and <U>exp2</U> must either both
+                be numeric or both be strings; otherwise a Type Mismatch
+                error occurs.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng3702.html"><></A>
+<A HREF="ng2f41.html"><</A>
+<A HREF="ng3ce3.html">></A>
+<A HREF="ng330f.html"><=</A>
+<A HREF="ng40a9.html">>=</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3943b.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3943b.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a19614f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3943b.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]
+[^^Up^^]
+[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>      How BASIC converts data from one precision to another</B>
+
+   1. If a variable of one type is assigned to a variable of
+      another, the data takes on the precision of the target
+      variable.
+
+   2. When a higher-precision value (constant or variable) is
+      assigned to a variable of lower precision, the value is
+      rounded, rather than truncated.
+
+   3. When a lower-precision value (constant or variable) is
+      assigned to a higher-precision variable, its accuracy is
+      limited to that of the lower-precision value.
+
+   4. When an expression is evaluated, all operands are converted
+      to the same level of precision--that of the
+      highest-precision operand in the expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng38448.html">Data Types</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng39706.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng39706.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8482bba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng39706.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]
+[^^Up^^]
+[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>                        QuickBASIC 3.0 Reserved Words</B>
+
+    ABS         DATA        GOTO$       MKDIR          RANDOM      SWAP
+    ACCESS      DATE$       HEX$        MKDMBF$        RANDOMIZE   SYSTEM
+    AND         DO          IF          MKI$           READ        TAB
+    APPEND      DEF FN      IMP         MKS$           REDIM       TAN
+    AS          DEF SEG     INKEY$      MKSMBF$        REM         THEN
+    ASC         DEF USR     INP         MOD            RENUM       TIME$
+    ATN         DEFDBL      INPUT       MOTOR          RESET       TIMER
+    AUTO        DEFINT      INPUT#      NAME           RESTORE     TO
+    BASE        DEFSNG      INPUT$      NEW            RESUME      TROFF
+    BEEP        DEFSTR      INSTR       NEXT           RETURN      TRON
+    BLOAD       DELETE      INT         NOISE*         RIGHT$      UBOUND
+    BSAVE       DIM         IOCTL       NOT            RMDIR       UNLOCK
+    CALL        DO*         IOCTL$      NULL*          RND         UNTIL
+    CALLS       DRAW        KEY         OCT$           RSET        USING
+    CASE        EDIT        KILL        OFF            RUN         USR
+    CDBL        ELSE        LBOUND      ON             SADD        USR0
+    CHAIN       ELSEIF      LCOPY       OPEN           SAVE        USR1
+    CHDIR       END         LEFT$       OPEN COM       SCREEN      USR2
+    CHR$        ENVIRON     LEN         OPTION         SEG         USR3
+    CINT        ENVIRON$    LET         OR             SELECT      USR4
+    CIRCLE      EOF         LINE        OUT            SGN         USR5
+    CLEAR       EQV         LIST        OUTPUT         SHARED      USR6
+    CLOSE       ERASE       LLIST       PAINT          SHELL       USR7
+    CLS         ERDEV       LOAD        PALETTE USING  SIN         USR8
+    COLOR       ERDEV$      LOC         PEEK           SOUND       USR9
+    COM         ERL         LOCAL       PEN            SPACE       VAL
+    COMMAND$    ERR         LOCATE      PLAY           SPACE$      VARPTR
+    COMMON      ERROR       LOCK        PMAP           SPC         VARPTR$
+    CONST       EXIT        LOF         POINT          SQR         VIEW
+    CONT        EXP         LOG         POKE           STATIC      WAIT
+    COS         FIELD       LOOP        POS            STEP        WEND
+    CSNG        FILES       LPOS        PRESET         STICK       WHILE
+    CSRLIN      FIX         LPRINT      PRINT          STOP        WIDTH
+    CVD         FOR         LPRINT#     PRINT#         STRIG       WINDOW
+    CVDMBF      FRE         LSET        PRINT# USING   STR$        WRITE
+    CVSMBF      GET         MERGE       PSET           STRING$     WRITE#
+    CVI         GO          MID$        PUT            SUB         XOR
+    CVS         GOSUB       MKD$
+
+    * Reserved for future versions
+    .
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng39d55.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng39d55.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..60c6ff6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng39d55.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]
+[^^Up^^]
+[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+    <B>QuickBASIC Runtime Errors</B>
+
+    1     (not defined)
+    2     Syntax error
+    3     RETURN without GOSUB
+    4     Out of data
+    5     Illegal function call
+    6     Overflow
+    7     Out of memory
+    8     (not defined)
+    9     Subscript out of range
+    10    Redimensioned array
+    11    Division by zero
+    12    (not defined)
+    13    Type mismatch
+    14    Out of string space
+    15    (not defined)
+    16    String formula too complex
+    17    (not defined)
+    18    (not defined)
+    19    No RESUME
+    20    RESUME without error
+    21    (not defined)
+    22    (not defined)
+    23    (not defined)
+    24    Device timeout
+    25    (not defined)
+    26    (not defined)
+    27    (not defined)
+    28    (not defined)
+    29    (not defined)
+    30    (not defined)
+    31    (not defined)
+    32    (not defined)
+    33    (not defined)
+    34    (not defined)
+    35    (not defined)
+    36    (not defined)
+    37    (not defined)
+    38    (not defined)
+    39    CASE ELSE expected
+    40    (not defined)
+    41    (not defined)
+    42    (not defined)
+    43    (not defined)
+    44    (not defined)
+    45    (not defined)
+    46    (not defined)
+    47    (not defined)
+    48    (not defined)
+    49    (not defined)
+    50    FIELD overflow
+    51    Internal error
+    52    Bad file number
+    53    File not found
+    54    Bad file mode
+    55    File already open
+    56    (not defined)
+    57    Device I/O error
+    58    File already exists
+    59    (not defined)
+    60    (not defined)
+    61    Disk full
+    62    Input past end
+    63    Bad record number
+    64    Bad file name
+    65    (not defined)
+    66    (not defined)
+    67    Too many files
+    68    Device unavailable
+    69    (not defined)
+    70    Permission denied
+    71    Disk not ready
+    72    Disk media error
+    73    (not defined)
+    74    Rename across disks
+    75    Path/file access error
+    76    Path not found
+
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3a3de.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3a3de.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..461bfb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3a3de.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]
+[^^Up^^]
+[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+ <B>Dec   Hex  Char         Dec   Hex  Char   Dec   Hex  Char   Dec   Hex  Char</B>
+   0   00h       NUL  |   64   40h   <B>@</B>  |  128   80h   <B>.</B>  |  192   C0h   <B>+</B>
+   1   01h   <B>.</B>   SOH  |   65   41h   <B>A</B>  |  129   81h   <B>.</B>  |  193   C1h   <B>-</B>
+   2   02h   <B>.</B>   STX  |   66   42h   <B>B</B>  |  130   82h   <B>.</B>  |  194   C2h   <B>-</B>
+   3   03h   <B>.</B>   ETX  |   67   43h   <B>C</B>  |  131   83h   <B>.</B>  |  195   C3h   <B>|</B>
+   4   04h   <B>.</B>   EOT  |   68   44h   <B>D</B>  |  132   84h   <B>.</B>  |  196   C4h   <B>-</B>
+   5   05h   <B>.</B>   ENQ  |   69   45h   <B>E</B>  |  133   85h   <B>.</B>  |  197   C5h   <B>+</B>
+   6   06h   <B>.</B>   ACK  |   70   46h   <B>F</B>  |  134   86h   <B>.</B>  |  198   C6h   <B>-</B>
+   7   07h   <B>.</B>   BEL  |   71   47h   <B>G</B>  |  135   87h   <B>.</B>  |  199   C7h   <B>-</B>
+   8   08h   <B>.</B>   BS   |   72   48h   <B>H</B>  |  136   88h   <B>.</B>  |  200   C8h   <B>+</B>
+   9   09h   <B>.</B>   HT   |   73   49h   <B>I</B>  |  137   89h   <B>.</B>  |  201   C9h   <B>+</B>
+  10   0Ah   <B>.</B>   LF   |   74   4Ah   <B>J</B>  |  138   8Ah   <B>.</B>  |  202   CAh   <B>-</B>
+  11   0Bh   <B>.</B>   VT   |   75   4Bh   <B>K</B>  |  139   8Bh   <B>.</B>  |  203   CBh   <B>-</B>
+  12   0Ch   <B>.</B>   FF   |   76   4Ch   <B>L</B>  |  140   8Ch   <B>.</B>  |  204   CCh   <B>|</B>
+  13   0Dh   <B>.</B>   CR   |   77   4Dh   <B>M</B>  |  141   8Dh   <B>.</B>  |  205   CDh   <B>-</B>
+  14   0Eh   <B>.</B>   SO   |   78   4Eh   <B>N</B>  |  142   8Eh   <B>.</B>  |  206   CEh   <B>+</B>
+  15   0Fh   <B>.</B>   SI   |   79   4Fh   <B>O</B>  |  143   8Fh   <B>.</B>  |  207   CFh   <B>-</B>
+  16   10h   <B>.</B>   DLE  |   80   50h   <B>P</B>  |  144   90h   <B>.</B>  |  208   D0h   <B>-</B>
+  17   11h   <B>.</B>   DC1  |   81   51h   <B>Q</B>  |  145   91h   <B>.</B>  |  209   D1h   <B>-</B>
+  18   12h   <B>.</B>   DC2  |   82   52h   <B>R</B>  |  146   92h   <B>.</B>  |  210   D2h   <B>-</B>
+  19   13h   <B>.</B>   DC3  |   83   53h   <B>S</B>  |  147   93h   <B>.</B>  |  211   D3h   <B>+</B>
+  20   14h   <B>.</B>   DC4  |   84   54h   <B>T</B>  |  148   94h   <B>.</B>  |  212   D4h   <B>+</B>
+  21   15h   <B>.</B>   NAK  |   85   55h   <B>U</B>  |  149   95h   <B>.</B>  |  213   D5h   <B>+</B>
+  22   16h   <B>.</B>   SYN  |   86   56h   <B>V</B>  |  150   96h   <B>.</B>  |  214   D6h   <B>+</B>
+  23   17h   <B>.</B>   ETB  |   87   57h   <B>W</B>  |  151   97h   <B>.</B>  |  215   D7h   <B>+</B>
+  24   18h   <B>.</B>   CAN  |   88   58h   <B>X</B>  |  152   98h   <B>.</B>  |  216   D8h   <B>+</B>
+  25   19h   <B>.</B>        |   89   59h   <B>Y</B>  |  153   99h   <B>.</B>  |  217   D9h   <B>+</B>
+  26   1Ah   <B>.</B>   SUB  |   90   5Ah   <B>Z</B>  |  154   9Ah   <B>.</B>  |  218   DAh   <B>+</B>
+  27   1Bh   <B>.</B>   ESC  |   91   5Bh   <B>[</B>  |  155   9Bh   <B>.</B>  |  219   DBh   <B>#</B>
+  28   1Ch   <B>.</B>   FS   |   92   5Ch   <B>\</B>  |  156   9Ch   <B>.</B>  |  220   DCh   <B>#</B>
+  29   1Dh   <B>.</B>   GS   |   93   5Dh   <B>]</B>  |  157   9Dh   <B>.</B>  |  221   DDh   <B>#</B>
+  30   1Eh   <B>.</B>   RS   |   94   5Eh   <B>^</B>  |  158   9Eh   <B>.</B>  |  222   DEh   <B>#</B>
+  31   1Fh   <B>.</B>   US   |   95   5Fh   <B>_</B>  |  159   9Fh   <B>.</B>  |  223   DFh   <B>#</B>
+  32   20h   <B>    </B>     |   96   60h   <B>`</B>  |  160   A0h   <B>.</B>  |  224   E0h   <B>.</B>
+  33   21h   <B>!</B>        |   97   61h   <B>a</B>  |  161   A1h   <B>.</B>  |  225   E1h   <B>.</B>
+  34   22h   <B>"</B>        |   98   62h   <B>b</B>  |  162   A2h   <B>.</B>  |  226   E2h   <B>.</B>
+  35   23h   <B>#</B>        |   99   63h   <B>c</B>  |  163   A3h   <B>.</B>  |  227   E3h   <B>.</B>
+  36   24h   <B>$</B>        |   100  64h   <B>d</B>  |  164   A4h   <B>.</B>  |  228   E4h   <B>.</B>
+  37   25h   <B>%</B>        |   101  65h   <B>e</B>  |  165   A5h   <B>.</B>  |  229   E5h   <B>.</B>
+  38   26h   <B>&amp;</B>        |   102  66h   <B>f</B>  |  166   A6h   <B>.</B>  |  230   E6h   <B>.</B>
+  39   27h   <B>'</B>        |   103  67h   <B>g</B>  |  167   A7h   <B>.</B>  |  231   E7h   <B>.</B>
+  40   28h   <B>(</B>        |   104  68h   <B>h</B>  |  168   A8h   <B>.</B>  |  232   E8h   <B>.</B>
+  41   29h   <B>)</B>        |   105  69h   <B>i</B>  |  169   A9h   <B>.</B>  |  233   E9h   <B>.</B>
+  42   2Ah   <B>*</B>        |   106  6Ah   <B>j</B>  |  170   AAh   <B>.</B>  |  234   EAh   <B>.</B>
+  43   2Bh   <B>+</B>        |   107  6Bh   <B>k</B>  |  171   ABh   <B>.</B>  |  235   EBh   <B>.</B>
+  44   2Ch   <B>,</B>        |   108  6Ch   <B>l</B>  |  172   ACh   <B>.</B>  |  236   ECh   <B>.</B>
+  45   2Dh   <B>-</B>        |   109  6Dh   <B>m</B>  |  173   ADh   <B>.</B>  |  237   EDh   <B>.</B>
+  46   2Eh   <B>.</B>        |   110  6Eh   <B>n</B>  |  174   AEh   <B>.</B>  |  238   EEh   <B>.</B>
+  47   2Fh   <B>/</B>        |   111  6Fh   <B>o</B>  |  175   AFh   <B>.</B>  |  239   EFh   <B>.</B>
+  48   30h   <B>0</B>        |   112  70h   <B>p</B>  |  176   B0h   <B>#</B>  |  240   F0h   <B>.</B>
+  49   31h   <B>1</B>        |   113  71h   <B>q</B>  |  177   B1h   <B>#</B>  |  241   F1h   <B>.</B>
+  50   32h   <B>2</B>        |   114  72h   <B>r</B>  |  178   B2h   <B>#</B>  |  242   F2h   <B>.</B>
+  51   33h   <B>3</B>        |   115  73h   <B>s</B>  |  179   B3h   <B>|</B>  |  243   F3h   <B>.</B>
+  52   34h   <B>4</B>        |   116  74h   <B>t</B>  |  180   B4h   <B>|</B>  |  244   F4h   <B>.</B>
+  53   35h   <B>5</B>        |   117  75h   <B>u</B>  |  181   B5h   <B>|</B>  |  245   F5h   <B>.</B>
+  54   36h   <B>6</B>        |   118  76h   <B>v</B>  |  182   B6h   <B>|</B>  |  246   F6h   <B>.</B>
+  55   37h   <B>7</B>        |   119  77h   <B>w</B>  |  183   B7h   <B>+</B>  |  247   F7h   <B>.</B>
+  56   38h   <B>8</B>        |   120  78h   <B>x</B>  |  184   B8h   <B>+</B>  |  248   F8h   <B>.</B>
+  57   39h   <B>9</B>        |   121  79h   <B>y</B>  |  185   B9h   <B>|</B>  |  249   F9h   <B>.</B>
+  58   3Ah   <B>:</B>        |   122  7Ah   <B>z</B>  |  186   BAh   <B>|</B>  |  250   FAh   <B>.</B>
+  59   3Bh   <B>;</B>        |   123  7Bh   <B>{</B>  |  187   BBh   <B>+</B>  |  251   FBh   <B>.</B>
+  60   3Ch   <B>&lt;</B>        |   124  7Ch   <B>|</B>  |  188   BCh   <B>+</B>  |  252   FCh   <B>.</B>
+  61   3Dh   <B>=</B>        |   125  7Dh   <B>}</B>  |  189   BDh   <B>+</B>  |  253   FDh   <B>.</B>
+  62   3Eh   <B>&gt;</B>        |   126  7Eh   <B>~</B>  |  190   BEh   <B>+</B>  |  254   FEh   <B>.</B>
+  63   3Fh   <B>?</B>        |   127  7Fh   <B>.</B>  |  191   BFh   <B>+</B>  |  255   FFh
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3b7e3.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3b7e3.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b89ce4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3b7e3.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]
+[^^Up^^]
+[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+       218   196   194    191                   201   205   203    187
+         <B>+</B>----<B>-</B>-----<B>-</B>-----<B>+</B>                       <B>+</B>----<B>-</B>-----<B>-</B>-----<B>+</B>
+     179 |     197  |     | 179               186 |     206  |     | 186
+         |        \ |     |                       |        \ |     |
+     195 <B>|</B>----------<B>+</B>-----<B>|</B> 180               204 <B>|</B>----------<B>+</B>-----<B>|</B> 185
+         |          |     |                       |          |     |
+         <B>+</B>----<B>-</B>-----<B>-</B>-----<B>+</B>                       <B>+</B>----------<B>-</B>-----<B>+</B>
+       192   196   193    217                   200   205   202    188
+
+
+
+
+       213   205   209    184                   214   196   210    183
+         <B>+</B>----<B>-</B>-----<B>-</B>-----<B>+</B>                       <B>+</B>----<B>-</B>-----<B>-</B>-----<B>+</B>
+     179 |     216  |     | 179               186 |     215  |     | 186
+         |        \ |     |                       |        \ |     |
+     198 <B>-</B>----------<B>+</B>-----<B>|</B> 181               199 <B>-</B>----------<B>+</B>-----<B>|</B> 182
+         |          |     |                       |          |     |
+         <B>+</B>----<B>-</B>-----<B>-</B>-----<B>+</B>                       <B>+</B>----<B>-</B>-----<B>-</B>-----<B>+</B>
+       212   205   207    190                   211   196   208    189
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3bb15.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3bb15.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f994a14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3bb15.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]
+[^^Up^^]
+[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+ ---------------------------------- <B>Arrows</B> ----------------------------------
+
+               <B>.</B>   30            <B>.</B>   24            <B>.</B>  18
+               <B>.</B>   31            <B>.</B>   25            <B>.</B>  23
+               <B>.</B>   16            <B>.</B>   26
+               <B>.</B>   17            <B>.</B>   27            <B>.</B>  29
+
+ ----------------------------- <B>Block Characters</B> -----------------------------
+                                                   -
+               <B>#</B>  176             <B>#</B> - 219
+                                                   <B>#</B>  221
+               <B>#</B>  177             <B>#</B> - 220
+                                                   <B>#</B>  222
+               <B>#</B>  178             <B>#</B> - 223
+                                                   -
+ ----------------------- <B>Foreign-Language Characters</B> ------------------------
+
+ 131   <B>.</B>          |  136   <B>.</B>          |  147   <B>.</B>          |  150   <B>.</B>
+ 132   <B>.</B>  <B>.</B>  142  |  137   <B>.</B>          |  148   <B>.  .</B>  153  |  129   <B>.  .</B>  154
+ 133   <B>.</B>          |  138   <B>.</B>          |  149   <B>.</B>          |  151   <B>.</B>
+ 160   <B>.</B>          |  130   <B>.  .</B>  144  |  162   <B>.</B>          |  163   <B>.</B>
+ 134   <B>.  .</B>  143  |                   |                   |
+                  |  140   <B>.</B>          |  164   <B>.  .</B>  165  |  152   <B>.</B>
+ 145   <B>.  .</B>  146  |  139   <B>.</B>          |                   |
+                  |  141   <B>.</B>          |  225   <B>.</B>          |
+ 135   <B>.  .</B>  128  |  161   <B>.</B>          |                   |
+
+ -------------------- <B>Miscellaneous Language Characters</B> ---------------------
+
+      <B>.</B>  155            <B>.</B>  166               <B>.</B>  168              <B>.</B>  19
+      <B>.</B>  156            <B>.</B>  167               <B>.</B>  173              <B>.</B>  20
+      <B>.</B>  157                                 <B>.</B>  174              <B>.</B>  21
+      <B>.</B>  159                                 <B>.</B>  175              <B>.</B>  158
+
+ ------------------------ <B>Math and Greek Characters</B> -------------------------
+
+    <B>.</B>  143                            <B>.</B>  224                     alpha
+    <B>.</B>  238                            <B>.</B>  225                     beta
+    <B>.</B>  239                                        <B>.</B>  226         gamma
+    <B>.</B>  240                            <B>.</B>  235                     delta
+    <B>.</B>  241                            <B>.</B>  233                     theta
+    <B>.</B>  242           244              <B>.</B>  230                     mu
+    <B>.</B>  243            <B>.</B>               <B>.</B>  227                     pi
+    <B>.</B>  244            <B>|</B> 179           <B>.</B>  229      <B>.</B>  228         sigma
+    <B>.</B>  245            <B>.</B>               <B>.</B>  231                     tau
+    <B>.</B>  246           245              <B>.</B>  237      <B>.</B>  232         phi
+    <B>.</B>  247                                        <B>.</B>  234         omega
+    <B>.</B>  248
+    <B>.</B>  249
+    <B>.</B>  250
+    <B>.</B>  251
+    <B>.</B>  252
+    <B>.</B>  253
+    <B>.</B>  236
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3c223.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3c223.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..33f4da1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3c223.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]
+[^^Up^^]
+[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B> Number  I   R   G   B   Monochrome     Color          Background  Foreground</B>
+ ------ --- --- --- ---  ----------     -----          ----------  ----------
+   0     0   0   0   0   Black          Black            Sample      Sample 
+   1     0   0   0   1   Underlined     Blue             Sample      Sample 
+   2     0   0   1   0                  Green            Sample      Sample 
+   3     0   0   1   1                  Cyan             Sample      Sample 
+   4     0   1   0   0                  Red              Sample      Sample 
+   5     0   1   0   1                  Violet           Sample      Sample 
+   6     0   1   1   0                  Brown            Sample      Sample 
+   7     0   1   1   1   White          White            Sample      Sample 
+
+   8     1   0   0   0                  Grey             Sample      Sample 
+   9     1   0   0   1   Brt Underline  Bright Blue      Sample      Sample 
+  10     1   0   1   0                  Bright Green     Sample      Sample 
+  11     1   0   1   1                  Bright Cyan      Sample      Sample 
+  12     1   1   0   0                  Bright Red       Sample      Sample 
+  13     1   1   0   1                  Bright Violet    Sample      Sample 
+  14     1   1   1   0                  Yellow           Sample      Sample 
+  15     1   1   1   1   Bright White   Bright White     Sample      Sample 
+
+  --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    <B>Notes:</B>  Background colors 8 through 15 are the same color as 0 through
+            7, but blinking rather than steady.
+
+            Character attributes contain both a foreground and a background
+            color, and are calculated as follows:
+
+                   attribute = 256 * background + foreground
+
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3c7f0.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3c7f0.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..82b5bee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3c7f0.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,448 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]
+[^^Up^^]
+[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>                               Keyboard Codes</B>
+
+    This table lists (in decimal notation) the values that are placed in
+    the keyboard buffer by all the possible keystrokes and two-keystroke
+    combinations on the 83/84-key and 101/102-key keyboards. These are the
+    values returned (as strings) by the INKEY$ function.
+
+                              <B>     83/84-Key[1]    101/102-Key</B>
+<B>   Keystroke                        Keyboard       Keyboard[2]</B>
+      Esc                              027             same
+      1                                049             same
+      2                                050             same
+      3                                051             same
+      4                                052             same
+      5                                053             same
+      6                                054             same
+      7                                055             same
+      8                                056             same
+      9                                057             same
+      0                                048             same
+      -                                045             same
+      =                                061             same
+      Backspace                        008             same
+      Tab                              009             same
+      q                                113             same
+      w                                119             same
+      e                                101             same
+      r                                114             same
+      t                                116             same
+      y                                121             same
+      u                                117             same
+      i                                105             same
+      o                                111             same
+      p                                112             same
+      [                                091             same
+      ]                                093             same
+      Enter                            013             same
+      Ctrl                              **               **
+      a                                097             same
+      s                                115             same
+      d                                100             same
+      f                                102             same
+      g                                103             same
+      h                                104             same
+      j                                106             same
+      k                                107             same
+      l                                108             same
+      ;                                059             same
+      '                                039             same
+      `                                096             same
+      Shift                             **               **
+      \                                092             same
+      z                                122             same
+      x                                120             same
+      c                                099             same
+      v                                118             same
+      b                                 98             same
+      n                                110             same
+      m                                109             same
+      ,                                044             same
+      .                                046             same
+      /                                047             same
+      Gray *                           042             same
+      Alt                               **               **
+      Space                            032             same
+      Caps Lock                         **               **
+      F1                           000 059             same
+      F2                           000 060             same
+      F3                           000 061             same
+      F4                           000 062             same
+      F5                           000 063             same
+      F6                           000 064             same
+      F7                           000 065             same
+      F8                           000 066             same
+      F9                           000 067             same
+      F10                          000 068             same
+      F11                           no key          000 133
+      F12                           no key          000 134
+      Num Lock                          **               **
+      Scroll Lock                       **               **
+      White Home                   000 071             same
+      White Up Arrow               000 072             same
+      White PgUp                   000 073             same
+      Gray -                           045             same
+      White Left Arrow             000 075             same
+      Center Key                        --          000 076
+      White Right Arrow            000 077             same
+      Gray +                           043             same
+      White End                    000 079             same
+      White Down Arrow             000 080             same
+      White PgDn                   000 081             same
+      White Ins                    000 082             same
+      White Del                    000 083             same
+      SysReq                        no key               **
+      Key 45 [3]                    no key              092
+      Enter (number keypad)         no key          000 013
+      Gray /                        no key          000 047
+      PrtSc                         no key               **
+      Pause                         no key               **
+      Gray Home                     no key              071
+      Gray Up Arrow                 no key              072
+      Gray Page Up                  no key              073
+      Gray Left Arrow               no key              075
+      Gray Right Arrow              no key              077
+      Gray End                      no key              079
+      Gray Down Arrow               no key              080
+      Gray Page Down                no key              081
+      Gray Insert                   no key              082
+      Gray Delete                   no key              083
+
+      Shift Esc                        027             same
+      !                                033             same
+      @                                064             same
+      #                                035             same
+      $                                036             same
+      %                                037             same
+      ^                                094             same
+      &amp;                                038             same
+      * (white)                        042             same
+      (                                040             same
+      )                                041             same
+      _                                095             same
+      + (white)                        043             same
+      Shift Backspace                  008             same
+      Shift Tab (Backtab)          000 015             same
+      Q                                081             same
+      W                                087             same
+      E                                069             same
+      R                                082             same
+      T                                084             same
+      Y                                089             same
+      U                                085             same
+      I                                073             same
+      O                                079             same
+      P                                080             same
+      {                                123             same
+      }                                125             same
+      Shift Enter                      013             same
+      Shift Ctrl                        **               **
+      A                                065             same
+      S                                083             same
+      D                                068             same
+      F                                070             same
+      G                                071             same
+      H                                072             same
+      J                                074             same
+      K                                075             same
+      L                                076             same
+      :                                058             same
+      "                                034             same
+      ~                                126             same
+      |                                124             same
+      Z                                090             same
+      X                                088             same
+      C                                067             same
+      V                                086             same
+      B                                066             same
+      N                                078             same
+      M                                077             same
+      &lt;                                060             same
+      &gt;                                062             same
+      ?                                063             same
+      Shift Gray *                      **              042
+      Shift Alt                         **               **
+      Shift Space                      032             same
+      Shift Caps Lock                   **               **
+      Shift F1                     000 084             same
+      Shift F2                     000 085             same
+      Shift F3                     000 086             same
+      Shift F4                     000 087             same
+      Shift F5                     000 088             same
+      Shift F6                     000 089             same
+      Shift F7                     000 090             same
+      Shift F8                     000 091             same
+      Shift F9                     000 092             same
+      Shift F10                    000 093             same
+      Shift F11                     no key          000 135
+      Shift F12                     no key          000 136
+      Shift Num Lock                    **               **
+      Shift Scroll Lock                 **               **
+      Shift 7 (number pad)             055             same
+      Shift 8 (number pad)             056             same
+      Shift 9 (number pad)             057             same
+      Shift Gray -                     045             same
+      Shift 4 (number pad)             052             same
+      Shift 5 (number pad)             053             same
+      Shift 6 (number pad)             054             same
+      Shift Gray +                     043             same
+      Shift 1 (number pad)             049             same
+      Shift 2 (number pad)             050             same
+      Shift 3 (number pad)             051             same
+      Shift 0 (number pad)             048             same
+      Shift . (number pad)             046             same
+      Shift SysReq                  no key               **
+      Shift Key 45 [3]              no key              124
+      Shift Enter (number pad)      no key          000 013
+      Shift Gray /                  no key          000 047
+      Shift PrtSc                   no key               **
+      Shift Pause                   no key               **
+      Shift Gray Home               no key              071
+      Shift Gray Up Arrow           no key              072
+      Shift Gray Page Up            no key              073
+      Shift Gray Left Arrow         no key              075
+      Shift Gray Right Arrow        no key              077
+      Shift Gray End                no key              079
+      Shift Gray Down Arrow         no key              080
+      Shift Gray Page Down          no key              081
+      Shift Gray Insert             no key              082
+      Shift Gray Delete             no key              083
+
+      Ctrl Esc                         027             same
+      Ctrl 1                            --               --
+      Ctrl 2 (NUL)                 000 003             same
+      Ctrl 3                            --               --
+      Ctrl 4                            --               --
+      Ctrl 5                            --               --
+      Ctrl 6 (RS)                      030             same
+      Ctrl 7                            --               --
+      Ctrl 8                            --               --
+      Ctrl 9                            --               --
+      Ctrl 0                            --               --
+      Ctrl -                           031             same
+      Ctrl =                            --               --
+      Ctrl Backspace (DEL)             127             same
+      Ctrl Tab                          --              148
+      Ctrl q (DC1)                     017             same
+      Ctrl w (ETB)                     023             same
+      Ctrl e (ENQ)                     005             same
+      Ctrl r (DC2)                     018             same
+      Ctrl t (DC4)                     020             same
+      Ctrl y (EM)                      025             same
+      Ctrl u (NAK)                     021             same
+      Ctrl i (HT)                      009             same
+      Ctrl o (SI)                      015             same
+      Ctrl p (DEL)                     016             same
+      Ctrl [ (ESC)                     027             same
+      Ctrl ] (GS)                      029             same
+      Ctrl Enter (LF)                  010             same
+      Ctrl a (SOH)                     001             same
+      Ctrl s (DC3)                     019             same
+      Ctrl d (EOT)                     004             same
+      Ctrl f (ACK)                     006             same
+      Ctrl g (BEL)                     007             same
+      Ctrl h (Backspace)               008             same
+      Ctrl j (LF)                      010             same
+      Ctrl k (VT)                      011             same
+      Ctrl l (FF)                      012             same
+      Ctrl ;                            --               --
+      Ctrl '                            --               --
+      Ctrl `                            --               --
+      Ctrl Shift                        **               **
+      Ctrl \ (FS)                      028             same
+      Ctrl z (SUB)                     026             same
+      Ctrl x (CAN)                     024             same
+      Ctrl c (ETX)                     003             same
+      Ctrl v (SYN)                     022             same
+      Ctrl b (STX)                     002             same
+      Ctrl n (SO)                      014             same
+      Ctrl m (CR)                      013             same
+      Ctrl ,                            --               --
+      Ctrl .                            --               --
+      Ctrl /                            --               --
+      Ctrl Gray *                       --          000 150
+      Ctrl Alt                          **               **
+      Ctrl Space                       032             same
+      Ctrl Caps Lock                    --               --
+      Ctrl F1                      000 094             same
+      Ctrl F2                      000 095             same
+      Ctrl F3                      000 096             same
+      Ctrl F4                      000 097             same
+      Ctrl F5                      000 098             same
+      Ctrl F6                      000 099             same
+      Ctrl F7                      000 100             same
+      Ctrl F8                      000 101             same
+      Ctrl F9                      000 102             same
+      Ctrl F10                     000 103             same
+      Ctrl F11                      no key          000 137
+      Ctrl F12                      no key          000 138
+      Ctrl Num Lock                     --               --
+      Ctrl Scroll Lock                  --               --
+      Ctrl White Home              000 119             same
+      Ctrl White Up Arrow               --          000 141
+      Ctrl White PgUp              000 132             same
+      Ctrl Gray -                       --          000 142
+      Ctrl White Left Arrow        000 115             same
+      Ctrl 5 (number pad)               --          000 143
+      Ctrl White Right Arrow       000 116             same
+      Ctrl Gray +                       --          000 144
+      Ctrl White End               000 117             same
+      Ctrl White Down Arrow             --          000 145
+      Ctrl White PgDn              000 118             same
+      Ctrl White Ins                    --          000 146
+      Ctrl White Del                    --          000 147
+      Ctrl SysReq                   no key               **
+      Ctrl Key 45 [3]               no key               --
+      Ctrl Enter (number pad)       no key          000 010
+      Ctrl / (number pad)           no key          000 149
+      Ctrl PrtSc                    no key              114
+      Ctrl Break                    no key          000 000
+      Ctrl Gray Home                no key              119
+      Ctrl Gray Up Arrow            no key              141
+      Ctrl Gray Page Up             no key              132
+      Ctrl Gray Left Arrow          no key              115
+      Ctrl Gray Right Arrow         no key              116
+      Ctrl Gray End                 no key              117
+      Ctrl Gray Down Arrow          no key              145
+      Ctrl Gray Page Down           no key              118
+      Ctrl Gray Insert              no key              146
+      Ctrl Gray Delete              no key              147
+
+      Alt Esc                           --          000 001
+      Alt 1                        000 120             same
+      Alt 2                        000 121             same
+      Alt 3                        000 122             same
+      Alt 4                        000 123             same
+      Alt 5                        000 124             same
+      Alt 6                        000 125             same
+      Alt 7                        000 126             same
+      Alt 8                        000 127             same
+      Alt 9                        000 128             same
+      Alt 0                        000 129             same
+      Alt -                        000 130             same
+      Alt =                        000 131             same
+      Alt Backspace                     --          000 014
+      Alt Tab                           --          000 165
+      Alt q                        000 016             same
+      Alt w                        000 017             same
+      Alt e                        000 018             same
+      Alt r                        000 019             same
+      Alt t                        000 020             same
+      Alt y                        000 021             same
+      Alt u                        000 022             same
+      Alt i                        000 023             same
+      Alt o                        000 024             same
+      Alt p                        000 025             same
+      Alt [                             --          000 026
+      Alt ]                             --          000 027
+      Alt Enter                         --          000 028
+      Alt Ctrl                          **               **
+      Alt a                        000 030             same
+      Alt s                        000 031             same
+      Alt d                        000 032             same
+      Alt f                        000 033             same
+      Alt g                        000 034             same
+      Alt h                        000 035             same
+      Alt j                        000 036             same
+      Alt k                        000 037             same
+      Alt l                        000 038             same
+      Alt ;                             --          000 039
+      Alt '                             --          000 040
+      Alt `                             --          000 041
+      Alt Shift                         **               **
+      Alt \                             --          000 043
+      Alt z                        000 044             same
+      Alt x                        000 045             same
+      Alt c                        000 046             same
+      Alt v                        000 047             same
+      Alt b                        000 048             same
+      Alt n                        000 049             same
+      Alt m                        000 050             same
+      Alt ,                             --          000 051
+      Alt .                             --          000 052
+      Alt /                             --          000 053
+      Alt Gray *                        --          000 055
+      Alt Space                        032             same
+      Alt Caps Lock                     **               **
+      Alt F1                       000 104             same
+      Alt F2                       000 105             same
+      Alt F3                       000 106             same
+      Alt F4                       000 107             same
+      Alt F5                       000 108             same
+      Alt F6                       000 109             same
+      Alt F7                       000 110             same
+      Alt F8                       000 111             same
+      Alt F9                       000 112             same
+      Alt F10                      000 113             same
+      Alt F11                       no key          000 139
+      Alt F12                       no key          000 140
+      Alt Num Lock                      **               **
+      Alt Scroll Lock                   **               **
+      Alt Gray -                        --          000 074
+      Alt Gray +                        --          000 078
+      Alt 7 (number pad)                 #                #
+      Alt 8 (number pad)                 #                #
+      Alt 9 (number pad)                 #                #
+      Alt 4 (number pad)                 #                #
+      Alt 5 (number pad)                 #                #
+      Alt 6 (number pad)                 #                #
+      Alt 1 (number pad)                 #                #
+      Alt 2 (number pad)                 #                #
+      Alt 3 (number pad)                 #                #
+      Alt Del                           --               --
+      Alt SysReq                    no key               **
+      Alt Key 45 [3]                no key               --
+      Alt Enter (number pad)        no key          000 166
+      Alt / (number pad)                --          000 164
+      Alt PrtSc                     no key               **
+      Alt Pause                     no key               **
+      Alt Gray Home                 no key          000 151
+      Alt Gray Up Arrow             no key          000 152
+      Alt Gray Page Up              no key          000 153
+      Alt Gray Left Arrow           no key          000 155
+      Alt Gray Right Arrow          no key          000 157
+      Alt Gray End                  no key          000 159
+      Alt Gray Down Arrow           no key          000 160
+      Alt Gray Page Down            no key          000 161
+      Alt Gray Insert               no key          000 162
+      Alt Gray Delete               no key          000 163
+
+   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+<B>   Footnotes</B>
+<B>      </B>
+         [1]    The 83-key and 84-key keyboards are the original PC
+                keyboard and the original-layout AT keyboard,
+                respectively.
+
+         [2]    The 101/102-key keyboard is the current IBM standard
+                ("Enhanced") keyboard.
+
+         [3]    In the United States, the 101/102-key keyboard is shipped
+                with 101 keys. Overseas versions have an additional key
+                sandwiched between the left Shift key and the Z key. This
+                additional key is identified by IBM (and in this table) as
+                "Key 45."
+
+        [**]    Keys and key combinations marked ** are used by the ROM
+                BIOS but do not put values into the keyboard buffer.
+
+        [--]    Keys and key combinations marked -- are ignored by the ROM
+                BIOS.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3ce3.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3ce3.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2caa7a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3ce3.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng3938.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng40a9.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>&gt;                        Greater than Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 &gt; exp2</B>
+
+    &gt; is a relational operator. If the value of <U>exp1</U> is greater than that
+    of <U>exp2</U>, the result of <U>exp1</U> &gt; <U>exp2</U> is -1; otherwise the result is 0.
+    In IF statements, BASIC regards 0 as equivalent to FALSE and all
+    nonzero values as equivalent to TRUE.
+
+    If the operands are string expressions, BASIC compares the ASCII
+    values of the first character in each expression. If the first
+    characters have the same ASCII value, BASIC then evaluates the second
+    characters, and so on. If one string terminates before the other, and
+    the characters in each string are identical to that point, the shorter
+    string is considered "less" than the longer one.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any numeric or string expression, but <U>exp1</U> and <U>exp2</U> must
+                either both be numeric or both be strings; otherwise a
+                Type Mismatch error occurs.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng3938.html">=</A>
+<A HREF="ng3702.html"><></A>
+<A HREF="ng2f41.html"><</A>
+<A HREF="ng330f.html"><=</A>
+<A HREF="ng40a9.html">>=</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3f0fb.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3f0fb.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f534da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng3f0fb.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]
+[^^Up^^]
+[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+
+       The QuickBASIC 3.0  database, Copyright (C) 1987 by
+    Peter Norton Computing, Inc., was written by Craig Stinson,
+    Burton L. Alperson, Brad Kingsbury, John Socha, and Peter Norton.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng40a9.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng40a9.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f295f1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng40a9.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng3ce3.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng447e.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>&gt;=                       Greater than or Equal to Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 &gt;= exp2</B>
+
+    &gt;= is a relational operator. If the value of <U>exp1</U> is greater than that
+    of <U>exp2</U>, the result of <U>exp1</U> &lt; <U>exp2</U> is -1; otherwise the result is 0.
+    In IF statements, BASIC regards 0 as equivalent to FALSE and all
+    nonzero values as equivalent to TRUE.
+
+    If the operands are string expressions, BASIC compares the ASCII
+    values of the first character in each expression. If the first
+    characters have the same ASCII value, BASIC then evaluates the second
+    characters, and so on. If one string terminates before the other, and
+    the characters in each string are identical to that point, the shorter
+    string is considered "less" than the longer one.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any numeric or string expression, but <U>exp1</U> and <U>exp2</U> must
+                either both be numeric or both be strings; otherwise a
+                Type Mismatch error occurs.
+
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng3938.html">=</A>
+<A HREF="ng3702.html"><></A>
+<A HREF="ng2f41.html"><</A>
+<A HREF="ng3ce3.html">></A>
+<A HREF="ng330f.html"><=</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng447e.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng447e.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..be22c46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng447e.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng40a9.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng4642.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>\                        Integer Division Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 \ exp2</B>
+
+    The \ operator performs integer division. The operands are rounded
+    (not truncated) to integers before the division is performed, and the
+    result is truncated (not rounded) to an integer. The operands must
+    round to integers in the range -32768 through 32767.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any numeric expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng4642.html">^^</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ac8.html">-</A>
+<A HREF="ng267b.html">*</A>
+<A HREF="ng2d59.html">/</A>
+<A HREF="ng447e.html">\</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c6b1.html">MOD</A>
+<A HREF="ng282a.html">+</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng4642.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng4642.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..56c1ab6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng4642.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng447e.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng47f3.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>^                       Exponentiation Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 ^ exp2</B>
+
+    The ^ operator performs exponentiation. If the expression involves
+    operands of more than one precision, all operands are converted to the
+    same level--that of the highest-precision operand in the expression--
+    before the expression is evaluated.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any numeric expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng267b.html">*</A>
+<A HREF="ng2ac8.html">-</A>
+<A HREF="ng2d59.html">/</A>
+<A HREF="ng447e.html">\</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c6b1.html">MOD</A>
+<A HREF="ng282a.html">+</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng47f3.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng47f3.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d947f0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng47f3.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng4642.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng49b8.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>$DYNAMIC                 Declare Arrays Dynamic</B>
+
+ <B>REM</B> <B>$DYNAMIC</B>
+
+    Makes the default array allocation dynamic.
+
+   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    $DYNAMIC makes all subsequent arrays dynamic except for
+                those that are implicitly DIMensioned (i.e. used without a
+                DIM statement). Implicitly DIMensioned arrays are always
+                static.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng4c6c.html">$STATIC</A>
+<A HREF="ngdcd0.html">DIM</A>
+<A HREF="ngff2b.html">ERASE</A>
+<A HREF="ng1250d.html">FRE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng49b8.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng49b8.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..42b9d98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng49b8.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng47f3.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng4c6c.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>$INCLUDE                 Include File</B>
+
+ <B>REM</B> <B>$INCLUDE:</B> <U>filespec</U>
+
+    Causes compilation to branch to a specified text file, then return to
+    the main file when the end of the $INCLUDE file has been reached.
+
+    <U>filespec</U>    A string literal that follows DOS file-naming conventions.
+                The argument must be enclosed within single quote marks.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the include file was created with the BASIC
+                Interpreter, it must be saved in ASCII format.
+
+                The include file must not contain END statements.
+
+                Variables in the $INCLUDE file must be consistent with
+                those in the main program.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng4c6c.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng4c6c.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e567e7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng4c6c.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng49b8.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng4ddd.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>$STATIC                  Declare Arrays Static</B>
+
+ <B>REM</B> <B>$STATIC</B>
+
+    Makes the default array allocation static.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    $STATIC makes all subsequent arrays static, including
+                those that are DIMensioned with variable subscripts.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng4c6c.html">$STATIC</A>
+<A HREF="ngdcd0.html">DIM</A>
+<A HREF="ngff2b.html">ERASE</A>
+<A HREF="ng1250d.html">FRE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng4ddd.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng4ddd.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6813bf5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng4ddd.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng4c6c.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng50f1.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>'                        Comment</B>
+
+ <B>'</B> [<U>remark</U>]
+
+    Adds explanatory text to a program listing.
+
+      <U>remark</U>    Commentary text, ignored by BASIC.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    BASIC does not execute comments, but a program may branch
+                to a statement beginning with '.  Execution will then
+                continue with the first executable statement thereafter.
+
+                Any program statements following a comment, in the same
+                logical line, are ignored by BASIC.
+
+                ' can be used to add a comment at the end of an existing
+                program statement (BASIC ignores everything following the
+                ' character). Exception: ' cannot be used in this manner
+                in a DATA statement (because BASIC would treat the ' as
+                part of the DATA).
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2a9f5.html">REM</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng50f1.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng50f1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0c88016
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng50f1.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng4ddd.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng5198.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ABS                      Absolute Value</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>ABS</B>(<U>numexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns the absolute value of an expression.
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>    A numeric expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng5198.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng5198.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..37c8558
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng5198.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng50f1.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng5456.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>AND                      Logical AND Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 AND exp2</B>
+
+    AND is a logical operator. BASIC converts each operand to an integer
+    (each operand must yield an integer in the range -32768 to 32767, or
+    else an Overflow error occurs), then performs a bitwise comparison of
+    the results, according to the truth table below:
+
+                     <U>exp1</U><B>  </B><U>exp2</U><B>     </B><U>exp1 AND exp2</U>
+                       1    1             1
+                       1    0             0
+                       0    1             0
+                       0    0             0
+
+    The result is an integer.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any expression that produces a numeric result. This
+                includes Boolean expressions, where a TRUE result is
+                evaluated as -1 and a FALSE result is evaluated as 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngfc6d.html">EQV</A>
+<A HREF="ng13f30.html">IMP</A>
+<A HREF="ng1d3c8.html">NOT</A>
+<A HREF="ng2265a.html">OR</A>
+<A HREF="ng34a1f.html">XOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng5456.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng5456.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a93a8da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng5456.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng5198.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng55f2.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ASC                      ASCII Value of First Character</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>ASC</B>(<U>stringexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns the ASCII value of the first character of a string expression.
+
+  <U>stringexpr</U>    A string expression.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the argument is a null string, ASC returns an Illegal
+                Function Call error.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng74fa.html">CHR$</A>
+<A HREF="ng3a3de.html">ASCII Table</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng55f2.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng55f2.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..85dfcfa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng55f2.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng5456.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng579e.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ATN                      Arctangent</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>ATN</B>(<U>numexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns, in radians, the angle whose tangent is <U>numexpr</U>.
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>    A numeric expression.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the argument is a double-precision expression, ATN
+                returns a double-precision value. Otherwise single
+                precision is returned.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngae1d.html">COS</A>
+<A HREF="ng2e3eb.html">SIN</A>
+<A HREF="ng309ca.html">TAN</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng579e.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng579e.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a0db57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng579e.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng55f2.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng5839.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>BEEP                     Beep the Speaker</B>
+
+ <B>BEEP</B>
+
+    Sounds the speaker at 800 Hz for a quarter of a second (equivalent to
+    PRINT CHR$(7)).
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng5839.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng5839.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..57daf18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng5839.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng579e.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng5b68.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>BLOAD                    Load Binary (Memory Image) File</B>
+
+ <B>BLOAD</B> <U>filespec</U> [,<U>offset</U>]
+
+    Loads a specified memory image file into memory.
+
+    <U>filespec</U>    A string expression that follows DOS file naming
+                conventions; may include any device, except "KYBD:".
+
+      <U>offset</U>    A single-precision expression in the range 0 to 1048575
+                (2^20-1). Specifies the offset at which <U>filespec</U> is
+                loaded. Defaults to the offset found in <U>filespec</U> when the
+                image was BSAVEd.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The segment into which the file is BLOADed is that
+                specified by the most recent DEF SEG statement.
+
+                You will not be warned if a BLOAD is about to overwrite
+                DOS or any other sensitive area of memory.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng5b68.html">BSAVE</A>
+<A HREF="ngcd1a.html">DEF SEG</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng5b68.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng5b68.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a70864b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng5b68.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng5839.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng5e67.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>BSAVE                    Save a Binary (Memory Image) File</B>
+
+ <B>BSAVE</B> <U>filespec</U>,<U>offset</U>,<U>length</U>
+
+    Copies a specified portion of memory to a specified file.
+
+    <U>filespec</U>    A string expression that follows DOS file naming
+                conventions; may include a device name and path.
+
+      <U>offset</U>    A single-precision expression in the range 0 to 1048575
+                (2^20-1). Specifies the offset from which the memory
+                image will be saved.
+
+      <U>length</U>    An integer expression in the range 1 to 65535. Specifies
+                the number of bytes to be saved.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The segment from which the BSAVE is made is that specified
+                by the most recent DEF SEG statement.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng5839.html">BLOAD</A>
+<A HREF="ngcd1a.html">DEF SEG</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng5e67.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng5e67.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6490d27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng5e67.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng5b68.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng63e4.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CALL                     Invoke Subprogram or Assembly Subroutine</B>
+
+ <B>CALL</B> <U>procname</U> [(<U>parmlist</U>)]
+
+    Transfers control to a subprogram or assembly language subroutine.
+
+    <U>procname</U>    Specifies the subprogram or assembly routine to be called.
+                The first 31 characters are significant. If name is an
+                assembly language subroutine, it must be a PUBLIC symbol
+                and must not contain '$' or '_' characters.
+
+    <U>parmlist</U>    Specifies one or more parameters to be passed to the
+                subprogram or routine. Parameters must be separated by
+                commas. Array parameters should be specified by the array
+                name followed by empty parentheses.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    CALL passes unsegmented addresses of parameters. To pass
+                segmented addresses, use CALLS.
+
+                Note the following differences between QuickBASIC and
+                interpreted BASIC:
+
+                1.  QuickBASIC uses 4-byte string descriptors, while
+                    interpreted BASIC uses 3-byte descriptors. An assembly
+                    subroutine that uses string arguments may therefore
+                    need to be modified if it was originally written to
+                    run with an interpreted program.
+
+                2.  The QuickBASIC CALL statement calls subroutines by
+                    name; interpreted BASIC's CALL statement calls
+                    subroutines by offset address. To call a subroutine by
+                    address in QuickBASIC, use CALL ABSOLUTE.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng63e4.html">CALL ABSOLUTE</A>
+<A HREF="ng681f.html">CALLS</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng63e4.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng63e4.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db9ffca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng63e4.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng5e67.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng681f.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CALL ABSOLUTE            Invoke Subprogram or Assembly Subroutine</B>
+
+ <B>CALL ABSOLUTE</B> ([<U>arglist</U>,]<U>intvar</U>)
+
+    Transfers control and (optionally) passes parameters to an assembly
+    language subroutine.
+
+     <U>arglist</U>    Specifies one or more parameters to be passed to the
+                subroutine. Parameters must be separated by commas. Array
+                parameters should be specified by the array name followed
+                by empty parentheses.
+
+      <U>intvar</U>    An integer variable. Specifies the address of the
+                subroutine as an offset within the current code segment.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    Your program should execute a DEF SEG statement before
+                calling the subroutine to ensure the code segment is
+                correct (or put the subroutine in DGROUP).
+
+                QuickBASIC uses 4-byte string descriptors, while
+                interpreted BASIC uses 3-byte descriptors. An assembly
+                subroutine that uses string arguments may therefore need
+                to be modified if it was originally written to run with an
+                interpreted program.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng5e67.html">CALL</A>
+<A HREF="ng681f.html">CALLS</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng681f.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng681f.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..59685b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng681f.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng63e4.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng6db8.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CALLS                    Invoke Subprogram or Assembly Subroutine</B>
+
+ <B>CALLS</B> <U>name</U> [(<U>arglist</U>)]
+
+    Transfers control and (optionally) passes parameters to a subprogram
+    or an assembly language subroutine.
+
+        <U>name</U>    Specifies the subprogram or subroutine to be called. The
+                first 31 characters are significant. If name is an
+                assembly language subroutine, it must be a PUBLIC symbol
+                and must not contain '$' or '_' characters.
+
+     <U>arglist</U>    Specifies one or more parameters to be passed to the
+                subprogram or subroutine. Parameters must be separated by
+                commas. Array parameters should be specified by the array
+                name followed by empty parentheses.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    CALLS passes segmented addresses of parameters. To pass
+                unsegmented addresses, use CALL.
+
+                Note the following differences between QuickBASIC and
+                interpreted BASIC:
+
+                1.  QuickBASIC uses 4-byte string descriptors, while
+                    interpreted BASIC uses 3-byte descriptors. An assembly
+                    subroutine that uses string arguments may therefore
+                    need to be modified if it was originally written to
+                    run with an interpreted program.
+
+                2.  The QuickBASIC CALL statement calls subroutines by
+                    name; interpreted BASIC's CALL statement calls
+                    subroutines by offset address. To call a subroutine by
+                    address in QuickBASIC, use CALL ABSOLUTE.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng63e4.html">CALL ABSOLUTE</A>
+<A HREF="ng5e67.html">CALL</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng6db8.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng6db8.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..93f90f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng6db8.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng681f.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng6e8b.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CDBL                     Convert to Double Precision</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>CDBL</B>(<U>numexpr</U>)
+
+    Converts any numeric expression to double precision.
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>    A numeric expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng75f2.html">CINT</A>
+<A HREF="ngaf85.html">CSNG</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng6e8b.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng6e8b.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a3004af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng6e8b.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng6db8.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng7372.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CHAIN                    Transfer to Another Program</B>
+
+ <B>CHAIN</B> <U>filespec</U>
+
+    Transfers control to another program.
+
+    <U>filespec</U>    A string expression that follows DOS file naming
+                conventions; If no extension is supplied, an extension of
+                .EXE is assumed.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the calling program and the chained-to program are both
+                compiled with the default library, BRUN20.LIB, variables
+                may be passed to the chained-to program via COMMON, and
+                files opened by the calling program remain open to the
+                CHAINed program.
+
+                The alternate library, BCOM20.LIB does not support COMMON,
+                and in programs compiled with BCOM20.LIB, a CHAIN
+                statement is equivalent to a RUN statement (i.e., open
+                files are closed before the CHAINed program is executed).
+
+                Note the following differences between QuickBASIC and the
+                BASIC interpreter:
+
+                1.  The interpreter assumes a .BAS extension for the
+                    chained-to <U>filespec</U>; QuickBASIC assumes .EXE. The only
+                    explicit <U>filespec</U> extension allowed in QuickBASIC is
+                    .EXE.
+
+                2.  QuickBASIC does not support the ALL, MERGE, DELETE,
+                    and <U>line</U> options of the interpreted BASIC CHAIN
+                    statement.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="nga150.html">COMMON</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng7372.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng7372.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a12d413
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng7372.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng6e8b.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng74fa.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CHDIR                    Change Directory</B>
+
+ <B>CHDIR</B> <U>pathspec</U>
+
+    Changes the current directory.
+
+    <U>pathspec</U>    A string expression, of 128 or fewer characters, that
+                follows DOS path naming conventions.
+
+   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    This procedure is equivalent to DOS's CHDIR command.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng1c0c5.html">MKDIR</A>
+<A HREF="ng2b8f2.html">RMDIR</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng74fa.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng74fa.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4b0744f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng74fa.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng7372.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng75f2.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CHR$                     Convert ASCII Code to Character</B>
+
+ <U>s$</U> = <B>CHR$</B>(<U>code</U>)
+
+    Returns the character whose ASCII value is specified.
+
+        <U>code</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 255.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng5456.html">ASC</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f606.html">STR$</A>
+<A HREF="ng3a3de.html">ASCII Table</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng75f2.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng75f2.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fc1e995
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng75f2.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng74fa.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng76ee.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CINT                     Convert to Integer</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>CINT</B>(<U>numexpr</U>)
+
+    Converts a numeric expression to an integer, by rounding.
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>    A numeric expression in the range -32768 to 32767.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng6db8.html">CDBL</A>
+<A HREF="ngaf85.html">CSNG</A>
+<A HREF="ng119e5.html">FIX</A>
+<A HREF="ng15fe6.html">INT</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng76ee.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng76ee.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f06f371
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng76ee.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng75f2.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng7c2f.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CIRCLE                   Draw Ellipse on Screen</B>
+
+ <B>CIRCLE</B> [STEP] (<U>x</U>,<U>y</U>), <U>radius</U> [,[<U>color</U>] [,[<U>start</U>],[<U>end</U>][,<U>aspect</U>]]]
+
+    Draws an ellipse on the screen.
+
+        STEP    If included, coordinates are relative to last graphics
+                point referenced (LPR). If omitted, coordinates are
+                absolute.
+
+         <U>x</U>,<U>y</U>    The center (column, row) of the ellipse in pixels.
+
+      <U>r</U><U>adius</U>    Length, in pixels, of the major axis (the radius, in the
+                case of a circle).
+
+       <U>color</U>    Color in which the ellipse is drawn. Defaults to 3 in
+                medium resolution, 1 in high resolution.
+
+       <U>start</U>    Starting angle of arc, in radians. Defaults to 0.
+
+         <U>end</U>    Ending angle of arc, in radians. Defaults to 2..
+
+      <U>aspect</U>    Ratio, in pixels, of the x radius to the y radius.
+                Defaults to 5/6 in medium resolution, 5/12 in high
+                resolution; these values generate a circle on the CGA.
+
+   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    Omitting <U>start</U> and <U>end</U> will draw a complete circle.
+
+                If negative values for <U>start</U> and <U>end</U> are given, the end
+                points of the resulting arc are connected to the center
+                point, thus creating pie-chart wedges.
+
+                After a CIRCLE statement has been executed, the "last
+                point referenced" (LPR) is the center of the ellipse.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng17bbd.html">LINE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng7c2f.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng7c2f.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..baa2129
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng7c2f.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng76ee.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng7fd0.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CLEAR                    Close Files, Reset Variables, Set Stack Space</B>
+
+ <B>CLEAR</B> [,,<U>stack</U>]
+
+    Closes all files, clears all COMMON variables, resets all numeric
+    variables to 0 and all string variables to null, releases all disk
+    buffers, resets the stack, and optionally specifies the size of the
+    stack.
+
+       <U>stack</U>    Specifies, in bytes, the size of QuickBASIC's stack. The
+                default is 768 bytes; the minimum is 512 bytes.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    CLEAR destroys pending return addresses left on the stack
+                by GOSUB, FOR/NEXT, and WHILE/WEND.
+
+                CLEAR does not affect symbolic constants.
+
+                QuickBASIC's CLEAR differs from the Interpreter's in two
+                ways:
+
+                1.  The Interpreter's CLEAR statement destroys all DEF FN
+                    and DEFtype statements. QB's does not.
+
+                2.  The interpreter's default stack is 512 bytes. QB's is
+                    768.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngff2b.html">ERASE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng7fd0.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng7fd0.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f540af9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng7fd0.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng7c2f.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng8271.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CLOSE                    Close File or Device</B>
+
+ <B>CLOSE</B> [[#] <U>filenum</U> [,[#] <U>filenum</U>]...]
+
+    Closes one or more files or devices and terminates the association
+    between a file or device and its number.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which a file was OPENed.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If no <U>filenum</U> is supplied, all open files and devices are
+                CLOSEd.
+
+                If the device or file was OPENed for sequential output,
+                CLOSE writes the final buffer to the device or file.
+
+                CLEAR, END, NEW, RESET, and SYSTEM automatically close all
+                open files and devices.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngf078.html">END</A>
+<A HREF="ng20da4.html">OPEN</A>
+<A HREF="ng2f4d7.html">STOP</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng8271.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng8271.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..40c4a50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng8271.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng7fd0.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng86fb.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CLS                      Clear Screen</B>
+
+ <B>CLS</B> [0 | 1 | 2]
+
+    Clears the screen, as described below, and returns the cursor to the
+    Home position (row 1, column 1).
+
+           0    CLS 0 clears all text and graphics.
+
+           1    CLS 1 clears just the graphics viewport, if a VIEW
+                statement has been issued. If no VIEW statement has been
+                issued, CLS 1 clears the entire screen.
+
+           2    CLS 2 clears just the text window. The bottom screen line
+                (line 25 or line 43) is left unchanged.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    CLS with no argument clears the entire screen, unless a
+                VIEW statement has been used to create a viewport in
+                graphics mode--in which case CLS clears only the current
+                viewport.
+
+                CLS resets the "last point referenced" (LPR) so that the
+                next graphics command that uses the STEP option references
+                the center of the screen.
+
+                In text mode, CLS clears the active page to the background
+                color. In graphics mode, CLS clears the entire screen
+                buffer to the background color.
+
+                Other ways to clear the screen include SCREEN, WIDTH, and
+                Ctrl-Home.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng86fb.html">COLOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng2c52c.html">SCREEN</A>
+<A HREF="ng32510.html">VIEW</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng86fb.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng86fb.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cac5054
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng86fb.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng8271.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng9a3c.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>COLOR                    Set Foreground, Background, and Border Colors</B>
+
+ <B>COLOR</B> [<U>foreground</U>] [,[<U>background</U>] [,<U>border</U>]]     ' Screen mode 0
+ <B>COLOR</B> [<U>background</U>] [,[<U>palette</U>]                   ' Screen mode 1
+ <B>COLOR</B> [<U>foreground</U>] [,[<U>background</U>]]               ' Screen modes 7-10
+
+    Specifies foreground, background, and border colors in text mode
+    (SCREEN mode 0); in medium-resolution graphics mode (SCREEN mode 1),
+    specifies palette and background color; in screen modes 7 through 10,
+    specifies foreground and background colors. May not be used in SCREEN
+    mode 2 (high-resolution graphics).
+
+  <U>foregroun</U><U>d</U>    An integer expression; selects the foreground color. For
+                SCREEN mode 0, this value must be in the range 0 to 31;
+                for SCREEN modes 7-10, this value must be in the range
+                1-15.
+
+  <U>background</U>    An integer expression; selects the background color. For
+                SCREEN mode 0, this value must be in the range 0 to 7; for
+                SCREEN modes 1-10, this value must be in the range 0 to
+                63.
+
+     <U>palette</U>    An integer expression, selecting one of two color palettes
+                (see below).
+
+      <U>border</U>    An integer expression; must be in the range 0 to 15.
+                Selects the color of the border.
+
+    <B>                     Color values</B>
+
+<B>          </B><U>Value</U><B>     </B><U>Color</U><B>          </B><U>Value</U><B>     </B><U>Color</U>
+            0       Black            8       Gray
+            1       Blue             9       Light blue
+            2       Green           10       Light green
+            3       Cyan            11       Light cyan
+            4       Red             12       Light red
+            5       Magenta         13       Light magenta
+            6       Brown           14       Yellow
+            7       White           15       Bright white
+
+          Add 16 to a value to produce its blinking equivalent.
+
+    <B>                Foreground attributes for the</B>
+    <B>                 Monochrome Display Adapter</B>
+
+<B>                        </B><U>Value</U><B>      </B><U>Foreground Attribute</U>
+                         0         Black
+                         1         Underlined
+                         2-7       White
+                         8         Black
+                         9         Underlined high intensity
+                         10-15     High-intensity white
+                         16        Black
+                         17        Underlined black
+                         18-23     Blink
+                         24        Black
+                         25        Blinking underlined high intensity
+                         26-31     Blinking high intensity
+
+    Background values in the range 0 to 6 produce a black background,
+    while a value of 7 produces a white background.
+
+    If the background and foreground are the same, then the characters
+    will be invisible.
+
+    The following is a list of legal values for each of the SCREEN modes:
+
+               SCREEN 0 (Text mode)
+                    The <U>foreground</U> color must be in the range 0 to 31.
+                    The <U>background</U> color must be in the range 0 to 7.
+                    The <U>border</U> color must be in the range 0 to 15.
+
+                    The default color for <U>background</U> and <U>border</U> is black.
+
+               SCREEN 1 (Medium-resolution graphics mode)
+                    The <U>background</U> color must be in the range 0 to 15.
+                    Even numbers for <U>palette</U> will select Palette 0,
+                         whereas odd number will select Palette 1.
+
+<B>                                   Palettes</B>
+
+<B>                    </B><U>Color</U><B>     </B><U>Palette 0</U><B>                </B><U>Palette 1</U>
+                    0         Current background       Current background
+                    1         Green                    Cyan
+                    2         Red                      Magenta
+                    3         Brown                    White
+
+               SCREEN 2 (High-resolution graphics mode)
+                    Calling COLOR when in this mode will result in a
+                    runtime error.
+
+               SCREEN 7 and 8
+                    The <U>foreground</U> color must be in the range 1 to 15.
+                    The <U>background</U> color must be in the range 0 to 15.
+
+                    EGA only. The colors are dependent on the current
+                    palette selected (See PALETTE statement).
+
+               SCREEN 9
+                    The <U>foreground</U> color must be in the range 1 to 15 for
+                    EGAs with more than 64K. If the EGA only has 64K, the
+                    <U>foreground</U> color must be in the range 1 to 3.
+
+                    The <U>background</U> color must be in the range 0 to 63.
+
+                    EGA only.  The colors are dependent on the current
+                    palette selected (See PALETTE statement).
+
+               SCREEN 10
+                    The <U>foreground</U> color must be in the range 1 to 3. The
+                    values are as follows: 1 = Black; 2 = Blink; and
+                    3 = High Intensity.
+
+                    The <U>background</U> color must be in the range 0 to 8.
+
+                    EGA only. The colors are dependent on the current
+                    palette selected (See PALETTE statement).
+
+   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    In text mode (SCREEN mode 0), the COLOR statement
+                specifies the foreground, background, and border colors.
+                Omitted parameters retain former values. The default is
+                white foreground (7), black background (0), and black
+                border (0). The <U>border</U> parameter is ignored on the
+                Monochrome Display Adapter.
+
+                In medium-resolution graphics mode (SCREEN mode 1), the
+                COLOR statement doesn't actually specify the foreground
+                color. Instead it specifies the background color and one
+                of two three-color palettes. Foreground colors are
+                selected from the current palette via the PSET, PRESET,
+                LINE, CIRCLE, PAINT, VIEW, and DRAW statements. Either the
+                background parameter or the palette parameter (but not
+                both) may be omitted; omitted parameters retain former
+                values.
+
+                The COLOR statement may not be used in high-resolution
+                graphics mode (SCREEN mode 2).
+
+                The <U>border</U> option cannot be used with an Enhanced Graphics
+                Adapter (EGA) with an Enhanced Color Display.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng23171.html">PALETTE</A>
+<A HREF="ng2c723.html">SCREEN (Statement)</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng9a3c.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng9a3c.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cbee8b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng9a3c.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng86fb.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng9f05.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>COM(n)                   Enable/Disable Comm Port Trapping</B>
+
+ <B>COM</B>(<U>n</U>) {ON | OFF | STOP}
+
+    Enables the trapping of communications activity via ON COM(<U>n</U>).
+
+           <U>n</U>    Must be 1, for COM1:, or 2, for COM2:.
+
+          ON    Causes QB to check for communications activity.
+
+         OFF    Causes QB not to check for communications activity. This
+                is the default condition.
+
+        STOP    Also disables trapping, but QB continues checking for
+                activity at the specified communications port. If such
+                activity occurs, a subsequent COM(<U>n</U>) ON results in an
+                immediate trap (provided an ON COM(<U>n</U>) statement with a
+                nonzero line number has been executed).
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the "Checking Between Statements" option is in effect,
+                QB checks for communication activity after each statement.
+                If the "Event Trapping" option is selected, QB checks
+                after each new program line. If neither option is
+                selected, no trapping takes place.
+
+                For command-line compilation, /v enables checking after
+                each statement, and /w enables checking after each new
+                line. If neither switch is used, no trapping takes place.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng1d78d.html">ON COM</A>
+<A HREF="ng386bd.html">Switches and Options</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng9f05.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng9f05.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b21391a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ng9f05.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng9a3c.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="nga150.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>COMMAND$                 Get Command Line</B>
+
+ <U>s$</U> = <B>COMMAND$</B>
+
+    Returns the command-line parameter(s) supplied when a QuickBASIC
+    program is invoked.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    Returns everything that was typed on the command line when
+                the program was executed, except the program name and any
+                redirection or piping commands.
+
+                The function strips any leading white-space characters and
+                converts all lowercase characters to upper case.
+
+                The maximum length of the command line is 127 characters.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/nga150.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/nga150.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fbd1a84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/nga150.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ng9f05.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="nga9db.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>COMMON                   Pass Variables to CHAINed Program or Subprogram</B>
+
+ <B>COMMON</B> [SHARED] [/<U>blockname</U>/] <U>varlist</U>
+
+    Passes variables to a chained-to program or a subprogram.
+
+      SHARED    An optional attribute. The COMMON statement must appear in
+                both the calling program and the chained-to program or
+                subprogram--unless the subprogram is in the same module as
+                the calling program and the SHARED attribute is used in
+                the calling program's COMMON statement.
+
+   <U>blockname</U>    Any valid BASIC identifier; the first 31 characters are
+                significant. Allows you to name a group of common
+                variables. A group of variables passed with a <U>blockname</U> is
+                called a named COMMON block; variables passed without a
+                <U>blockname</U> are called a blank COMMON block.
+
+     <U>varlist</U>    One or more scalar or array variables to be shared with a
+                chained-to program or a subprogram.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The order in which variables appear in <U>varlist</U> is
+                significant, not the names of the variables. To avoid type
+                mismatches and other calamities, it's advisable to put all
+                shared variables in a COMMON statement in a separate file,
+                then $INCLUDE that file in both the calling program and
+                any chained-to programs or subprograms.
+
+                The COMMON statement must appear before any executable
+                statements. Nonexecutable statements are CONST, DATA,
+                COMMON, DEFtype, DIM (for static arrays), OPTION BASE,
+                comments, and metacommands.
+
+                If a static array is to be passed to a chained-to program
+                or subprogram, its DIM statement must appear before the
+                COMMON statement. The DIM statement must use integer-
+                constant subscripts.
+
+                If a dynamic array is to be passed, it must be DIMmed or
+                REDIMmed after the COMMON statement.
+
+                When passing a named COMMON block to a program in the user
+                library, the calling program may not redefine the block to
+                a larger size. Blank COMMON blocks may be resized.
+
+                When COMMON is used with CHAIN and compilation is done
+                outside the QuickBASIC environment, the BRUN20.EXE library
+                (QB's default) must be used.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng5e67.html">CALL</A>
+<A HREF="ng6e8b.html">CHAIN</A>
+<A HREF="ng2fea2.html">SUB...END SUB</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/nga9db.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/nga9db.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb7cefe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/nga9db.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="nga150.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngae1d.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CONST                    Declare Symbolic Constant(s)</B>
+
+ <B>CONST</B> <U>name</U> = <U>expr</U> [,<U>name</U> = <U>expr</U>...]
+
+    Declares one or more symbolic constants.
+
+        <U>name</U>    An identifier that follows the rules for naming BASIC
+                variables. A type character (%, #, !, or $) may be
+                included in the declaration, but the type character does
+                not have to be used in statements that reference the
+                constant.
+
+        <U>expr</U>    An expression consisting of literals, with or without
+                operators, only. The exponentiation operator may not be
+                used, nor may any intrinsic function.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    Symbolic constants produce more efficient code than do
+                constant values assigned to variables.
+
+                Symbolic constants are global.
+
+                If a type character is not included in the constant name,
+                the compiler evaluates the expression and assigns the most
+                compact possible data type to the constant.
+
+                DEFtype statements do not affect symbolic constants.
+
+                Symbolic constants must be defined before they're
+                referenced.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngae1d.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngae1d.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2730c7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngae1d.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="nga9db.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngaf85.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>COS                      Cosine</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>COS</B>(<U>numexpr</U>)
+
+    Returns the cosine of the angle whose value, in radians, is expressed
+    in <U>numexpr</U>.
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>    A numeric expression. If <U>numexpr</U> is a double-precision
+                expression, COS returns a double-precision value.
+                Otherwise single precision is returned.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng55f2.html">ATN</A>
+<A HREF="ng2e3eb.html">SIN</A>
+<A HREF="ng309ca.html">TAN</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngaf85.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngaf85.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c92c0cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngaf85.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngae1d.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngb058.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CSNG                     Convert to Single Precision</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>CSNG</B>(<U>numexpr</U>)
+
+    Converts any numeric expression to single precision.
+
+     <U>numexpr</U>    A numeric expression.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng6db8.html">CDBL</A>
+<A HREF="ng75f2.html">CINT</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngb058.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngb058.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4f58e97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngb058.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngaf85.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngb1c8.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CSRLIN                   Line Position of Cursor</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>CSRLIN</B>
+
+    Returns the row number of the current cursor location on the current
+    screen page.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    To get the current column position, use POS. To set the
+                cursor position, use LOCATE.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng18b5e.html">LOCATE</A>
+<A HREF="ng264a0.html">POS</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngb1c8.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngb1c8.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c42a80a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngb1c8.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngb058.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngb3ef.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CVD                      Convert String to Double-Precision</B>
+
+ <U>y#</U> = <B>CVD</B>(<U>8-byte-string</U>)
+
+    Converts an eight-byte string expression to a double-precision number.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    A double-precision real number must be converted to a
+                string (via MKD$) before being stored in a random access
+                file. To retrieve such a number, first assign it to a file
+                buffer field (with GET), then use CVD.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng127c8.html">GET (File I/O)</A>
+<A HREF="ngb793.html">CVI</A>
+<A HREF="ngb980.html">CVS</A>
+<A HREF="ng1bf7e.html">MKD$</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c304.html">MKI$</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c42b.html">MKS$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngb3ef.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngb3ef.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fb1ff92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngb3ef.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngb1c8.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngb793.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CVDMBF                   MBF Double-Precision String to IEEE        QB87 only</B>
+
+ <U>y!</U> = <B>CVSMBF</B>(<U>8-byte-string</U>)
+
+    Converts a string representation of a double-precision number in
+    Microsoft Binary Format to an IEEE-format real.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The IEEE format for real numbers offers more accuracy and
+                range than the Microsoft Binary Format. But the IEEE
+                format is supported only by the QB87 version of the
+                compiler, and programs compiled with QB87 run only on
+                machines equipped with 8087 or 80287 coprocessors.
+
+                An alternative to converting MBF data with CVSMBF and
+                CVDMBF is to compile the program with the /MBF command-
+                line switch. This option converts numbers as they're read
+                from a random file, then reconverts them before writing
+                them back to the file.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngb980.html">CVS</A>
+<A HREF="ngbba5.html">CVSMBF</A>
+<A HREF="ng127c8.html">GET (File I/O)</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c1bb.html">MKDMBF$</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c568.html">MKSMBF$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngb793.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngb793.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2ddf182
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngb793.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngb3ef.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngb980.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CVI                      Convert String to Integer</B>
+
+ <U>y%</U> = <B>CVI</B>(<U>2-byte-string</U>)
+
+    Converts a two-byte string expression to an integer.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    An integer must be converted to a string (via MKI$) before
+                being stored in a random access file. To retrieve it,
+                first assign it to a file buffer field (with GET), then
+                use CVI.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngb1c8.html">CVD</A>
+<A HREF="ngb980.html">CVS</A>
+<A HREF="ng127c8.html">GET (File I/O)</A>
+<A HREF="ng1bf7e.html">MKD$</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c304.html">MKI$</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c42b.html">MKS$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngb980.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngb980.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3cfcc76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngb980.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngb793.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngbba5.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CVS                      Convert String to Single Precision</B>
+
+ <U>y</U>! = <B>CVS</B>(<U>4-byte-string</U>)
+
+    Converts a four-byte string expression to a single-precision number.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    A single-precision real number must be converted to a
+                string (via MKS$) before being stored in a random access
+                file. To retrieve such a number, first assign it to a file
+                buffer field (with GET), then use CVS.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngb1c8.html">CVD</A>
+<A HREF="ngb793.html">CVI</A>
+<A HREF="ng127c8.html">GET (File I/O)</A>
+<A HREF="ng1bf7e.html">MKD$</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c42b.html">MKS$</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c304.html">MKI$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngbba5.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngbba5.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..60e4bd3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngbba5.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngb980.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngbf36.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>CVSMBF                   MBF Single-Precision String to IEEE        QB87 only</B>
+
+ <U>y!</U> = <B>CVSMBF</B>(<U>4-byte-string</U>)
+
+    Converts a string representation of a single-precision number in
+    Microsoft Binary Format to an IEEE-format real.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    The IEEE format for real numbers offers more accuracy and
+                range than the Microsoft Binary Format. But the IEEE
+                format is supported only by the QB87 version of the
+                compiler, and programs compiled with QB87 run only on
+                machines equipped with 8087 or 80287 coprocessors.
+
+                An alternative to converting MBF data with CVSMBF and
+                CVDMBF is to compile the program with the /MBF command-
+                line switch. This option converts numbers as they're read
+                from a random file, then reconverts them before writing
+                them back to the file.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngb980.html">CVS</A>
+<A HREF="ngb3ef.html">CVDMBF</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c1bb.html">MKDMBF$</A>
+<A HREF="ng1c568.html">MKSMBF$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngbf36.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngbf36.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e2e2338
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngbf36.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngbba5.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngc42b.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>DATA                     Store Constant(s) for Retrieval via READ</B>
+
+ <B>DATA</B> <U>constant1</U> [,<U>constant2</U>]...
+
+    Stores one or more constants, of any type, for subsequent access via
+    READ statements.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    DATA statements are nonexecutable statements that supply a
+                stream of data constants for use by READ statements. All
+                the items supplied by all the DATA statements in a program
+                make up one continuous string of information that is
+                accessed in order by your program's READ statements. Use
+                RESTORE to reset the pointer to the first item in a
+                specified DATA statement.
+
+                You may put as many constants (expressions are not
+                allowed) in a single DATA statement as will fit on one
+                line, and your program may have any number of DATA
+                statements, positioned anywhere in the program.
+
+                String constants in DATA statements do not need to be
+                surrounded by quote marks, unless they contain quote marks
+                themselves, or colons, or commas, or significant leading
+                or trailing blanks.
+
+                If you wish to add a comment at the right side of a DATA
+                statement, use :REM.  An apostrophe (single quote) will be
+                treated as part of a DATA item.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2a3e4.html">READ</A>
+<A HREF="ng2af74.html">RESTORE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngc42b.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngc42b.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..029f14c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngc42b.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngbf36.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngc7f7.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>DATE$                    Get or Set System Date</B>
+
+ <U>s$</U> = <B>DATE$</B>                              ' Get the system date
+ <B>DATE$</B> = <U>stringexpr</U>                      ' Set the system date
+
+    Gets or Sets the current system date.
+
+  <U>stringexpr</U>    A string expression in either of the following forms (but
+                slash characters may be substituted for the hyphens):
+
+                    "mm-dd-yy"
+                    "mm-dd-yyyy"
+
+   -------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If DATE$ is being assigned a value, then the system date
+                is set, else the system date is retrieved.  The system
+                date retrieved is formatted as:
+
+                    "mm-dd-yyyy"
+
+                If the year is expressed in two digits, instead of four,
+                the twentieth century is assumed. If the month is
+                expressed as a single digit, a leading zero is assumed.
+
+                The year portion of the date must be in the range 1980 to
+                2099.
+
+                This statement resets the AT system date in nonvolatile
+                memory when QuickBasic is run under DOS 3.3.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng30bd9.html">TIME$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngc7f7.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngc7f7.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3d8c34b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngc7f7.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngc42b.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngcd1a.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>DEF FN                   Define Function</B>
+
+ 1. <B>DEF</B> <B>FN</B><U>name</U>[(<U>parmlist</U>)] = <U>expression</U>
+
+ 2. <B>DEF</B> <B>FN</B><U>name</U>[(<U>parmlist</U>)]
+    .
+    . [<U>statements</U>]
+    .
+    [EXIT DEF]
+    <B>FN</B><U>name</U> = <U>expression</U>
+    <B>END</B> <B>DEF</B>
+
+    Defines a user function.
+
+        <U>name</U>    A valid variable name, of the same type as expression.
+
+    <U>parmlist</U>    One or more formal parameters for the function. Each must
+                be a valid variable name. Parameters are passed by value.
+
+  <U>expression</U>    An expression, of the same type as <U>name</U>, that defines the
+                value returned by the function.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    For numeric functions, the precision specified by <U>name</U>
+                determines the precision returned by the function.
+
+                Functions must be defined before they are called. They may
+                not be defined within IF/THEN/ELSE, FOR/NEXT, WHILE/WEND,
+                or SUB/END SUB blocks, and they may not be defined in
+                terms of themselves.
+
+                In the multi-line syntax, expression defines the value
+                returned by the function. The optional EXIT DEF statement
+                can be used to exit the function but does not define the
+                end of the function.
+
+                Variables in a multiline function definition are global
+                unless declared in a STATIC statement.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2edd5.html">STATIC</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngcd1a.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngcd1a.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5026917
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngcd1a.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngc7f7.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngcf0a.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>DEF SEG                  Define Segment</B>
+
+ <B>DEF</B> <B>SEG</B> [=<U>segment</U>]
+
+    Specifies the segment address from which arguments to BLOAD, BSAVE,
+    CALL ABSOLUTE, PEEK, and POKE will be offset.
+
+     <U>segment</U>    A numeric expression in the range 0 to 65535.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    DEF SEG defaults to BASIC's data segment (DS). A DEF SEG
+                statement with no argument returns the DEF SEG address to
+                this default value.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngcf0a.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngcf0a.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..da73589
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngcf0a.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngcd1a.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngd283.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>DEFDBL                   Define Variable(s) as Double Precision</B>
+
+ <B>DEFDBL</B> <U>letter</U>[-<U>letter</U>] [,<U>letter</U> [-<U>letter</U>]]...
+
+    Declares one or more variables to be double precision.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    All variable names beginning with any of the specified
+                letters (case-insensitive) will be double precision,
+                unless a type-identifier character (%, !, or $) is used to
+                override the DEFDBL declaration.
+
+                The DEFDBL declaration must be read by the compiler before
+                any statements in which the declared variables are
+                assigned or used. The compiler reads from beginning to
+                end, without regard for execution path.
+
+                You cannot avoid a DEFDBL declaration by direction the
+                execution path around it.
+
+                DEFDBL statements do not affect symbolic constants.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngd283.html">DEFINT</A>
+<A HREF="ngd5ea.html">DEFSNG</A>
+<A HREF="ngd96b.html">DEFSTR</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngd283.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngd283.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..11ff453
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngd283.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngcf0a.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngd5ea.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>DEFINT                   Define Variable(s) as Integer</B>
+
+ <B>DEFINT</B> <U>letter</U>[-<U>letter</U>] [,<U>letter</U> [-<U>letter</U>]]...
+
+    Declares one or more variables to be of type integer.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    All variable names beginning with any of the specified
+                letters (case-insensitive) will be integer, unless a type-
+                identifier character (#, !, or $) is used to override the
+                DEFINT declaration.
+
+                The DEFINT declaration must be read by the compiler before
+                any statements in which the declared variables are
+                assigned or used. The compiler reads from beginning to
+                end, without regard for execution path.
+
+                You cannot avoid a DEFINT declaration by direction the
+                execution path around it.
+
+                DEFINT statements do not affect symbolic constants.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngcf0a.html">DEFDBL</A>
+<A HREF="ngd5ea.html">DEFSNG</A>
+<A HREF="ngd96b.html">DEFSTR</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngd5ea.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngd5ea.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f9c5e30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngd5ea.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngd283.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngd96b.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>DEFSNG                   Define Variable(s) as Single Precision</B>
+
+ <B>DEFSNG</B> <U>letter</U>[-<U>letter</U>] [,<U>letter</U> [-<U>letter</U>]]...
+
+    Declares one or more variables to be of type single precision.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    All variable names beginning with any of the specified
+                letters (case-insensitive) will be single precision,
+                unless a type-identifier character (%, #, or $) is used to
+                override the DEFSNG declaration.
+
+                The DEFSNG declaration must be read by the compiler before
+                any statements in which the declared variables are
+                assigned or used. The compiler reads from beginning to
+                end, without regard for execution path.
+
+                You cannot avoid a DEFSNG declaration by direction the
+                execution path around it.
+
+                DEFSNG statements do not affect symbolic constants.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngcf0a.html">DEFDBL</A>
+<A HREF="ngd283.html">DEFINT</A>
+<A HREF="ngd96b.html">DEFSTR</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngd96b.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngd96b.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bb22af5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngd96b.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngd5ea.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngdcd0.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>DEFSTR                   Define Variable(s) as String</B>
+
+ <B>DEFSTR</B> <U>letter</U>[-<U>letter</U>] [,<U>letter</U> [-<U>letter</U>]]...
+
+    Declares one or more variables to be of type string.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    All variable names beginning with any of the specified
+                letters (case-insensitive) will be strings, unless a type-
+                identifier character (%, #, or !) is used to override the
+                DEFSTR declaration.
+
+                The DEFSTR declaration must be read by the compiler before
+                any statements in which the declared variables are
+                assigned or used. The compiler reads from beginning to
+                end, without regard for execution path.
+
+                You cannot avoid a DEFSTR declaration by direction the
+                execution path around it.
+
+                DEFSTR statements do not affect symbolic constants.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngcf0a.html">DEFDBL</A>
+<A HREF="ngd283.html">DEFINT</A>
+<A HREF="ngd5ea.html">DEFSNG</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngdcd0.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngdcd0.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..820f2f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngdcd0.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngd96b.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="nge1c2.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>DIM                      Dimension Array(s)</B>
+
+ <B>DIM</B> [SHARED] <U>variable</U>(<U>subscripts</U>)[,<U>variable</U>(<U>subscripts</U>)]...
+
+    Defines the maximum subscript numbers for and allocates storage for
+    one or more arrays.
+
+      SHARED    An optional attribute. Arrays DIMensioned in a main
+                program as SHARED may be shared with all subprograms that
+                are compiled with that main program.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    Arrays with a maximum subscript of 10 may be used without
+                a DIM statement. Arrays with subscripts larger than 10
+                must be DIMensioned before they are used.
+
+                The first element of an array is element 0, unless the
+                OPTION BASE statement has been used to change the starting
+                element from 0 to 1.
+
+                Static arrays may not be redimensioned. Dynamic arrays may
+                be redimensioned after an ERASE statement or by means of a
+                REDIM statement.
+
+                A DIM for a dynamic array is an executable statement and
+                must appear after any COMMON statements.
+
+                The compiler does not perform bounds checking on array
+                usage unless the program is compiled with the /d (debug)
+                option.
+
+                The maximum number that can be DIMensioned in a DIM
+                statement is 63.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngff2b.html">ERASE</A>
+<A HREF="ng22467.html">OPTION BASE</A>
+<A HREF="ng2a6f2.html">REDIM</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/nge1c2.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/nge1c2.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6638b14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/nge1c2.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngdcd0.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="nge5df.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>DO                       Begin Definition of DO/LOOP Loop</B>
+
+ 1. <B>DO</B>
+    .
+    . [<U>statements</U>]
+    .
+    .
+    [EXIT DO]
+    <B>LOOP</B> [{WHILE | UNTIL} <U>expression</U>]
+
+ 2. <B>DO</B> [{WHILE | UNTIL} <U>expression</U>]
+    .
+    . [<U>statements</U>]
+    .
+    .
+    [EXIT DO]
+    <B>LOOP</B>
+
+    Begins the definition of a DO/LOOP loop.
+
+  <U>expression</U>    A numeric expression. Nonzero values are equivalent to
+                TRUE, while zero values are equivalent to FALSE.
+
+       WHILE    Causes execution of the loop as long as expression is
+                TRUE.
+
+       UNTIL    Causes execution of the loop as long as expression is
+                FALSE.
+
+     EXIT DO    An optional means to escape from the loop before its
+                termination.
+
+        LOOP    Terminates the loop construct.
+
+   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    DO...LOOP is a general-purpose looping construct. The
+                optional termination test may be supplied at either the
+                beginning or the end. If no test is supplied, EXIT DO is
+                the only way to break out of the loop.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng11abb.html">FOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng1982e.html">LOOP</A>
+<A HREF="ng1ca3c.html">NEXT</A>
+<A HREF="ng33204.html">WEND</A>
+<A HREF="ng335b1.html">WHILE</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/nge5df.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/nge5df.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8dbef99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/nge5df.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="nge1c2.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngf078.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>DRAW                     Draw Object</B>
+
+ <B>DRAW</B> <U>string</U>
+
+    Draws an object according to instructions specified as a string
+    expression.
+
+      <U>string</U>    A string expression containing commands in the BASIC
+                graphics definition language.
+
+    <B>Graphics Definition Language</B>
+
+    In the movement instructions below, <U>n</U> specifies a distance to move.
+    The number of pixels moved is equal to <U>n</U> multiplied by the current
+    scaling factor, which is set by the S command.
+
+          U<U>n</U>    Move up.
+
+          D<U>n</U>    Move down.
+
+          L<U>n</U>    Move left.
+
+          R<U>n</U>    Move right.
+
+          E<U>n</U>    Move diagonally up and right.
+
+          F<U>n</U>    Move diagonally down and right.
+
+          G<U>n</U>    Move diagonally down and left.
+
+          H<U>n</U>    Move diagonally up and left.
+
+        M<U>x</U>,<U>y</U>    Move to coordinate <U>x</U>,<U>y</U>. If <U>x</U> is preceded by a + or -, the
+                movement is relative to the last point referenced (LPR).
+
+           B    A prefix command. Next movement command moves but doesn't
+                plot.
+
+           N    A prefix command. Next movement command moves, but returns
+                immediately to previous point.
+
+          A<U>n</U>    Set angle. <U>n</U> may be 0, for 0 degrees; 1, for 90 degrees;
+                2, for 180 degrees; or 3, for 270 degrees. Rotated figures
+                are rescaled to adjust to the CGA's 4/3 aspect ratio.
+
+         TA<U>n</U>    Turn angle. <U>n</U> may range from -360 degrees to +360 degrees.
+                Positive values cause counterclockwise rotation; negative
+                values cause clockwise rotation.
+
+          C<U>n</U>    Set color to <U>n</U>.  The default color for medium-resolution
+                is 3; high-resolution default color is 1.  See PALETTE for
+                a list of legal colors.
+
+          S<U>n</U>    Set scale factor. <U>n</U> may range from 1 to 255. The scaling
+                factor used is <U>n</U>/4. The default for <U>n</U> is 4.
+
+P<U>paint</U>,<U>boundary</U> Fill figure color to <U>paint</U>, stopping at areas of color
+                <U>boundary</U>.  See PALETTE for a list of legal colors.
+
+"=" + VARPTR$(<U>var</U>)
+                Get argument from variable. May be used to supply
+                arguments to any of the foregoing commands.
+
+"X" + VARPTR$(<U>stringvar</U>)
+                Execute command sequence stored in a string variable. This
+                command allows you to call graphics-language subroutines.
+
+   -------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    To get arguments or instructions from variables, you must
+                use VARPTR$(<U>var</U>) or VARPTR$(<U>stringvar</U>). QuickBASIC does
+                not support the =<U>variable</U>; and X<U>stringvar</U> formulations
+                available with the Interpreter.
+
+                Spaces between or within instructions are insignificant.
+
+                Semicolons may be used between commands to enhance
+                readability.
+
+                The drawing begins at the last point referenced (LPR) and
+                LPR is updated as the object is being drawn.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng23171.html">PALETTE</A>
+<A HREF="ng2c723.html">SCREEN (Statement)</A>
+<A HREF="ng321ab.html">VARPTR$</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngf078.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngf078.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc4848d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngf078.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="nge5df.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngf203.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>END                      Terminate Program</B>
+
+ <B>END</B>
+
+    Terminates execution of a program, closes all files opened by the
+    program, and returns control to the operating system.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    END as the last (highest-numbered) instruction in a
+                program is optional.
+
+                END returns control to DOS.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng2f4d7.html">STOP</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngf203.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngf203.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..75aa878
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngf203.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngf078.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngf619.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ENVIRON                  Modify Environment Table</B>
+
+ <B>ENVIRON</B> <U>stringexpr</U>
+
+    Adds a statement to or deletes a statement from the current
+    environment table.
+
+     <U>stringexpr</U>     A string expression of the form "<U>name</U> = <U>parameter</U>".
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If <U>name</U> already exists in the environment table, its
+                current setting is replaced with the new setting. If <U>name</U>
+                does not exist, the new statement is added at the end of
+                the environment table.
+
+                To delete an entry from the environment table, make
+                parameter a semicolon (i.e. "name = ;").
+
+                <U>parameter</U> is case-sensitive.
+
+                The new environment variable added, deleted, or modified
+                by this procedure will only take effect for SHELLed copies
+                of COMMAND.COM that are activated after this statement.
+                After the program exits, the environment table will be
+                exactly the same as before the program executed, no matter
+                what changes were made with ENVIRON.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngf619.html">ENVIRON$</A>
+<A HREF="ng2e004.html">SHELL</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngf619.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngf619.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5043d2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngf619.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngf203.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngf9b4.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ENVIRON$                 Environment Table Entry</B>
+
+ <U>s$</U> = <B>ENVIRON$</B>({<U>parm</U> | <U>n</U>})
+
+    Returns the value of a specified entry in the current environment
+    table.
+
+        <U>parm</U>    A string expression specifying an environment parameter.
+
+           <U>n</U>    An integer expression in the range 1 to 255 specifying the
+                <U>n</U>th entry in the environment table.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    ENVIRON$ is case-sensitive, so if <U>parm</U> does not exactly
+                match a name in the environment table, the function
+                returns a null string.
+
+                If the argument is given as <U>n</U>, then ENVIRON$ returns the
+                <U>n</U>th entry in the table. Unless the table has been modified
+                since bootup, the first entry will be COMSPEC, the second
+                will be PATH (if a PATH command has been issued), and the
+                third will be PROMPT (if a PROMPT command has been
+                issued).
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ngf203.html">ENVIRON</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngf9b4.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngf9b4.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8265e21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngf9b4.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngf619.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngfc6d.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>EOF                      End of File Status</B>
+
+ <U>y</U> = <B>EOF</B>(<U>filenum</U>)
+
+    Checks for end of file.
+
+     <U>filenum</U>    The number under which the file was OPENed.
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    If the end of the file has been reached, EOF returns -1
+                (true); otherwise, it returns 0 (false).
+
+                If <U>filenum</U> refers to a random-access file, a -1 means the
+                last GET statement did not read an entire record.
+
+                If <U>filenum</U> refers to a communications file opened in
+                binary mode, a -1 means the input queue is empty. If
+                <U>filenum</U> refers to a communications file opened in ASCII
+                mode, a -1 means a Ctrl-Z has been read.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngfc6d.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngfc6d.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..81c33a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngfc6d.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngf9b4.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ngff2b.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>EQV                      Equivalence Operator</B>
+
+ <B>exp1 EQV exp2</B>
+
+    EQV is a logical operator. BASIC converts each operand to an integer
+    (each operand must yield an integer in the range -32768 to 32767, or
+    else an Overflow error occurs), then performs a bitwise comparison of
+    the results, according to the truth table below:
+
+                     <U>exp1</U><B>  </B><U>exp2</U><B>     </B><U>exp1 EQV exp2</U>
+                       1    1             1
+                       1    0             0
+                       0    1             0
+                       0    0             1
+
+    The result is an integer.
+
+   <U>exp1</U>,<U>exp2</U>    Any expression that produces a numeric result. This
+                includes Boolean expressions, where a TRUE result is
+                evaluated as -1 and a FALSE result is evaluated as 0.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng5198.html">AND</A>
+<A HREF="ng13f30.html">IMP</A>
+<A HREF="ng1d3c8.html">NOT</A>
+<A HREF="ng2265a.html">OR</A>
+<A HREF="ng34a1f.html">XOR</A>
+<A HREF="ng34f34.html">Precedence</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngff2b.html b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngff2b.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f3cf7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Microsoft QuickBASIC v3/manual/ngff2b.html	
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>QuickBASIC 3.0 - Long Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
+<BODY>
+
+<A HREF="ngfc6d.html">[&lt;&lt;Previous Entry]</A>
+<A HREF="ng320.html">[^^Up^^]</A>
+<A HREF="ng101c4.html">[Next Entry&gt;&gt;]</A>
+<A HREF="menu.html" >[Menu]</A>
+<A HREF="info.html">[About The Guide]</A>
+<HR>
+<PRE>
+<B>ERASE                    Reset Static Array or Deallocate Dynamic Array</B>
+
+ <B>ERASE</B> <U>arrayname</U>[,<U>arrayname</U>]...
+
+    Resets or deallocates one or more arrays.
+
+   <U>arrayname</U>    The name of an array variable (do not include
+                parentheses).
+
+   ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      <B>Notes:</B>    ERASE resets all elements of a static numeric array to 0
+                and all elements of a static string array to null.
+
+                ERASE deallocates storage for a dynamic array, allowing
+                storage to be reallocated by means of DIM or REDIM.
+
+                Static arrays may not be reDIMensioned.
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<B>See Also:</B>
+<A HREF="ng7c2f.html">CLEAR</A>
+<A HREF="ngdcd0.html">DIM</A>
+<A HREF="ng2a6f2.html">REDIM</A>
+<A HREF="ng4c6c.html">$STATIC</A>
+<A HREF="ng47f3.html">$DYNAMIC</A>
+<HR>
+This page created by ng2html v1.05, the Norton guide to HTML conversion utility.
+Written by <A HREF="http://www.acemake.com/hagbard">Dave Pearson</A>
+<HR>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>